JP2019107148A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that prevents a fraudulent act to a setting function.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a setting change control process to control to a setting change state, a RAM clear process, a setting confirmation control process to control to a setting confirmation state, a signal acquisition process configured to be able to acquire the ON/OFF state of a setting switch signal, a door open signal, and a RAM clear switch signal, and a determination process to determine the state of the signal acquired by the signal acquisition process. The determination process includes a setting change shift determination process to determine whether or not to shift to the setting change control process on the basis of the state of the setting switch signal, the door open signal, and the RAM clear switch signal, a RAM clear shift determination process to determine whether or not to shift to a RAM clear process on the basis of at least the state of the RAM clear switch signal, and a setting confirmation shift determination process to determine whether or not to shift to the setting confirmation control process on the basis of the state of the setting switch signal, the door open signal, and the RAM clear switch signal.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 30

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a ball and ball game machine, a lottery is executed when the gaming ball enters the starting opening, and when the lottery is won, a profit state advantageous to the player is obtained. It is configured to be generated and enjoy the game by this (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-22220 A

  Such a ball and ball game machine does not have a so-called "setting function" for changing the lottery probability according to the setting stage, and the lottery probability (big hit probability) is fixed, but it is set. When it is intended to install a function, there is a high possibility that the setting function may be tampered with, and measures to prevent this are desired.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine which can effectively prevent unauthorized operation of the setting function.

The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means. Although the corresponding elements in the embodiments are shown in parentheses, the present invention is not limited thereto.
(1) Control means (main control unit 20) configured to be able to execute the power-on process (FIGS. 6A to 16) at the time of power-on, and centrally controlling the game operation;
Door open detection means (door open sensor 61) capable of detecting the open state of the front door arranged openably and closably in the gaming machine body;
Setting switch (setting key switch 94),
RAM clear switch (98), and
It is a gaming machine configured to be able to set to any one of a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player,
The power on process is
A setting change control process (S023 in FIG. 6A, FIG. 10) for controlling the setting value to a changeable setting change state;
RAM clear processing (S 031 in FIG. 6B) for clearing the RAM of the control means;
A setting confirmation control process (S027 in FIG. 6B, FIG. 13) for controlling the current setting value to a setting confirmation state that can be confirmed;
Acquire a setting switch signal that indicates the on / off state of the setting switch, a door open signal that indicates the door open / close state of the door open detection means, and a RAM clear switch signal that indicates the on / off state of the RAM clear switch. Possible signal acquisition processing (S067 in FIG. 7);
A determination process of determining a state of the signal acquired by the signal acquisition process (S014 in FIG. 6A, S025 in FIG. 6B, S026);
The determination process is
A setting change shift determination process (S014 in FIG. 6A) that determines whether to shift to the setting change control processing based on the state of the setting switch signal, the state of the door open signal, and the state of the RAM clear switch signal. When,
RAM clear shift determination processing (S025 in FIG. 6B) that determines whether to shift to the RAM clear processing based on at least the state of the RAM clear switch signal;
A setting confirmation shift determination process (S026 in FIG. 6B) that determines whether to shift to the setting confirmation control processing based on the state of the setting switch signal, the state of the door open signal, and the state of the RAM clear switch signal. And including
A game machine characterized by
(2) The setting change transition determination process
When at least the state of the door open signal is the door closed state, it is determined that the process does not shift to the setting change control process (FIG. 30, S014 in FIG. 6A),
The gaming machine according to the above (1), characterized in that
(3) The setting confirmation shift determination processing
When at least the state of the door open signal is the door closed state, it is determined that the setting confirmation control process is not performed (FIG. 30, S026 in FIG. 6B),
The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, characterized in that

  According to the present invention, it is possible to effectively prevent an unauthorized action on the setting function.

FIG. 1 is a front view showing an appearance of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game board of the game machine, and an effect button. It is a block diagram showing the control device of the game machine. FIG. 12 is a diagram for describing the game state transition of the gaming machine. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram of assistance in explaining screen display of a liquid crystal display device according to the gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows the first half of the main control side main processing concerning the game machine. It is a flow chart which shows the second half of the main control side main processing concerning the game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process in FIG. 6A. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st power supply abnormality check process in FIG. 6A. It is a flowchart which shows the command transmission process in FIG. 6A. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change management process in FIG. 6A. It is a flowchart which shows the transmission command table selection process in FIG. 6B. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st command data creation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process in FIG. 6B. It is a flowchart which shows the backup restoration process in FIG. 6B. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd command data creation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the operation confirmation timer setting process in FIG. 6B. It is a flow chart which shows the main control side timer interruption processing concerning the game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd power supply abnormality check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting abnormality check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 starting opening check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the first half of a process during special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the second half of a process during special symbol confirmation time in FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing a special motorized character article management process in FIG. 17; It is a flowchart which shows the performance display monitor process in FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing out-of-area RAM check processing in FIG. 25. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the operation confirmation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the display data update process in FIG. It is an address map regarding the memory space which concerns on the main control part of the game machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of three things, the input information of the setting key switch which concerns on the game machine, a RAM clear switch, and a door open sensor, the value of W register | resistor, and a transfer process route. It is a figure which shows the source code (first half part) corresponding to a part of process of the main control side main process, and the processing order for every processing state. It is a figure which shows the source code (second half part) corresponding to a part of process of the main control side main process, and the processing order for every processing state. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for describing a setting confirmation process (S932, S938, S939) of FIG. 13; It is a figure which shows the setting transmission time command transmission address table (A) which concerns on the game machine, a specification designation command preparation table (B), and a customer waiting command creation table (C). It is a figure which shows RAM clear command transmission address table (A), RAM clear command preparation table (B), specification specification command preparation table (C), and customer waiting command preparation table (D) concerning the game machine. Backup return command transmission address table (A) related to the same gaming machine, power failure return display command creation table (B), special figure 1 pending number specification command creation table (C), special figure 2 pending number specification command creation table (D FIG. It is a figure which shows identification display part LED data table (a) and decimal value LED data table (b) which concern on the game machine. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram of assistance in explaining display states of performance indicators during various game periods. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for describing an effect control command in each processing route. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the source code of the setting confirmation process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. (The figure (A) is 1st embodiment (comparative example), the figure (B) 2nd embodiment (modification). Show). It is a flow chart which shows main control side main processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the source code corresponding to a part of process of the main control side main process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment, and the processing order for every processing state. RAM clear command transmission address table (A) according to the fourth embodiment, RAM clear command creation table (B), spec specification command creation table (C), customer waiting command creation table (D), game start command creation It is a figure which shows Table (E). It is a figure which shows an example of the log | history list selection screen which concerns on this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the log | history confirmation screen (setting log | history, error log | history, the list display of big hit log | history) which concerns on this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the log | history confirmation screen which concerns on this invention.

  The preferred embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine according to the present invention.

First Embodiment
<1. Outline of configuration: FIG. 1 and FIG. 2>
An outline of a configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the front of the pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 (hereinafter referred to as “game machine 1”) has a frame-like front frame 2 attached to the front of a wooden outer frame 4 in an openable / closable manner. The game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in a storage frame (not shown), and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 is made to face the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Further, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling the game operation are disposed.

  A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6. By inserting a key into this key cylinder and operating it to one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 By operating on the other side, the lock state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and opened on the front side.

  Below the glass door 6, a front operation panel 7 pivotally supported by the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) is disposed. An upper saucer unit 8 is provided on the front operation panel 7, and an upper saucer 9 for storing the ejected game balls is formed in the upper saucer unit 8.

  In the upper tray unit 8, a ball removing button 14 for pulling out the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 9 to the lower side of the gaming machine 1, and payout of the gaming balls to the gaming ball lending device (not shown) A ball lending button 11 for making a request, and a card return button 12 for making a request for returning the value medium inserted into the gaming ball lending device are provided.

  Further, the upper tray unit 8 includes a push button type effect button 13 (first operation means) configured to be operable by the player, and a cross-shaped direction key 75 (second Operation means of In the effect button 13 or the direction key 75 (upper button 75a, right button 75b, lower button 75c, left button 75d), reception of operation input is valid during a predetermined operation reception valid period in a so-called "player participation type effect" or the like. When a predetermined operation (for example, a single press, a long press, a continuous hit, etc.) is made during this period, it is possible to bring about a change in presentation before and after the operation. In addition, these operation means, the game setting screen regarding the game in "during customer waiting standby effect (during demo screen)" (menu screen on which volume setting, light amount setting, effect mode setting, etc. can be performed), the player It is also used when making a favorite game setting. The frame effect button 13 has a built-in lamp (button LED 13b) formed therein, and when the operation acceptance valid period comes, the button LED 13b is lit in a predetermined color to notify that it is in the operation valid period It is supposed to be.

  Further, on the right end side of the front operation panel 7, a launch operation handle 15 for operating the launch device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided.

  In addition, on both sides of the upper portion of the front frame 2 and above the launch operation handle 15, speakers 46 are provided which exhibit a sound effect (sound effect) by sound. In addition, a decoration lamp 45 (full-color LED (for full-color display) for exhibiting a light effect by decoration of light in an appropriate place of the gaming machine, for example, in the circumferential direction on the rim of the front frame of the glass door 6 or inside the center decoration 48 described later. A plurality of LEDs) are provided.

(Game board: Figure 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. On the game board 3, as shown in the figure, a ball guiding rail 5 for guiding the launched game ball is annularly mounted as a board division member, and a substantially circular area surrounded by the ball guiding rail 5 is The game area 3a and the four corners are non-game areas.

  A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 3a. The liquid crystal display device 36 is independently controlled by a plurality of numbers, characters, symbols, etc. in three (left, middle, right) display areas (symbol variation display areas) under the control of the effect control unit 24 described later. Various kinds of display including variation display operation (variation display and stop display) of kinds of decorative symbols (for example, left symbol (corresponding to left display area), middle symbol (corresponding to middle display area), right symbol (corresponding to right display area)) Display the effect by an image.

  Further, in the game area 3a, a center decoration 48 (flow path distribution means) is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a far-rolling manner. The center decorative body 48 protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from the surrounding game balls and is provided along the front side of the game board 3 and fixed to the game board 3 with a front mounting plate 48a A weir frame portion 48b which forms the outer periphery of the body 48 and surrounds the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is integrally provided. A floating area through which game balls can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guiding rail 5, and the game balls are also guided to the right side of the center decoration 48. The game balls thrown into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launch device 32 are distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the hail frame 48b depending on the launch strength or stroke length of the game balls, and the left side of the center ornament 48. It flows down either of the left flow down path 3b and the right flow down path 3c on the right side.

  The non-playing area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a various function display area, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is located at the upper starting opening 34 (for the first special symbol) and lower. A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) configured side by side corresponding to the starting opening 35 (for the second special symbol) And are provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the 'special symbol variation display game' is executed by the variation display operation of the "special symbol" (variation display operation of setting one variation start and one variation stop). And in said liquid crystal display device 36, it synchronizes in time with the fluctuation display of the special symbol by this special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and displays the decoration symbol by an image by fluctuation display, various notice effects (effect image) Along with the 'decorative symbol variation display game' is to be executed. The details of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game will be described later.

  Further, in the various function display sections, next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a composite display device (an LED display device for holding composite display) 38c comprising a 7-segment display (with dots) is disposed. The combination of special symbol 1, special symbol 2, normal symbol display of the number of operation pending balls, fluctuation time shortening function in action (time), and state notification in high probability (in high probability) Because, it is a hold / time-short / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter referred to as “composite display device”) having five display functions.

  Further, in the various function display sections, a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged is provided adjacent to the composite display device 38c. In this normal symbol display device 39a, the normal symbol change display game is executed by the variable display operation of the normal symbol represented by the two LEDs. For example, as the variable display operation, the normal symbol by the LED repeats turning on and off alternately in a seesaw manner, and by stopping in a state where one side is turned on, the success or failure of the normal symbol changing display game becomes clear There is. Also, a right-handed display 39b is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display 39a. In this right-handed display device 39b, it is advantageous to aim at the game ball to pass through the right flow down path 3c by the combination of the lighting and non-lighting states of the LED, or it is advantageous for the game ball to flow down the left flow down path 3b Informing you whether "left-handed", which aims to pass through, is advantageous. If the LED is on, it is informed that it is advantageous to hit the right. In addition, a round number display device 39c in which two LEDs (round display LEDs) are disposed adjacent to the right-handed display device 39b is provided. The number-of-rounds display device 39c reports the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) relating to the jackpot by the combination of lighting (red, blue) / lighting-off state of the two LEDs.

  Below the center decoration 48, the upper starting opening 34 (first special symbol starting opening: first starting means) and the lower starting opening 35 (second special symbol starting opening: second starting means) The normal fluctuation winning device 41 with is provided at the top and bottom, and inside each detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper starting opening sensor 34a, lower starting opening sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting passage of gaming balls are formed It is done.

  The upper start opening 34, which is the first special symbol start opening, is referred to as a first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 1") in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device), and in some cases "special symbol The winning opening according to the start condition of the variable display operation (abbreviated as 1)) is configured as a fixed winning rate type winning device that does not have a "starting opening opening / closing means" that allows the starting opening to be opened or enlarged. In this embodiment, the left flow down path to the upper starting opening 34 by the action of the game ball falling direction conversion member (for example, a game nail (not shown), the wind turbine 44, the center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a. The game ball that has flowed down 3b has a configuration that is easy to enter (winning), while the game ball that has flowed down the right flow down path 3c has a configuration that is difficult to enter or unable to enter.

  The normal fluctuation winning device 41 is configured as a winning ratio changing type winning device capable of changing the winning percentage of the game ball of the starting opening by the starting opening opening / closing means. In the present embodiment, the left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 are provided as start opening opening and closing means, and the movable wing piece 47 performs the opening and closing operation to lower start opening 35 which is the second special symbol start opening. It can be opened or expanded.

  The lower starting opening 35 of the normal fluctuation winning device 41 is referred to as a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 2") in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device), and in some cases as "special symbol 2" The winning area according to the start condition of the variable display operation (abbreviated) is a winning opening, and the winning area of the lower starting opening 35 is an open state that facilitates winning according to the operating state (active or inactive) of the movable wing piece 47 It is converted into (a winning easy state) and a closed state (a hard winning state) which makes winning more difficult than in the open state or makes winning impossible. In the present embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inoperative, the lower starting opening 35 is maintained in a closed state (impossible state) in which winning can not be made.

  Also, on both sides of the normal fluctuation winning device 41, there are four general winning openings 43 on the left and one on the right, and a general winning detecting the passage of the game ball in each inside A mouth sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed.

  Also, on the upper right side of the normal variation winning device 41, that is, above the middle portion of the right downflow path 3c, a normal symbol start port 37 formed of a passing gate (specific passing area) through which gaming balls can pass is provided. . The normal symbol starting port 37 is a winning opening related to the variable display operation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 39a, and the normal symbol starting port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) which detects gaming balls passing therethrough. Is formed.

  In the middle of the route from the normal symbol starting opening 37 to the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 41 in the right flowing down path 3c, the special fluctuation winning construction configured to be able to open or expand the big prize opening 50 by the open and close type open door 52b. A device 52 (specially powered combination) is provided, inside of which is formed a special winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball entering the special winning opening 50.

  The periphery of the special winning opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms the downstream guiding portion of the right flow down path 3c. There is. And if the big winning opening 50 is in a closed state (big winning opening closed state) by the open door 52b, by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, the downstream guiding portion It forms part of the upper side 55a). Also, in the downstream area of the right flow down path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, precisely in the game area above the big winning opening 50, the flow path correction plate is approximately parallel to the flow down direction of the gaming balls. 51d is provided so as to project the flowing gaming balls toward the large winning opening 50.

  The ball entry process of the game ball to the special winning opening 50 is as follows. The game ball which has passed through the floating area between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guiding rail 5 protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. Will flow down along. Then, the gaming ball contacts the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d projecting from the gaming board 3 surface, whereby the flow-down direction of the gaming ball is corrected in the direction of the big winning opening 50 (downward). At this time, if the big winning opening 50 is covered by the opening and closing type open door 52b (big winning opening closed state), the gaming ball rolls on this, and the predetermined arrangement not shown By the game nail, it is led in the direction of the tulip type normal fluctuation winning device 41 (the lower starting opening 35). At this time, if the lower starting opening 35 is in a winning possible state (starting opening open state), the gaming ball may win in the lower starting opening 35, but the open door 52b recedes into the game board surface and the special winning opening 50 If the game player is in the open state (large winning opening state), the gaming ball is guided into the large winning opening 50.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player aims the firing position at the special variation winning device 52 side (when the gaming ball is aimed to pass the right falling path 3c), the upper starting opening The game ball is hard to be induced on the side 34 or is not induced. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win each starting opening 34, 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates. However, the movable wing piece 47 operates with an open / close pattern that is more advantageous than at least the normal state when in the gaming state with the power support presence state described later. Therefore, in the case of this power support state, aiming at the game ball to pass the right flow down path 3c, not "left-handed" to aim the game ball to pass the left flow down path 3b " A "right strike" is considered advantageous. In other words, whether to strike "left" or "right" is advantageous for the player depending on the game state, and it is under the state without power support (for example, the normal state or the normal state). In the later-described latent state, "left-handed" is advantageous, and in the power-on state (for example, time saving state or positive variation state), "right-handed" is advantageous.

  The number, shape, formation position, and the like of each of the above-described winning means can be appropriately changed in accordance with the game property. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change, according to the game characteristic, whether the game ball in which each winning means flows down the left flow down path 3b and / or the right flow down path 3c is capable of winning.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, among the various winning openings provided in the game area 3a, the number of winning balls per winning ball promised for each winning opening (for example, three upper starting openings 34) , 1 lower start opening 35, 15 large winning openings 50, 6 general winning openings 43, 0 normal symbol starting openings 37 (no prize balls) to be paid out from the game ball payout device 19 It has become. The game balls that did not win in each of the above-described winning openings are discharged from the game area 3 a through the out port 49. Here, "winning" is not a structure in which the winning opening takes in the gaming ball inside, or the winning opening takes in the gaming ball inside, but a winning opening consisting of a passing type gate (for example, the normal symbol starting opening 37 In the case of), it means that the game ball passes through the gate, and in fact, when the game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning opening, “winning” in the winning opening Is treated as having occurred. The game ball pertaining to this winning is also referred to as a "winning ball". It should be noted that if the game ball enters the winning opening, the game ball is detected by the prize detection switch, so unless otherwise noted in the present specification, whether the game ball was detected in the prize detection switch Regardless of whether or not there is a case where the game ball enters the winning opening, it may be referred to as "winning".

<Movable body role>
Further, in the area of the game board, a plurality of movable body effects are disposed at positions which do not interfere with the flow of the game balls. In this example, the first movable body character (clock-like character) 80 is disposed at the upper right side in the center decoration 48, that is, at a position that does not obstruct the flow of gaming balls passing through the right flow downward path 3c. A second movable body part (flower-shaped part) 90 is disposed on the lower side. The watch-shaped character 80, which is the first movable body character, has a clock panel 81 including a numeral display section divided into 12 number sectors with Roman numerals "I" to "XII" attached thereto; It has a timepiece hand 82 consisting of a short hand and a long hand which can rotate on the timepiece plate portion 81 and can indicate time and minute as required, and is configured as a timepiece-shaped character 80 as a whole. The watch-shaped character 80 rotates at a high speed around the clock hand 82, and the number sector of the clock panel 81 colors with a predetermined "color and number", and serves to show the player an expectation for a hit. . The flower-shaped character 90, which is the second movable body character, has a corolla A2 consisting of a plurality of petals arranged around the flower heart A1, and the flower heart A1 and the corolla A2 are vertically (falling) or lateral Attach the first movable body 91 configured to be movable (projecting movement) and the bale B1 located on the outer periphery of the corolla A2 to the tip of the stem portion B2, and allow the bale B1 and the stem portion B2 to move up and down (dropping movement) And a second movable body 92 configured in FIG. As illustrated, the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 are disposed in a state in which the solid line position near one side (right side) of the liquid crystal screen is the initial position and both are united. In the case of this embodiment, the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 are operable independently of each other, and the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 are also operable in the vertical direction while being united. is there. The movable body part functions as a rendering means, and realizes the movable body representation such as suggesting the degree of expectation to the hit by its operation mode.

<2. Controller: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device that controls the gaming operation of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

  The control device of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter referred to as a "main control unit 20") that centrally controls control (game operation control) related to the entire game operation. An effect control board (effect control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as "effect control portion 24") which comprehensively manages execution control (effect control) of effect by the effect means upon receipt of an effect control command from the main control portion 20. And a payout control board (payout control means) 29 for performing payout control of the winning balls by the game ball payout device 19 and a necessary power source (including a backup power source) for each board of the gaming machine from an external power source (not shown) And power supply substrate (power control means (not shown)). Further, a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. The power supply route is omitted in FIG.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 has a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 201 (main control CPU), and in addition to a control program describing a game operation control procedure, a ROM 202 (main control for storing various data necessary for game operation control) A ROM) and a RAM 203 (main control RAM) functioning as a work area and a buffer memory are mounted to constitute a microcomputer (Z80 system equivalent product) as a whole.

  Also, although not shown, the main control unit 20 provides an interrupt signal to the CPU, CTC that gives the Z80 system a function to generate pulse output (bit rate generator) for periodic interrupt, constant period, and time measurement. Interrupt controller circuit that exhibits interrupt enable / interrupt disable function such as timer interrupt, Reset circuit that can reset CPU by detecting system power on / off or power supply abnormality detection, control program, control program A watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors abnormal operation, a designated area out-of-specification inhibition (IAT) circuit that monitors whether a program is correctly executed within a preset address range, a certain range of hardware It also has a counter circuit for generating random numbers. Note that at least the main control unit (delivery control board) 20 and the delivery control board 29 start execution of necessary backup processing prior to power shut down by receiving a voltage drop signal received from the power board, and before power shut down. The game operation of can be resumed after power is restored (backup function). In this gaming machine 1, the stored contents of each RAM can be held for at least several days.

  The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number and a sampling circuit that samples a random number value at a predetermined timing from the random number generation circuit, and functions as a 16-bit counter as a whole. The CPU 201 sends an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as the internal lottery random number value (big hit determination random number (random number size: 65536)). , Use the random value for the big hit lottery. Note that the internal lottery random number is obtained by adding a soft random number value generated by an appropriate software process and a hard random number value in order to prevent a goto act such as hitting and hitting.

<Memory address map: FIG. 29>
Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, FIG. 29 shows an outline of an address map regarding memory spaces (RAM 203, ROM 202) used by the main control unit 20. The memory space shown in FIG. 29 is configured around two spaces of a memory space accessed with a 16-bit address and an I / O space accessed with an 8-bit address.

  As illustrated, the memory space used by the main control unit 20 is provided as a memory address map from address 0000H to address FFFFH. Specifically, the memory space (512 bytes) of the RAM 203 from address 0000H to address 01FFH, unused area where access from address 0200H to address 0FFFH is prohibited (hereinafter referred to as "access prohibited area"), address 1000H A memory space of an internal function register (register group for controlling each function mounted on the main control unit 20), an address inhibition area of addresses 1073H to 7FFFH, an address inhibition area of addresses 8000H to A7FFH, a memory of the ROM 202 A space from address A800H to address FFFFH is assigned to the access prohibited area.

  In the area of the ROM 202, as shown, a program / data area in which a series of game control procedures are described from address 8000H to address A6FFH in a memory space (address 10240 bytes) from address 8000H to address A7FFH, address A700H to The ROM comment storage area up to address A77FH, the address A780H to A79FH is allocated to the CALLV instruction vector area, the address A7A0H to A7A7H is allocated to the interrupt processing vector area, and the address A7A8H to A7FFH is allocated to the HW parameter area. It is done.

  The "program / data area" of the ROM 202 is a "game control program (in-area program)" for executing a game operation process related to normal game progress such as a symbol variation display game or a hit game, a base display described later, etc. An area for storing "information display control program (out-of-area program)" for executing information display processing (base display processing) related to "performance information display" not directly related to the game progress, and various fixed data related to the program It is. After reset, the CPU 201 starts program execution from address 8000H. In the RAM 203, as shown, work areas (in-area RAM area at addresses 0000H to 00FFH and out-of-area RAM area at addresses 0100H to 01FFH) corresponding to the in-area program and out-of-area program are provided. It is done.

  The "ROM comment area" is an area in which arbitrary data such as a program title, a maker name, and a product version can be set. "CALLV instruction vector area" is an area to set the upper address of the subroutine of CALLV instruction described later (CALLV instruction vector table). "Interrupt processing vector area" is the start address of timer interrupt processing (main) This is an area (interrupt processing vector table) to be set. The “HW parameter area” is a settable area of parameters for setting CPU internal functions in hardware. The parameters set in the HW parameter area include, for example, periodic reset setting, system clock setting, INT / NMI setting, program end address (HPRGEND) used in program / data area, start address of access prohibited area (HRAMSTAT) and It includes data on end address (HRAMEND), security code, manufacturer code, product code, etc. In addition, access to the program / data area (areas (addresses where programs and data are not stored) of areas HPRGEND + 1 to A6FFH) after the address next to the address set by the program end address (HPRGEND), ROM comment area Illegal when it detects an event such as access to addresses A700H to A77FH, access to the area (access prohibited area) between the start address (HRAMSTAT) and end address (HRAMEND), write operation to the ROM area, etc. Assuming that access has occurred, an illegal reset that resets only the CPU core is generated. When an illegal reset occurs, it is controlled to an error state, and while progress of the game is stopped, until a new set value is set (a setting change management process described later (step S023 in FIG. 6A) is executed) ), That error is not cleared.

  It returns to the explanation of FIG. The main control unit 20 includes an upper start opening sensor 34a for detecting winning on the upper starting opening 34, a lower starting opening sensor 35a for detecting winning on the lower start opening 35, and a game ball for the normal symbol starting opening 37. The symbol opening sensor 37a for detecting the passage of the game, the special winning opening sensor 52a for detecting winning on the special winning opening 50, the general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting winning on the general winning opening 43, and the out opening 49 An OUT monitoring switch 49a is connected to detect gaming balls (so-called out balls) discharged from the gaming machine through each winning opening, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these. The main control unit 20 grasps which winning opening the game ball has won (enters) based on the detection signal from each sensor.

  Further, the main control unit 20 includes a RAM clear switch 98 (for example, a push button type switch) for initializing a predetermined area of the RAM 203, and an illicit act against the pachinko gaming machine 1 (radio wave error, magnetic A fraud detection sensor (a vibration sensor, a radio wave sensor, a magnetic sensor or the like) for detecting an error, a vibration error or the like is connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these.

  The main control unit 20 also includes an ordinary electric combination solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing 47 of the lower starting opening 35 and a special winning opening solenoid 52c for opening and closing the open door 52b of the special winning opening 50. And the main control unit 20 can transmit control signals for controlling them.

  The main control unit 20 is also connected to the special symbol display device 38a and the special symbol display device 38b, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling the display of the special symbols 1 and 2 There is. Further, a normal symbol display device 39a is connected to the main control unit 20, and a control signal for controlling display of the normal symbol can be transmitted.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a compound display 38c, a right-handed display 39b, and a round number display 39c, and the main control 20 controls the display of various information displayed on these. Control signals can be transmitted.

  Further, the frame external terminal board 21 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 receives predetermined game information from the frame external terminal board 21 (for example, winning game start information, winning information for the starting opening) (Special symbol variation start information), prize ball number information, security information (for example, vibration sensor error, radio wave sensor error, magnetic sensor error, RAM clear, generated information such as setting change etc.) The frame external terminal board 21 is configured to be connectable to a so-called data counter DT and a hall computer HC provided outside the game machine, and the frame external terminal A signal (outer end signal) output from the substrate 21 is sent to the data counter DT and the hall computer HC The data counter DT is connected to the connected gaming machine. It is a game information notification device for notifying specific game information to be played, and is usually installed at the top of the game machine, and the hole computer HC is a game based on the outer end signal output from the frame external terminal board 21. It is a management computer for exclusive use of a game arcade which monitors and collects game information of the machine and comprehensively manages the operation status etc. of the game machine installed in the pachinko hall.

  In addition, the main control unit 20 corresponds to a type test (a test relating to verification of a type of a gaming machine based on rules relating to accreditation of a gaming machine and a type verification of a type) conducted by the Japan Safety Electronic Communication Technology Association (BOU). Thus, it is possible to output from the frame external terminal board 21 a type test signal for specifying the game operation in real time. In addition, when installing a gaming machine that conforms to the type test in the pachinko hall, no change in the conformed control program is permitted. For this reason, even after being installed in the pachinko hall, the type test signal is repeatedly output and processed (refer to the after-mentioned irradiation test signal terminal management process (step S823 in FIG. 25)).

  Further, a payout control board (a payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and a payout control board (a launch control unit) 28 for controlling the launch device 32 and a payout of the game balls are connected to the payout control board 29. The game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 for performing the game is connected. The main control unit 20 can transmit a control command related to the payout (a payout control command for specifying the number of winning balls) to the payout control board 29. The main roles of the payout control board 29 are reception of a payout control command from the main control unit 20, award ball payout control of the gaming ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, and transmission of a payout status signal to the main control unit 20. Etc. Based on the payout state signal, the main control unit 20 monitors whether the function of the game ball payout device 19 is normal or not (whether or not a ball jam or a payout of a prize ball occurs or not).

  Further, a payout control board (dispense control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and when there is a need to pay out the winning balls, a control command relating to the payout to the payout control board 29 It is possible to transmit the specified payout control command).

  The payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 for controlling the launch device 32 and a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 for payout of game balls. The main roles of the payout control board 29 include reception of a payout control command from the main control unit 20, prize ball payout control of the gaming ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, transmission of a status signal to the main control unit 20, etc. It is.

  The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a supply end detection sensor 19a for detecting a shortage of supply of game balls and a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting a game ball (prize ball) to be paid out, and the payout control board 29 Can be received. Further, the game ball payout device 19 is provided with a payout motor 19c for driving a ball payout mechanism (not shown) for paying out the game balls, and the payout control board 29 controls the payout motor 19c. Can be transmitted.

  Further, the payout control board 29 is a full detection sensor 60 (in this embodiment, a detection sensor for detecting the storage state of gaming balls stored in the upper tray 9) for detecting the full state with the gaming balls. A door opening sensor 61 is connected. The door open sensor 61 according to the present embodiment functions as a door open detection unit, and is a detection sensor that detects the open state of the front frame 2 and / or the front operation panel 7. On the other hand, it is configured to be ON (open state detection) when opened to the front side and OFF (closed state detection) when closed.

  The payout control board 29 is capable of transmitting various status signals to the main control unit 20 based on detection signals from the fullness detection sensor 60, the door open sensor 61, the shortage of replenishment detection sensor 19a, and the ball counting sensor 19b. It has become. In this status signal, a "ball clogging signal" indicating a full state, a "door opening signal" indicating that the front frame 2 and the front operation panel 7 are open, and a shortage of game ball supply from the game ball payout device 19 Includes a “supply out signal” indicating that the ball has run out, a “counting error signal” that indicates that the ball counting sensor 19b has an abnormality due to insufficient payout balls, a “dispense completion signal” indicating that the dispensing operation has been completed, etc. It is configured to be able to transmit various status signals. Based on these status signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether the front frame 2 and the front operation panel 7 are open (door open error), whether the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal or not (supply error), , Monitor the upper tray 9 full condition (ball clogging error) and the like. Although it has been described above that the detection signal (door open signal) from the door open sensor 61 is input to the main control unit 20 through the payout control board 29, the main control section without the payout control board 29 20 may be directly input.

  Further, a release control substrate 28 is connected to the payout control substrate 29 so that a release permission signal ES for permitting release to the release control substrate 28 can be transmitted. The launch control board 28 controls the energization of the launch solenoid provided in the launch device 32 based on the output of the launch permission signal ES from the payout control board 29, and the game ball by the operation of the launch operation handle 15. The launch operation of the Specifically, it is detected that the launch permission signal ES is output from the payout control board 29, and that the player is touching the steering wheel by a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the launch operation handle 15. The firing operation of the gaming ball is permitted on condition that the firing stop switch (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 is not operated. Therefore, when the launch permission signal ES is not output, the launch operation is not executed even if the launch operation handle 15 is operated, and the gaming ball is not launched. Further, the launch strength of the game ball can be changed according to the amount of operation of the firing operation handle 15. When the dispensing control board 29 detects the clogging error, the ball control signal is sent to the main control unit 20 and the output of the release permission signal ES to the emission control board 28 is stopped, so that the upper tray 9 is full. Control is performed to stop the striking operation until it is done.

  Further, a setting key switch 94, a setting change switch 95, and a setting change completion switch 96 are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these switches. Further, a setting display 97 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of this.

  The setting key switch 94 can be operated to change setting values by inserting a setting key owned by a game store associate (hall clerk) or the like when the power is turned on and turning it ON / OFF. It is a key switch for switching to. The setting change switch 95 is a setting change switch for changing the setting value in the setting change allowance state. The setting change completion switch 96 is a switch for setting determination used when determining the selected setting value. The setting change switch 95 and the setting change completion switch 96 are all switches that can be operated by the operator (for example, a push button switch). The setting key switch 94, the setting change switch 95, the setting change completion switch 96, and the RAM clear switch 98 are formed at appropriate positions inside the gaming machine from the viewpoint of preventing tampering, and the front frame 2 is not opened. As long as the external ON / OFF operation is impossible.

  The setting display unit 97 displays information on setting values and functions as a setting display unit. In the case of the present embodiment, one seven-segment display is configured and mounted on the main control unit (main control board) 20. The setting display 97 is not limited to the main control board, but the payout control board 28, the emission control board 29, the relay board (a relay board for relaying connection between various display devices, switches, etc. and the control board: Or an effect control unit (effect control board (including a liquid crystal control board)) 24 or the like can be provided at an appropriate place inside the gaming machine.

(About setting value)
The above-mentioned “set value” is to bring about a change in the ball out rate (so-called, machine split (PAYOUT rate)) in stages, and in the present embodiment, set values of 6 stages of settings 1 to 6 are provided ing. The "set value" defines at least a lottery probability (winning probability) of a big hit (a hit type that a condition device to be described later operates) is set in stages 1 to 6 (six stages), and the set value Of the jackpot, the jackpot probability of the jackpot (the jackpot winning probability) is set to be higher, and the player is made more advantageous. For example, at low probability, with setting 1 1/410, setting 2 1/390, setting 3 1/370, setting 4 1/350, setting 5 1/330, setting 6 1/320, etc. is there. That is, the higher the setting value, the easier it is to win a big hit (high mechanical ratio), which is advantageous to the player. As described above, the set value is a value that mainly defines an event affecting the machine division by stages, and means a value for a grade related to the likelihood of occurrence of a specific event such as a big hit. Such a “setting value” is determined based on the sales strategy of the pachinko hall (game arcade), and the hall clerk operates the setting change switch 95 to determine the target setting value.

  When a plurality of jackpots are provided, the winning probability of one or more jackpots can be changed according to the set value. For example, when there are four types of jackpots, ie jackpots 1 to 4, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning all jackpots 1 to 4 may be configured to be higher, or some jackpots It may be configured to increase the winning probability of only one big hit 1 to 3 (in this case, a common winning probability will be common for all 4 for big hit 4), or only a specific big hit (for example, only 1 big hit) In this case, for the jackpots 2 to 4, all the set values have a common winning probability). Further, the larger the set value is, the larger the winning probability of jackpots 1 to 4 may be. Further, the winning probability of the small hit type that does not become an operation trigger of the condition device can be changed according to the set value, as in the case of the above-mentioned big hit.

(About setting value change operation)
In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, at least the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are controlled to be in the setting change allowance state when the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on by other key operation or the like. , It is controlled to the setting change prohibition state. When the setting change switch 95 is turned ON in this setting change allowance state, the current display value of the setting display 97 is "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → ..." It is switched and displayed so as to circulate in the range of 1 to 6 as in FIG. When the desired setting value is displayed, when the setting change completion switch 96 is turned ON (setting confirmation operation), the current display value is confirmed as the current setting value, and the setting value data is in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 ( Stored in the setting value storage area). After that, the game will be started under the fixed set value. When the setting key switch 94 is operated from the current ON state to the OFF state, the setting change allowance state is ended. The main control unit 20 is a set value selection means for selecting any set value from among a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player based on the operation of the predetermined operation means, and the set value selection means And a function unit as setting value setting means for setting the setting value selected by the setting unit.

  Further, the main control unit 20 can transmit various game processing information such as information related to the special symbol variation display game and error information according to the processing state to the effect control unit 24 by the effect control command. . However, in order to prevent the goto action, the main control unit 20 only transmits a signal to the effect control unit 24 and has a configuration of one-way communication in which the signal from the effect control unit 24 can not be received. .

  Further, a performance indicator 99 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of this.

(About the game result information displayed on the performance indicator 99)
The performance indicator 99 functions as information display means for displaying (notifying) information (hereinafter referred to as "performance information") related to the game result for a predetermined period (specific game period), and includes a plurality of seven-segment LEDs. In the performance display 99 of this embodiment, four 7-segment LEDs (7-segment displays 99a to 99d) in which a display unit and a circuit unit are unitized are arranged side by side, and mounted on the main control board 20, for example. To construct a display capable of displaying four-digit numbers. Although the details will be described later, the above-mentioned "performance information" is information mainly used by pachinko halls and related agencies for confirmation / investigation etc. For example, illegal adjustment of game nails and goto acts etc. Information to investigate whether the game machine's original game performance (design game ball performance) is legitimately exhibited, such as whether or not there is an abnormality in the game performance due to the game, in other words, "game Information on the results. Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the progress of the game itself when the player plays a game, unlike the notice effect and the like. Therefore, the performance indicator 99 is not installed at a place where it can be viewed by the player, but is installed at an easy-to-see place inside the gaming machine. Specifically, the main control unit (not to obscure the display unit of the performance indicator 99 composed of four 7-segment LEDs in a place easy to see from the back of the gaming machine, that is, hidden by a seal, a structure, etc.) Substrate case for protecting the control substrate or on a substrate such as main control substrate 20, delivery control substrate 28, emission control substrate 29, the above relay substrate, effect control unit (effect control substrate (including liquid crystal control substrate)) 24 or the like It is mounted on top. The four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side to display 4-digit numbers, and each 7-segment LED has decimal points DP (dots) below the 7-segment numbers.

Specifically, the following information can be adopted as the performance information.
(1) The total payout number paid out by a prize in the specific state (specific middle total number of prize balls: α) is divided by the total number of out balls in the specific state (specific number of out number: β) Information (specific ratio information) based on the value (α / β) can be adopted as performance information. Such specific ratio information is useful as an index for evaluating the out-dump performance of a gaming machine.
(1-1) The above "total payout number" is a game ball paid out when winning in the winning opening (upper starting opening 34, lower starting opening 35, general winning opening 43, big winning opening 50) Is the total value of the spheres). In the case of this embodiment, there are three upper starting openings 34, one lower starting opening 35, fifteen large winning openings 50, and six general winning openings 43. The total out ball number is the number of game balls (the number of game balls detected by the OUT monitoring switch 49 a) thrown from the launch device 32 into the game area 3 a.
(1-2) Further, which state is adopted as the “specific state” can be appropriately determined according to the performance information to be acquired. In the present embodiment, any state can be adopted among a normal state, a latent state, a short time state, a definite change state, a big hit game, a small hit game, etc. (Details of each game state will be described later. To do). Further, not only one state may be measured, but plural types of states may be measured. For example, a plurality of types of states can be appropriately selected as measurement targets, such as a normal state and a latent state, a normal state and a small hit game, and all game states except during a hit game.
(1-3) Also, as the period in the specific state, a period focusing on the big hit lottery probability may be taken as a measurement target, instead of focusing on each gaming state such as the normal state or the hit game. For example, the period of the jackpot lottery probability in the low probability state and / or the high probability state may be measured. In addition, the hit game by the big hit (during big hit game) is controlled to the low probability state, and during the hit game (small hit game) by the small hit, the gaming state at the time of its winning is continued, that is, the small hit game is released. The big hit lottery probability state at the time of the small hit is continued. Therefore, when it is desired to measure a period of a pure low probability state, a period excluding a big hit game may be taken as a measurement target. Further, when it is desired to measure the period of the low probability state and / or the high probability state excluding the big hit and the small hit both during the hit game, the period excluding the hit game may be measured. In addition, the details about the big hit type, the small hit type, the operation mode of these hit games, etc. will be described later.
(1-4) Also, as the "total payout number", one obtained by excluding one or a plurality of specific winning prize openings from the measurement target may be used as the total payout number (total winning number excluding specified prize winning openings). For example, among the winning openings, those obtained by excluding the large winning openings 40 and 50 from the measurement targets (in this case, the total number of payouts is obtained by excluding the hit from the measurement targets substantially). It is also good.
(2) In addition, it is also possible to measure only one of the total number of payouts, the total number of payouts excluding the specific winning opening, and the total number of out balls, and the measurement result may be used as performance information.
(3) In addition, information on the character ratio (total number of payouts by character / total number of payouts of all winning prize openings) may be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to use the ratio of payout by a character such as the normal fluctuation winning device 41 (lower starting opening 35) or the special fluctuation winning device 52 (big winning opening 50) among the total payout gaming balls as the performance information.

  One or more of the information (1) to (3) described above can be adopted as the performance information. In addition, when a plurality of performance information is adopted as a display target, the first performance information (base value described later) is displayed on the first performance display, and the second performance information (for example, character ratio information) is separately provided. A plurality of performance indicators corresponding to each piece of performance information may be provided, such as displaying on the second performance indicator. Further, when a plurality of performance information is displayed by one performance indicator 99, it may be configured to be able to switch and display one performance information and another performance information at predetermined time intervals, or a specific switch It is good also as composition which can be switched and displayed by ON / OFF operation of. In addition, what kind of information is adopted as the performance information can be determined appropriately.

  In this embodiment, the total number of payouts in the normal state (the number of regular payouts) and the total number of out balls in the regular state (normal number of outs) are measured in real time, and the number of regular payouts is the normal number of outs A value obtained by multiplying the value divided by 100 by 100 (the number of paid out usually × the number of out usually multiplied by 100) is adopted as performance information (also referred to as a base value), and this is determined by the performance display 99 (The displayed value is the value rounded to the first decimal place.) Therefore, the respective data of the number of normal payouts, the number of normals out, and the base value are stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 203 (the number of regular payouts storage area, the number of normal out storages area, the specific ratio information storage area). It is supposed to be. However, if the total number of out spheres has reached a prescribed number (for example, 60000), the measurement is temporarily ended and the measurement is ended, instead of simply measuring it permanently and displaying the base value (performance information). The base value at the measurement end time is stored as history information in a predetermined area (performance display storage area) of the RAM 203 (the current base value is stored). In the case of the present embodiment, the “specified number” as the above-mentioned measurement end trigger is not the number of out during normal operation, but the total number of out balls during all gaming states (including during per game) ") Is adopted. The total number of out-of-states is also measured in real time, and is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 203 (the total-state out number storage area). In the following, unless otherwise necessary for the convenience of description, various data used for base value calculation (the above-mentioned normal dispensing number storage area, the normal out number storage area, the specified ratio information storage area, all status out) The storage areas of the number storage area and the like are collectively referred to as “measurement information storage area”.

  Then, after storing the current base value as history information, clear the measurement information storage area used in the current measurement, and select the next normal payout number, the normal out number, the base value, and the total out sphere number. Start measurement. Thus, the next base value is measured and stored in real time.

  In the performance indicator 99, the previous base value as history information and the base value currently being measured in real time are alternately displayed at predetermined time intervals (simultaneous display is possible May). In the case of this embodiment, is it a base value (real-time base value: first base value) during measurement of two 7-segment indicators 99a and 99b in the front left half among four 7-segment LEDs? Or, function as “identification display unit (identification segment)” for displaying identification information (identifier) capable of identifying whether it is the previous base value (history base value: second base value), and two front half areas The 7-segment displays 99c and 99d are made to function as a "base display unit (ratio segment)" for displaying base values (numerical values). When displaying 'real-time base value' on the base display unit, for example, 'bL.' Is displayed on the identification display unit, and 'history base value' is displayed on the base display unit, the identification display unit For example, "b6." Is displayed (identifier display). Therefore, for example, when the real time base value is 31, the display of the performance display 99 (7 segment display 99a to 99d) is displayed as "bL. 31", and when the history base value is 29, "b 6. 29 Is displayed. Also, the base value is displayed on the numeric display after rounding off the first decimal place, but if the value after rounding is 3 digits or more, "99." indicating overflow is displayed on the base display. It has become.

  In the present embodiment, switching of display of a plurality of types of base values (here, a real-time base value, a history base value) is performed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) as an example of a display form of the performance indicator 99. However, the performance display 99 may be operated only for a predetermined period (door opening period), for example, when the door (front frame 2) is opened. Further, the real-time base value and the history base value may be switched and displayed based on a predetermined button operation or switch operation.

  The history base value is not limited to the previous base value, but may be configured to be able to display a specific number of base values such as the last time before or the previous time (three times before), and the base value up to many times before It can be decided suitably about whether it displays. The performance indicator 99 may be configured to be able to display at least a real-time base value and a previous history base value. Also, for switching between the real-time base value and the base value, it is possible to appropriately determine whether to use the automatic switching display mode (periodic switching display mode) or the artificial switching display mode based on the operation means. it can.

(2-2. Effect control unit 24)
The effect control unit 24 has a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 241 (effect control CPU), a ROM 242 (effect control ROM) storing effect data required for effect control processing, and a RAM 243 (functioning as a work area or buffer memory It consists mainly of a microcomputer equipped with a rendering control RAM), and in addition, a sound control unit (sound source LSI), an RTC function unit (Real Time Clock), a counter circuit for random numbers, an interrupt controller circuit, a reset circuit, a WDT circuit Etc are provided to control the overall rendering operation. The RTC function unit is a clock IC for clocking time, and works as a clock means for providing real-time time information of the current time ("What time is what hour and how many seconds"). The RTC function unit also serves as calendar information providing means for providing calendar information on dates (month, day, day of the week). The RTC functional unit is equipped with a secondary battery, and can be permanently operated by charging the secondary battery with the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply substrate, so the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off. Even if it does, it keeps measuring the current date and time. The RTC function unit may have a time difference (about 15 seconds between months) in the time measured with the passage of time due to the frequency deviation of the internal transmitter. Therefore, accurate time information is provided by performing time adjustment of the RTC function unit based on accurate time information provided by the time adjustment means from outside the gaming machine.

  The main roles of the effect control unit 24 are reception of effect control commands from the main control unit 20, selection and determination of effects based on effect control commands, image display control of the liquid crystal display device 36 serving as effect means, and sound control of the speaker 46. , Emission control of the decoration lamp 45 and various LEDs (the button LED 13 b and other effect LED (not shown)), operation control of the movable body part (clock part 80, flower type part 90), and the like.

  The effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls display control of the liquid crystal display device 36. The display control unit is a VDP that controls overall image output processing such as image expansion processing and image drawing, an image ROM storing image data (effect image data) on which VDP performs image expansion processing, and VDP is expanded. VRAM (Video RAM) for temporarily storing the image data, a liquid crystal control CPU for outputting control data necessary for VDP to perform display control, a program describing a display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU, or the like A liquid crystal control ROM that stores various data necessary for display control and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area or a buffer memory are mainly configured.

  Further, the effect control unit 24 is a light for the light display device 45a including the decoration lamp 45 and various effect LEDs in order to make various effects (light effects, sound effects, movable object effects by movable object) appear. A display control unit, an acoustic control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generation device 46a including the speaker 46, a drive control unit (motor drive circuit) for the movable object role motor 80c for operating the movable object (not shown) Have. The effect control unit 24 can transmit a control signal related to the effect means to these control units.

  Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to the position detection sensor 82a for monitoring the movement of the movable object, and the effect control unit 24 operates the current operation of the movable object based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a. The operation mode is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the home position). Further, based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, it monitors a malfunction of the operation of the movable body, and if a malfunction occurs, this is reported as an error.

  In addition, the effect control unit 24 is connected to the effect button switch 13a for detecting the operation of the effect button 13 and a direction key switch (not shown) for detecting the operation of the direction key 75 (75a to 75d). The unit 24 can receive operation detection signals from the effect button 13 and the direction key 75.

  When the effect control unit 24 receives the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 determines by drawing or uniquely from among a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance based on the information included in the command Control various presentation means at the necessary timing to make the desired presentation appear. As a result, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, and the lighting and blinking drive of the decoration lamp 45 (peripheral LED 45) and other effect LEDs are realized. The “rendering scenario” in a broad sense is realized by developing the patterns (decorative symbol variation display operation, advance notice effect, etc.) in time series. In addition, the effect control unit 24 can identify what operation has been performed based on the operation detection signal from the effect button (frame effect button 13 and direction key 75) switch during the predetermined operation acceptance effective period. It is possible to control the effect according to the operation condition (operation mode). For example, pressing, long pressing, continuous hitting, four-direction operation of the direction key 75 and the like are identified to cause the effect means to produce a desired effect.

  In addition, the effect control command defines a function by a 1-byte long mode (MODE) and a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte long event (EVENT) as well, and in order to distinguish MODE and EVENT, Bit 7 of MODE is ON, Bit7 of EVENT is OFF. When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid, strobe signals are output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. Transmission of the strobe signal of Furthermore, event (EVENT) information is set and output after a predetermined time has elapsed since transmission of this strobe signal, and a second strobe signal is transmitted after a predetermined time has elapsed since this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be in an active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive a command.

  Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal, executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing, and obtains the effect control command in the interrupt processing. It has become. Also, unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt occurs on the basis of the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process (timer interrupt process periodically executed) based on another interrupt. Even if there is, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the processing, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if other interrupts occur simultaneously.

<3. Outline of operation>
Next, a game operation related to the gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol variation display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decoration symbol variation display game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 is based on predetermined starting conditions, specifically, the fact that the gaming ball has entered the upper starting opening 34 or the lower starting opening 35 (winning). In the case of the "big hit lottery" by random number lottery is performed. The main control unit 20 variably displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b based on the lottery result to start the special symbol variation display game, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, displays the result as a special symbol Derivative display on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the upper starting opening 34 and the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the lower starting opening 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the big hit lottery result regarding the upper starting opening 34 is derived on the side of the special symbol display device 38a, and the big hit lottery result regarding the lower starting opening 35 is derived on the side of the special symbol display device 38b. Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, on the condition that the game ball has entered the upper starting opening 34, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed to start the first special symbol variation display game, On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, on the condition that the game ball has entered the lower starting opening 35, the special symbol 2 is variably displayed to start the second special symbol variation display game. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game in the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, the predetermined "big hit" is performed if the big hit lottery result is "big hit" after the predetermined variation display time has elapsed. In the aspect, in the other case, the special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed in a predetermined "losing" manner, whereby the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived.

  In the present specification, for the convenience of description, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second on the special symbol display device 38b side The special symbol variation display game of is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 2". Also, unless particularly required, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply abbreviated as "special symbol" or "special symbol", and "special symbol variation display game 1" and "special symbol variation display game 2" May be referred to as a "special symbol variation display game".

  Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variation display game is started, along with this, the decoration symbol (proactive game symbol) is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the decoration symbol variation display game is started, And various effects are developed. When the special symbol variation display game is over, the decorative symbol variation display game is also finished, and the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating a big hit lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the big hit lottery result The decorative pattern is derived and displayed. That is, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the decorative symbol variation display game including the variation display operation of the decorative symbol.

  Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game (the result of the big hit lottery) is "big hit", in the decorative symbol variation display game, an effect reflecting the result is developed. Then, when the special symbol display device is stopped and displayed in a display mode (for example, a display state of 7 segments “7”) in which the special symbol indicates a big hit, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays “left”, “middle”, “right In each display area of "", the display pattern in which the decorative symbol reflects "big hit" (for example, in each display area of "left", "middle" and "right", three decorative symbols are "7" "7" " It is stopped and displayed in the display state of 7 ".

  In the case of this "big hit", specifically, the special symbol variation display game is ended, and accordingly the decorative symbol variation display game is ended, and as a result the symbol form of "big hit" is derived and displayed After that, the special winning opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variation winning device 52 operates (see FIG. 3) and the opening door 52b opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, whereby the special winning opening 50 is opened and closed. A special gaming state (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player occurs. In this big hit game, by the opening door 52b, until the opening time of the big winning opening is a predetermined time (maximum opening time: 29.8 seconds, for example), or the number of gaming balls won the big winning opening (big winning opening A predetermined number of winning balls to 50 (maximum number of winnings: the upper limit number of winning balls allowed for the opening of the winning opening opened or enlarged by one actuation of the prize, for example, nine) "Round game" where the winning area is opened or enlarged and the special winning opening is closed when any of these conditions is satisfied, until a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (for example, a maximum of 16 Round) repeated. The condition for closing the special winning opening 50 is not limited to this, and may be based only on the opening time of the special winning opening, or based on only the number of gaming balls that have won the special winning opening and Also good.

  When the big hit game starts, the opening effect is performed using the big hit start interval time, and after the opening effect is finished, the round game is performed a plurality of times with the predetermined number of predetermined rounds as the upper limit. Then, when the defined number of rounds is ended, an ending effect is performed using the big hit end interval time. Thereby, the big hit game ends. That is, the big hit game is roughly divided into an opening effect period, a round game execution period having the maximum number of rounds as an upper limit, and an ending effect period. In addition, during round game production during the round, during the round game interval production effect between the round is revealed.

  With regard to the information necessary for the execution of the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation display game, the main control unit 20 first specifically determines that the game ball has entered the upper starting opening 34 or the lower starting opening 35 (winning). On the condition that the game ball is detected by the upper start opening sensor 34a or the lower start opening sensor 35a and the start condition (start condition for the special symbol) is satisfied, the "big hit", "small hit" or "missing" If it was a "big hit", then if it was a "big hit", then if it was a "small hit" then its small hit type, if it was a "loss" We do big hit lottery including 'symbol lottery (win type lottery)' which draws lottery type (when big hit, small hit or loss is one kind, there is no need to do type lottery, so we omit the lottery Good), that Result Based on the information, to determine the variation pattern and the special symbols, and finally a special symbol to stop displaying the (special stop symbol). Then, as a production control command for specifying the processing state, a “variation pattern designation command” including at least fluctuation pattern information of a special symbol (for example, information on fluctuation time of a big hit lottery result, special symbol, etc.) Send. Thereby, basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In the present embodiment, in order to make the variation of the effect abundant, the “decorative symbol specification command” including information on the special stop symbol (symbol lottery result information (information on hit type)) is also transmitted to the effect control unit 24 It is supposed to be.

  The variation pattern information of the special symbol can include information specifying the presence or absence of a specific advance notice effect (for example, "reach effect" or "simulated continuous effect" described later). In detail, the variation pattern of the special symbol is roughly classified into the "hit variation pattern" in the case of the hit and the "loss variation pattern" in the case of the loss according to the big hit lottery result, and these variation patterns For example, 'reach variation pattern' which specifies the occurrence of reach effect, 'normal variation pattern' which does not specify the occurrence of reach effect, 'pseudo-connected reach variation pattern' which specifies the occurrence of pseudo continuous effect and reach effect, pseudo A plurality of fluctuation patterns are included, such as 'pseudo-series presence reach non-variation fluctuation pattern', which designates the generation of the series effect and does not designate the generation of the reach effect. In addition, in order to secure the production time of reach production or pseudo-series production, basically, the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation pattern or the pseudo-connected fluctuation pattern is determined to be longer than that of the normal fluctuation pattern. In this embodiment, as the normal fluctuation pattern, a plurality of normal fluctuation patterns of normal fluctuation 2s, normal fluctuation 8s, normal fluctuation 12s, etc. (2s, 8s, 12s, etc. indicate fluctuation time (seconds)) are determined. However, these are selected only when losing.

  Based on the information included in the effect control command (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decoration symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 performs time series during the decoration symbol variation display game. Decide the contents of the presentation (the presentation scenario such as notice presentation) and the decoration pattern (decorative stop pattern) to be finally stopped and displayed, and change the decorative pattern according to the time schedule based on the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern and display the decoration Run the symbol variation display game. Further, when the player participation type effect is incorporated in the effect scenario, the effect corresponding to the operation condition is produced based on the operation detection signal from the effect button. Thereby, in time with the variation display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the decoration symbol by the liquid crystal display device 36 is variably displayed, and during the period of the special symbol variation display game and the decoration symbol variation display game The period of time is substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36 or the light display device 45a or the sound generating device 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. As a result, reproduction (image effect) of the image on the liquid crystal display device 36, reproduction (sound effect) of the sound effect, and lighting and blinking drive (light effect) of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED are realized.

  Thus, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected in the decorative symbol variation display game. The two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In the present specification, the two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as “symbol variation display games” unless otherwise required.

(3-1-2. Normal symbol variation display game)
Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the game ball passes (wins) the normal symbol starting opening 37, the main control unit 20 carries out a "support winning lottery" by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a, and the normal symbol variation display game is started, and after a predetermined time, the result is a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED Stop display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "assistance hit", the display portion of the normal symbol display device 39a is in a specific lighting state (for example, all the two LEDs 39 are in the lighting state, or "○" and " Among the LEDs representing “×”, the LED on the “o” side is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of this "assisting hit", the normal motorized service solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is activated, whereby the movable wing piece 47 opens in a reverse "C" shape and the lower starting opening 35 is opened. Alternatively, the game balls are expanded to be in a state in which the game balls are likely to flow in (starting opening open state), and an auxiliary gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "Pu power release game") occurs more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. In this common use open game, by the movable wing piece 47 of the normal fluctuation winning device 41, until the opening time of the lower starting opening 35 has passed a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), or the lower starting opening 35 has won The winning area is opened or enlarged until the number of gaming balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, four), and the lower starting opening 35 is closed when any of these conditions is satisfied (for example, for example, , Up to 2 times) to be repeated.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the special / decorative symbol variation display game, during the regular symbol variation display game, during the big hit game, or during the general power release game, etc., each start opening 34 to 35 or the normal symbol start opening 37 is won When a corresponding start condition (symbol game start condition) is satisfied when there is a detection signal from the start port sensors 34a to 35a or the normal symbol start port sensor 37a, the variable display game is started As data relating to the rights, except for those involved in the variable display, the maximum number of pending storages (for example, a maximum of four) which is a predetermined upper limit value is reserved and stored. The game ball relating to the pending data on hold or the pending data not provided for the symbol variation display operation is also referred to as "operation pending ball". A dedicated hold indicator (not shown) provided at an appropriate position of the gaming machine 1 or a hold display provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display 36 in order to clarify the number of operation hold balls to the player Lights the display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, up to four operation pending balls for the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are respectively stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203 up to four and reserved as the number of times of variation determination of the special symbol or the normal symbol. In addition, the special storage 1, the special design 2, and the maximum memory number (maximum holding memory number) of each operation pending ball number regarding the normal symbol are not particularly limited. In addition, all or a part of the maximum number of pending storages of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the game property. In the following, each of the special design 1, special design 2 and normal design operation holding balls are also referred to as special drawing 1 operation holding balls, special drawing 2 operation holding balls, and general drawing operation holding balls.

(3-2. Game state)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned big hit that is the special gaming state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to the occurrence of various gaming states will be described.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a “probability fluctuation function (probability change function)” in which the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) takes on its functional units. There are two types of this: a probability variation function (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol probability variation function") according to a special symbol and a probability variation function according to a regular symbol (hereinafter referred to as "common symbol probability variation function").

  The special symbol probability variation function is advantageous over the normal gaming state by changing the big hit lottery probability from a low probability (for example, 1/320) to a high probability (for example, 1/32) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) It is a function to generate a "high probability state (big hit high probability state)". In addition, the normal symbol probability variation function is changed from a low probability (for example, 1/200) to a high probability (for example 199/200) where the lottery probability per assistance is a predetermined probability (ordinary probability) from the normal gaming state Is also a function to generate an advantageous "auxiliary hit probability change state".

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a "variation time shortening function (time-saving function)" in which the main control unit 20 takes on its functional part. There are two types of time-saving functions relating to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol time-shorting functions") and time-shorting functions relating to normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol time-shorting functions").

  The special symbol time short function generates the "special symbol time short state" that shortens the average time required for one special symbol variation display game (the average time for the special symbol to start changing after the variation starts) Function. Under the gaming state (special symbol time short state) in which this special symbol time short function is in operation, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol in one special symbol variation display game is shortened, and per unit time than the normal gaming state. It becomes the lottery frequency improvement state where the number of times of big hit lottery improves. In addition, the normal symbol time short function reduces the average time required for one normal symbol variation display game (average time from when the normal symbol starts to change until it is stopped and displayed). Function to generate “ Under the game state (normal symbol time short state) in which the normal symbol time short function is in operation, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, reduced from 20 seconds to 1 second ), And the number of times of drawing per auxiliary time per unit time is improved more than the state of normal gaming.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with an “open extension function” in which the main control unit 20 bears the functional unit. The open extension function is a function to generate an “open extension state” in which the opening operation period (the opening time and / or the number of times of opening of the movable wing piece 47) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal fluctuation winning device 41 is extended. This open extension state is referred to as a so-called "electric chew support state". Under the playing state (opening extension state) in which the opening extension function is in operation, the opening operation period (starting opening opening state time) of the movable wing piece 47 is extended, for example, from 0.2 seconds to 1.7 seconds, The number of times of opening and closing is extended, for example, from 1 time (when the open extension function is inactive) to 2 times (when the open extension function is active), and the movable wing pieces 47 per unit time than the normal gaming state The operating rate is improved to improve the operating rate.

  By activating one or more types of each function as described above, it is possible to bring about a change in the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the special symbol time variation function, the special symbol time variation function, the normal symbol probability variation function, the normal symbol time variation function, and the game state in which the opening extension function is operated are referred to as "certain variation state", from among these functions The gaming state in which the special symbol probability changing function has been removed is referred to as "time saving state", and the gaming state in which at least the special symbol probability changing function is activated and the open extension function is not activated is referred to as "latency state". Further, the state in which all the functions are not in operation (non-operation) is referred to as "normal gaming state (normal state)". Therefore, focusing on the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, if the gaming state is "time saving state" or "normal state", the jackpot lottery probability becomes "low probability" and the gaming state is "latent state" Or, in the case of "probable state", the jackpot lottery probability becomes "high probability".

  Further, under the electric chow support state (hereinafter referred to as the “power support presence state”), the operating rate (opening time and opening number) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal fluctuation winning device 41 improves and the lower starting opening 35 is reached. Since the winning rate of the game is increased and the winning frequency per unit time is increased, the gaming state is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the electric support is not in progress (hereinafter referred to as "non-power support state"). . When paying attention to the presence or absence of the electric chow support state, if the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" or the "latency state", the "non-power support state" is set, and the gaming state is "time saving state" or "probable change state" If it is, it becomes 'power support presence state'. A game state that focuses on the operating status of each function (special symbol probability variation function, special symbol time variation function, normal symbol probability variation function, ordinary symbol time variation function, and open extension function) regarding determination of the big hit lottery probability and presence or absence of power support condition. Is also referred to as "internal gaming state".

  It is managed using an identifier "playing state number YJ" as to what playing state the current playing state is. For example, if YJ is "00H", specify "normal state", "01H" specify "time reduction state", "02H" specify "latency state", and "03H" specify "certain change state" Do. In addition, with regard to the operation status of each function that determines the gaming state, the operation (5AH) / non-operation (00H) is managed on the main control unit 20 side by the ON / OFF state of the flag corresponding to these functions It has become so.

<4. About the hit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the “hit” of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

(About 4-1 and per type and per game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the “big hit 1 to 1 belonging to the big hit type as a hit type to be drawn in the above special symbol variation display game, that is, a hit type to be a big hit lottery target. A plurality of types of hits such as 11 "and" small hit 1 "belonging to the small hit type are provided. The above-mentioned "big hit" is a hit serving as the operation trigger of the condition device, and the "small hit" is a hit belonging to the "non-big hit" type that does not become the trigger for the operation of the condition device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for operating a character continuous operating device (a device for operating a special motorized character continuously) for performing a round game, and a specific special When the combination of the symbols is displayed, or when the game ball passes through a specific area in the big winning opening (except for those winning the big winning opening while the continuous product actuating device is in operation). Therefore, in the case of the small hit, the round game itself is not executed, the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening is controlled in the operation mode identical to or very similar to the round game by the big hit, or the operation mode completely different from the round game by the big hit. But the small hit is also a winning type that will be a trigger for transitioning to a special gaming state with an opening and closing motion of the big winning opening (a chance to trigger a hit game) as well as a big hit. A small hit is different from a mere "missing" in nature.

  Here, the notations "16R", "8R", "4R", "2R", etc. in the column of "content per hit" in the figure respectively indicate the prescribed number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) relating to the jackpot. In the same column, "Long Opening" is the word that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in one round game is likely to reach the maximum winning number (9) in the winning opening. Shows a big hit set to "open time (for example, 29.8 seconds)", and "short open" means "short open time (for example, 1.8), where the maximum open time of the big winning opening is shorter than" long open ". Indicates the jackpot set for "seconds". Therefore, with regard to the profit state during the big hit game, the larger the maximum number of rounds, the higher it becomes, and the longer opening becomes higher than the short opening. For example, if the jackpot is 1 (12R long opening probability oddity big hit), it indicates that the maximum number of rounds is 12R, and the winning opening of each round game is a jackpot operated in the long opening pattern.

  Further, FIG. 4 shows a transition destination of the gaming state after the big hit game end corresponding to the gaming state at the time of winning when each big hit is won. For example, big hit 1 (12R length open probability big hit) is transferred to "probable change state (high probability, with power support)" regardless of the game state at the time of winning, and big hit 7 (2R short open) If the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state, it is transferred to “latency state (high probability, no power support)”, and in the case of latency, time reduction, or probability change state, Transition to a definite change state. In addition, the big hit 2, 4, 6, 9, 11 is a big hit that becomes a transition opportunity to the short time state (low probability, with power support), and the big hit 2, 4 and 9 are “short time A (short time A And the big hit 6, 11 is transferred to "time-saving B (time-shortening number of times 50)". In addition, during the big hit the big prize mouth is opened and closed hit game (big hit game) occurs, but all the functions are made inactive concerning the above-mentioned each function, basically, same game condition same as the above-mentioned normal condition Placed in The other big hit is as shown in FIG.

  The number of times of execution of the special symbol variation display game (the number of times of variation of the special symbol) is a predetermined prescribed number of times (special symbol variation display game) for the “latency condition”, “certain variation condition”, and “time saving condition” according to this embodiment. Continued until the end of 1 and 2 (total number of executions of special symbols 1 and 2)) and when the special symbol variation display game ends without winning a big hit (except for a small hit) within the specified number of times, The next game is shifted to the normal state (normal game state). In the case of the present embodiment, a predetermined defined number of times (ST specified number of times: 65,536 times in this case) is set as the latent state or the definite state (a number cut probability type (ST machine type)). In the time saving state, a predetermined number of times (time saving: 100 times for time A, 50 times for time B) is set. The above-mentioned ST specified number of times may not be determined for the latent state or the probability variation state, and a “generally probable machine type” may be used in which the high probability state is continued until the next big hit is won. In addition, the number of times can be set appropriately. In addition, with regard to the transition to the latent state or the definite change state, during the big hit game, it can be the transition condition that the game ball has entered (passed) the specific area in the big winning opening (V definite change machine type) .

  However, when the small hit is won, the internal gaming state at the time of the small hit is continued as it is, and transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small hit is not performed. Therefore, the gaming state at the time of the small hit winning and the gaming state after the small hitting game both become the same gaming state. For example, when a small hit 1 is won during the definite change state, the definite change state is continued during and after the hit game. This point differs from the above-mentioned jackpot in which transition control of the gaming state is performed. Using such a small hit property, for example, the operation mode of the large winning opening of the winning game by the small hit 1 and the specific big hit (here, the big hit 7 (2R short opening latent probability big hit)) Is substantially the same, and the effects in the hit are also substantially the same, and further, if the game is shifted to the same effect mode (CZ effect mode described later) after the game, the hit type concealed this time is concealed be able to.

  In this embodiment, in the normal state, the same CZ mode (CZ effect) is performed for a predetermined period (for example, until the number of times of variation of the special symbol is completed) when “small hit 1” and “big hit 7” are won. Mode). As a result, it is concealed whether the jackpot won this time is the jackpot 7 or the small hit 1. That is, the jackpot lottery probability state is concealed, and the expectation of the high probability state can be enhanced during the CZ effect mode. It should be noted that the substance of the CZ effect mode to be transferred triggered by the win of small hit 1 is "CZ (CZ (normal))" of the "normal state" in the internal gaming state, it is transferred triggered by the jackpot of 7 wins The substance of the CZ effect mode is "CZ (CZ (latency))" whose internal gaming state is "latency state".

  In addition, although illustration is not carried out, a plurality of types of loses (for example, loses A, B, C) different in symbol lottery (win type lottery) probability respectively are provided as "losing" types which are not big hit and small hit. There is. Moreover, although the small hit is provided with one type of small hit 1 on the special figure 1 side, the present invention is not limited thereto, and one or more types of small hits may be provided on the special figure 1 side and / or the special figure 2 side. It may be provided in Further, the types of the big hit and the small hit can be appropriately determined according to the game characteristics. Further, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, a “normal big hit” may be provided to shift to the normal state.

<5. About the production>
(5-1. Effect mode)
Next, the effect mode (state of effect) will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of effect modes that produce effects related to the game state, and is configured to be able to control transition between the effect modes in response to the transition of the game state. ing. In the production mode, “normal production mode” for “normal state”, “CZ production mode” for “CZ”, “latency production mode” for “latency state”, “certain change state” In the case of "probable variation effect mode", in the case of "time-saving state", there are provided a plurality of effect modes according to each gaming state such as "time-saving effect mode". In the time-saving effect mode, a time-saving effect mode common to time-shortening A and time-shortening B may be provided, or different effect modes may be used.

  The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a functional unit (effect state transition control means) that performs transition control between a plurality of effect modes. The effect control unit 24 designates a specific effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifically, designates the current gaming state or designates that the gaming state is to be shifted. Based on the effect control command, transition control between a plurality of types of effect modes is possible in a manner that maintains consistency with the gaming state on the main control unit 20 side. Such a specific effect control command, a variation pattern specification command, a game state specification command, a customer waiting command, a predetermined command to be transmitted during a hit (a big hit start command specifying a big hit start, a big hit end is specified There is such a big hit end command). Further, the effect control unit 24 has a functional unit (effect state management means) that manages an effect mode related to the game state, and manages the current effect mode.

(5-2. Effects under each effect mode)
In each effect mode, the background display as the background is different in each of the effect modes so that the player can be grasped under the effect mode corresponding to what gaming state. A rendition is coming out. In addition, it is not limited to what changes the above-mentioned "background effect" and suggests a game state, but uses the decoration pattern of a different pattern corresponding to each effect mode, and suggests a game state by sound effect or light effect etc. You can also. Further, each effect mode is not limited to one type, and a plurality of types can be provided.

(5-3. Notice production)
Next, advance notice effects will be described. The effect control unit 24 is variously associated with the current effect mode and the big hit lottery result based on the content of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, at least the change pattern information included in the change pattern designation command. It is configured to be able to control the appearance of the "notice effect". Such an advance presentation effect (predictive) indicates the expected expectation of winning whether or not the player has won the hit category, and works as a “scramble effect” for giving a sense of the expectation of winning the hit category of the player. The representative ones as the notice effects are "reach effect (effect mode according to reach fluctuation pattern)", "pseudo-series effect", "player participation type effect", "previous notice effect", etc. The contents of the game are enhanced by the advance notice. The effect control unit 24 includes an advance effect control means capable of executing (presenting) and controlling the advance effect.

  The "reach effect" refers to an effect mode with a reach state, and specifically refers to an effect mode capable of deriving and displaying a game result via the reach state. The reach effect includes a plurality of types of reach effects associated with the winning expectation. For example, there is a case in which the expectation of winning is relatively higher than when normal reach (N reach) appears. Such reach production is called 'super reach (SP reach)'. Most of the "SP reach" has a rendering time (variation time) relatively longer than that of the N reach, in order to give the player a sense of winning expectations. N reach of this embodiment includes multiple types of N reach such as "N reach 1 to 2", and SP reach includes multiple types of SP reach such as "weak SP reach, medium SP reach, strong SP reach" Is included. In addition, about the relationship of the expectation of winning among the same kind of reach, the relationship of "N reach 1 <N reach 2", "weak SP reach <medium SP reach <strong SP reach" is held. In addition, actual big hit winning expectation changes according to whether or not other notice effects are accompanied. Therefore, for example, even when a weak SP reach appears, a winning expectation equivalent to or higher than the medium SP reach can be obtained if a notice effect with a high expectation of a big hit is taken.

  The "simulated sequence effect" refers to an effect mode involving a pseudo-continuous variation display state (pseudo-variation) of a decorative symbol. In this "simulated change", a part or all of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol change display game (it may be in the reach state or in the non-reach state during the temporary stop state). A variation display mode in which the display operation of executing the re-variation display operation of the decorative symbol from the temporary stop state is repeated one or more times. This point is different from the "prediction notice effect" described later that can be developed across a plurality of symbol variation display games. The occurrence rate of such “pseudo-series” is basically determined so that the probability of winning is higher as the number of times of pseudo variation increases, and, for example, as the number of times of pseudo variation is relatively larger, the winning is won Expected occurrence of highly anticipated advance notices (SP reach etc.) is increasing.

  The “player participation type effect” is an effect mode belonging to a so-called “button advance effect”, and the player performs a predetermined operation (eg, pressing, long press, continuous hitting, etc.) on the effect button 13 (operation means). It is a notice effect mode in which the contents of the effect can be changed based on the operation). In the player participation type effect, an operation instruction effect for instructing a predetermined operation to the effect button 13 appears in the predetermined button effective period, and the effect button 13 is operated during the button effective period. On the basis of this, the effect mode currently appearing is changed to another effect mode (effect at the time of operation) (for example, character display changes, special sound effects or light effects occur, etc.), effect modes before and after operation (effect In accordance with the content), it announces the winning expectation degree.

  The "pre-read advance notice effect" refers mainly to the hold display mode and the tip for the operation hold ball (undigested operation hold ball) which has not yet been provided for execution of the symbol change display game (special symbol change display operation). It is an effect mode that can notify in advance the degree of expectation for winning about the operation holding ball by using the background effect or the like of the symbol variation display game executed on the.

  The screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for describing screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 according to the present embodiment.

  A part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (below the display area of the decorative symbol in the figure), a reserve display area 76 for displaying the number of special handle 1 operation reserve balls, and the number of special view 2 operation reserve balls With respect to the presence or absence of the operation holding ball, a lighted state (with operation holding ball: “○ (white circle mark) shown) or light off state (without operation held ball) is provided. Information on the current number of operation pending balls is notified by a broken line circle shown).

  The display regarding the presence or absence of the operation holding ball (hereinafter referred to as "hold display") is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (in order of winning), and the leftmost operation holding ball in the respective holding display areas 76 and 77 It is displayed as the earliest (i.e., the oldest) activated holding ball on the time axis among all the activated holding balls in the holding indication. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the hold display portions a1 to d1 each consisting of a hold icon (icon image) provided by the same number (four) as the maximum hold storage number in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 It corresponds to the special design symbol 1 side), a2-d2 (corresponding to the special design symbol 2 side) is provided. Further, on the left side of the reserve display areas 76 and 77, a variation display area 78 for indicating the operation reserve ball currently provided for the special symbol variation display game is provided. In the case of this embodiment, the in-movement display area 78 is configured such that an image in which the icon of the pending game K currently being played for the game is placed appears on the icon of the reception J. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the icon (icon image) of the oldest hold a1 or a2 displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is the hold K during the game execution. As an icon, it moves on the icon of the seat J in the display area 78 during variation, and the state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

  When the operation holding ball is generated, the prefetch control information related to the big hit lottery result and the operation holding ball number at the time of the reading judgment (the number of existing operation holding balls including the operation holding ball generated this time) as production control command A specifiable "pending addition command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (see step S323 in FIG. 21 described later).

  Specifically, the above-mentioned pre-read determination information is a big hit lottery result (big hit lottery result at the start of variation) executed when the operation holding ball is provided to the symbol variation display game in the main control unit 20, Refers to game information on the prefetch fluctuation pattern obtained when the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is read ahead and determined. Therefore, this pre-reading determination information includes at least pre-reading determination result (pre-reading success result) information of a winning lottery result at the start of fluctuation, and others, pre-reading determination result (pre-reading symbol result) information of symbol lottery result, and fluctuation start Pre-reading determination result (pre-reading fluctuation pattern) information regarding the fluctuation pattern at the time can be included. About what kind of information the hold addition command including information is sent to the effect control unit 24, it can be appropriately determined depending on what notice content to be notified. Note that the "pre-reading fluctuation pattern" obtained by the pre-reading determination when the operation holding ball occurs need not necessarily be the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" itself obtained when the operation holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation . For example, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which “N reach 1” is designated at the start of fluctuation, the content designated by the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is not the type of reach itself “N reach 1” but “N reach It may be designated that it is a species (N reach 1 or N reach 2).

  When the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command, based on the pre-reading determination information included in the hold control command, the effect control process regarding “pre-reading advance notice effect” is performed as part of the display control process related to the hold display. Specifically, based on the information included in the hold addition command, a pre-reading notice lottery for drawing whether or not to execute pre-reading notice effects is performed, and if it is won, a pre-reading notice effect scenario is determined, and according to the scenario Make the advance notice effect according to the expectation of winning. The probability of winning the above-described preliminary preview lottery is higher in the "big hit" direction than in the case of the "loss", and in the case of a reach type having a relatively high expectation of winning. Therefore, the degree of winning expectation to the hit type is indicated depending on whether or not the advance notice effect is generated.

  In this embodiment, when the pre-reading notice lottery is won, among the holding icons of the holding display parts a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the pre-reading notice target holding icon is, for example, a normal holding display (normal "Holding display change type" previewing effect of "Holding display change system" such as changing from white of holding display mode) to special hold color or special color holding display such as blue, green, red, rainbow colors of notice display (special hold display mode) (Pending change notice) will be made. FIG. 5 shows an example in which the operation suspension ball of the hatched suspension display section b1 is changed to the special suspension display. Here, the blue, green, red, and rainbow display of the hold icon means that the expectation for winning is high in the order of this color, and the display of the rainbow hold icon in particular is determined to be a big hit Therefore, the reserve display unit serves as a reserve display means for displaying the number of operation pendings. However, in the case of executing pre-reading preview effects, the hold display mode of the corresponding hold display portion among the hold display portions a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined pre-reading notice display mode (special hold display mode). This acts as a means to bring about pre-read preview effects.

  The existing operation pending balls are sequentially digested triggered by the execution of the symbol variation display game. At this time, the display position of the holding display unit corresponding to the existing operation holding ball is moved forward (shift to the left sequentially) to indicate that one operation holding ball has been digested, and the display number is reduced. Although control (shift display) is performed, the special hold display described above continues to be displayed continuously while changing the display position of the hold display during this period. Further, when the suspension K during game execution is placed on the reception area J, basically the same display mode as the suspension display mode in the suspension display areas 76 and 77 is maintained, and the operation according to the symbol variation display game of this time The player is notified of the advance notice display mode for the holding ball even during the game.

  In the lower right corner of the liquid crystal screen shown in FIG. 5, the display area of a sub-effect (sub-effect) other than the main effect such as the decorative symbol or the notice effect relates to the variable display operation of the special symbol or the normal symbol. A sub display area 75 is provided and is indicated by small six squares. In the drawing, the sub display area 75 is exaggerated for the convenience of description.

  Among the six squares relating to the sub display area 75, the upper stage and the middle stage are the display areas pertaining to the special symbol, and the lower stage is the display area relating to the ordinary symbol. Specifically, the left side of the upper row is a first reserved number display area for displaying the special figure 1 operation reserved ball number, and the right side of the upper row is for displaying whether or not the special figure 1 is being displayed in a variable manner. (1) The left / right cell in the middle is the second reserved number display area that displays the number of operation pending balls in the middle, and the right / left eye in the middle is the variable / non-display in the special figure 2 Is a second variation presence / absence display area for displaying In this embodiment, the number of pending items is indicated by Arabic numerals in the first pending number display area and the second pending number display area, and is not shown in the first variation presence display area and the second variation presence display area, but the symbol When the symbol is changing, “⇔” is displayed in a blinking manner, and when the symbol is stopped, any one of “x”, “Δ”, and “o” is displayed. In this display of "x", "?" And "?", "X" indicates a lost symbol, "△" indicates a small hit symbol, and "o" indicates a stopped state at the large hit symbol. Therefore, when any one of these "x", "[Delta]" and "o" is displayed, the special symbol is in the non-variation state (stop display state). Further, the lower left column is the third reserved number display area for displaying the common drawing operation reserved ball number, and the lower right cell is the third variation display for displaying whether or not the common drawing is being displayed in a variable manner. It is an area. In the third reserve number display area, the common figure operation reserve ball number is indicated by Arabic numerals, and in the third change presence / absence display area, although not shown, "red circle" and "blue circle" when the symbol is changing. Are alternately displayed, and when the symbol is stopped, one of "((white circle)" and "● (black circle)" is displayed. "○" indicates a lost design, and "●" indicates a stop at a symbol per common picture. In the illustration, the special figure 1 operation reserve ball number "3", the special figure 1 is non-variation state (stop with a lost symbol), the special figure 2 operation reserve sphere number "0", the special figure 2 is non-variation state (loss) Stop with the symbol), the common drawing operation suspension ball number “1”, the common drawing shows an example of non-fluctuation state (stop with the hit symbol).

  The images displayed in the first fluctuation presence / absence display area and the second fluctuation presence / absence display area indicate whether or not the special display 1 and the special drawing 2 are being displayed in a variable manner. As the second symbol, it is referred to as "the fourth symbol" of the special view 1 or the special view 2. In addition, the effect image displayed in the third variation presence / absence display area is for fluctuating display of the ordinary decorative symbol by the image in time with the variation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 39a, and the third variation presence / absence The display area is a display area of the ordinary decorative symbol variation display game.

(5-4. Production means)
Various effects in the gaming machine 1 are produced by the effect means provided in the gaming machine. Such an effect means may be a stimulus transfer means capable of exerting an effect by appealing to human perception, such as sight, hearing, touch, etc., and light generating means (light effect means such as decoration lamp 45 or LED device Sound generator (sound effect means) such as the speaker 46, effect display device (display means) such as the liquid crystal display device 36, a pressure device for transmitting contact pressure to the body of the operator, wind pressure to the body of the player A wind pressure device or a movable body part that exhibits a visual effect by its operation is a representative example. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the same vision as the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it also includes an image-independent device (for example, a 7-segment display). When referred to as an image display device, it refers to a type that produces effects by image display, and devices that produce effects by other than images, such as a seven-segment display, are included in the concept of the effect display device.

<Process on Main Control Unit Side: FIGS. 6A to 36>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6A-FIG. 36, the game operation processing in the main control part 20 side of this embodiment is demonstrated. The process on the main control unit 20 side is an infinite loop main process (main control side main process: FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B) and a timer interrupt process (main control side timer interrupt activated by a scheduled interrupt from CTC) Process: FIG. 17) is included.

<6. Main control side main processing: FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B>
The main process (main control side main process) on the main control unit 20 side will be described with reference to FIGS. 6A and 6B.

  6A and 6B are flowcharts showing details of the main control side main processing. In the following, in the description of the main control side main processing, processing that is closely related to the present invention will be described with reference to source code (sometimes also referred to as “program”) shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B. However, FIG. 31A and FIG. 31B illustrate what described a part of the source code of the main control side main process according to the storage order on memory, and the arrow on the right side of the description column of the source code Are various operations performed according to the combination of the input state (ON / OFF state) of the setting key switch 94, the door open sensor 61, and the RAM clear switch 98 (setting key switch signal, door open signal, RAM clear switch signal). The processing route (“setting change processing route”, “RAM clear processing route”, “setting confirmation processing route”, “backup recovery processing route”, “repower on wait processing (RAM error processing) route”) described later The contents of processing executed in the processing route and the execution order of the processing are shown in correspondence with the source code. In any processing route, the processing of step S011 to step S014 described later is executed in common, and thereafter, according to the combination of the ON / OFF state of the setting key switch 94, the door open sensor 61, and the RAM clear switch 98. , And processing is branched (conditional branching).

  At the start of the main control side main process, when a system reset occurs at the time of recovery from a power failure or a power failure, or when the control program runs out, the watchdog timer (WDT) function is exhibited and the CPU May be forcibly reset (WDT reset). In any case, when the main control side main process is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) first executes the initialization process necessary for starting the game operation as part of the power-on process (step S011). ).

(7. Initial setting process: Fig. 7)
First, the initial setting process of step S011 will be described with reference to the columns (SPa1 to SPa26) of the initial setting process of FIGS. 7 and 31A. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing details of the initial setting process.

  In FIG. 7, when a system reset or a WDT reset occurs, the CPU 201 first sets itself as an interrupt disabled state as an initial setting at the time of activation (step S051, SPa1).

  Next, the stack pointer SP is set (step S052). Here, 00FFH is set (set) in the stack pointer SP (SPa2). As a result, the address 00FEH or less in the RAM 203 is set as a stack area for the in-area program, and the address 01FEH or less is set as a stack area for the out-of-area program (see FIG. 29).

  Next, in preparation for use of the stack in the first power supply abnormality check process (_VDDCHK) described later, the protected and prohibited areas of the RAM are invalidated (step S053 and SPa3). The RAM protect is a function to prevent rewriting of the RAM due to a malfunction or an erroneous operation. The operation of the RAM protect is as follows. After system reset at the time of power restoration etc. and WDT reset, protection of RAM is effective (RAM protection state). When the protection of the RAM is set to be effective, data can be read from the RAM, but data can not be written to the RAM. Therefore, when writing data to the RAM, it is necessary to set the protection of the RAM to be invalid. In the present embodiment, depending on the value of the RAM protect register (RAMPT), the RAM protect and the validity / invalidity of the RAM access prohibited area are controlled. Specifically, when RAMPT is 00H, it is controlled to "RAM access prohibited area invalid, RAM protect invalid", and when RAMPT is 01H, it is controlled to "RAM access prohibited area invalid, RAM protect valid", and RAMPT Is 80H, it is controlled to "RAM access prohibited area valid, RAM protect invalid". Also, when the RAMPT is 81H, it is set to "RAM access prohibited area valid, RAM protect valid". Therefore, here, 00H is set in the RAMPT (SPa3). When system reset or WDT reset occurs, the RAM protect state is set (RAMPT = 81H), and CTC and WDT are initialized. However, even if a system reset or WDT reset is performed, the stored contents of the RAM do not change.

  Next, various setting processing at power-on is executed (step S054). Here, in consideration of the possibility that the power is turned off / on during setting change (for example, during setting change management processing in step S023 described later), first, an exclusive OR (XOR between WA register pairs) ) (WA = 0000H) (SPa4), using the fact that the value of the WA register pair is zero, information for outputting the security signal (corruption detection signal for external output) of the frame external terminal board 21 Clears the external terminal port 2 (P_GAIBU2) corresponding to the terminal to zero, and is also used to set dynamic lighting data for the setting indicator 97 and ON / OFF setting of the firing control signal (launch permission signal ES by the payout control board 28) Clear both the LED common port (P_LEDCMN) and the LED common buffer (W_LEDCMN) to zero (SPa ~SPa7). As a result, the security signal output port is once cleared, and the setting display 97 is set to the off state. In addition, the emission control signal is set to the OFF state, and it is prevented that the emission control signal is inadvertently output.

  Next, the first power supply abnormality check process (_VDDCHK) is executed (step S055). Here, the first power supply abnormality check process (_VDDCHK) of the subroutine is called and executed by the CALLV instruction (SPa8). This 'CALLV' instruction is a kind of CALL instruction, but unlike an ordinary CALL instruction, an instruction for executing a subroutine defined in advance in a vector table (CALLV instruction vector table) of a CALL instruction vector area of the ROM 202 It has become. More specifically, in a normal CALL instruction (CALL mn), an instruction to execute a subroutine starting from an address (address mn) specified by an upper address and a lower address is performed. Since the upper address constituting the unit is defined in the vector table as a specific value, the subroutine address can be specified by specifying only the lower address, and the subroutine is called with a smaller amount of data than the CALL instruction. It is a special CALL instruction that can be executed (1 byte for CALLV instruction, 3 bytes for normal CALL instruction). Therefore, the CALLV instruction is suitable for executing a frequently used subroutine.

(8. First power supply abnormality check process: Fig. 8)
The first power supply abnormality check process (_VDDCHK) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing details of the first power supply abnormality check process.

  In the first power supply abnormality check process, the CPU 201 first clears the WDT (step S701), and then acquires input information of a power supply abnormality signal indicating power interruption from the external signal input register (PINSTS) (step S702). . The 0th bit to the 7th bit (b0 to b7) of this external signal input register (PINSTS) are, as shown in the figure, the 0th bit (b0) is ON of the upper starting opening sensor signal (upper starting opening sensor 34a) In the OFF state, the first bit (b1) turns ON / OFF the lower start opening sensor signal (lower start opening sensor 35a), and the second bit (b2) turns ON / OFF the power supply abnormality signal (voltage drop signal) The third bit (b3) to the seventh bit (b7) are respectively unused.

  When the power supply abnormality signal acquired in step S702 is in the ON state (b2 = 1) (step S703: YES), the process proceeds to the first processing (step S011) of the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. As in the case of etc., the processing from step S011 is sequentially executed. However, if the acquired power supply abnormality signal is not in the ON state (step S703: NO), it is determined that the operation is normal, the first power supply abnormality check processing is exited, and the internal function register initialization processing of FIG. Transition.

  Returning to FIG. 7 again, when the power supply abnormality signal is not in the ON state, the internal function register initialization process is executed (steps S056, SPa9 to SPa13). Here, the internal function register values of the CPU including the microcomputer Perform initial setting process for. Initial values regarding various internal function register values in the CPU are defined in D_REGINI1 shown in FIG. 31A, and, for example, in addition to the RAM protect register, CTC, WDT, serial port for transmission / reception, interrupt mode The internal function registers relating to interrupt mode 2), interrupt priority, internal hard random numbers, internal soft random numbers, etc. are set to initial values.

  Next, the processing of steps S057 to S062 is executed as processing for managing the activation waiting time of the sub control board (effect control unit 24). Specifically, first, the number of loops (for example, 240) is set in the B register (step S057, SPa14) as the setting process of the start waiting time described above (step S057, SPa14), and the count value for waiting for activation (for example, 13880) Are set (step S058, SPa15). Then, the value of the WA register pair is decremented (step S059, SPa16) as subtraction processing of the start wait time, and wait until the value of the WA register pair becomes zero (step S060: NO, SPa17), the value of the WA register pair Becomes zero (step S060: YES, SPa17), the first power supply abnormality check process of FIG. 8 is executed (step S061, SPa18), and the loop count (the value of B register) becomes zero (step S063: NO, SPa19), repeat the processing of steps S059 to S062. As a result, the CPU 201 waits for the execution of the subsequent processing until the sub control board starts up normally. The start wait time secured by the series of steps S059 to S063 is set to about 2000 ms in consideration of the number of instruction cycles for SPa10 to SPa15, the count value for wait for start, the number of loops, and the CPU operating frequency. Be done. The reason for counting the start waiting time in this way is that it is preferable not to execute the careless timer interrupt processing (FIG. 17) until the game start enable condition is established in order to avoid control burden at the time of power supply return etc. It is from. Details will be described later, but in this timer interrupt processing, input management processing for monitoring the switch ON / OFF state, LED management processing for controlling LED display, control processing for symbol variation display game, control processing for winning game, etc. , Various processing related to normal game progress is to be executed.

  Therefore, in the case of the present embodiment, at this stage, the main control timer interrupt process is not activated (the timer interrupt process is activated in step S036 described later). Therefore, since the timer value can not be counted by the timer interrupt process, it is devised to set the start waiting time using the number of instruction cycles, the count value for start waiting, the number of loops, the CPU operating frequency and the like.

  If the activation waiting time has elapsed (step S063: YES (B = 0)), the standby screen display command data (BA01H) is acquired (step S064, SPa20), and the acquired command data is shown in FIG. The command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S065, SPa21) by the command transmission process (step S070). The command transmission process of step S065 is a subroutine (_CMDOUT) which is called and executed by the CALLV instruction as shown in FIG. 9 as SPa 21 in FIG. 31A, for example, a predetermined register pair (for example, It is processing to transmit the effect control command data of 2 byte length set in the DE register) to the effect control unit 24 side (SPa20 to SPa21, step S070). The command transmission process (_CMDOUT) is a subroutine commonly used in various processes that require transmission of command data. In the present embodiment, when transmission of a rendering command is necessary, after the command data is acquired, the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) of FIG. 9 is called and executed by the CALLV instruction. As a result, command transmission control processing at the time of transmitting the effect control command at various timings can be simplified, and thereby the control load can be reduced.

  When the effect control unit 24 receives the standby screen display command, it causes the standby effect at power-on to appear using the effect means. For example, the effect image such as "Please Wait" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

  Next, while executing the first power supply abnormality check process of FIG. 8 (step S066, SPa22), “power-on signal and payout communication confirmation signal (hereinafter“ power-on signal ”abbreviated)” from the payout control board 29 It waits for being sent (steps S067 to S069, SPa23 to SPa26). The power-on signal is a signal that is output when the dispensing control board 29 normally rises, and the power-on signal ON / OFF information is acquired from an input port 1 (P_INPT1) described later. The CPU 201 stands by without ending the initial setting process until the payout control board 29 starts up normally, whereby if the payout control board 29 is not functioning normally due to some trouble, the process of steps S066 to S069 is performed. The game operation is not started only by repeating the process. When the power-on signal is turned on (step S069: ON), the initial setting process is exited, and the process returns to the main control side main process of FIG. 6A to execute the information processing process for branch determination in step S013. Do.

  If the flow of the process of the above-described steps S066 to S069 is described in detail according to the source code (SYSTEM_50 shown in the figure) shown in FIG. 31A, the following process contents will be obtained.

  In SYSTEM_50 of FIG. 31A, CPU 201 first calls and executes the first power supply abnormality check process (_VDDCHK: FIG. 8) of the subroutine by the CALLV instruction, and checks whether the power supply abnormality signal is ON (SPa22) .

  Next, 8-bit data (input information) of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) is read into the A register (SPa23), and the read data is transferred (COPY) to the W register (SPa24). The SPa23 to SPa24 correspond to the “input port 1 data acquisition process” of the process of step S067, and the information on the input port 1 acquired in this process (the input port 1 (P_INPT1) set in the W register) The input information) is also used in “branch determination information acquisition process (step S013)” shown in FIG. 6A described later.

  The 0th bit to the 7th bit (b0 to b7) of this input port 1 (P_INPT1), as shown in the figure, the 0th bit (b0) is ON / OFF state of the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94) The first bit (b1) is the ON / OFF state of the supply out signal, the second bit (b2) is the ON / OFF state of the ball number error signal, the third bit (b3) is the disconnection detection signal 1, The 4 bit (b4) is the ON / OFF signal of the disconnection detection signal 2 and the 5th bit (b5) is the ON / OFF state of the door open signal (door open sensor 61) (door open (front frame 2 for example) open / In the closed state, the sixth bit (b6) indicates the ON / OFF state of the RAM clear signal (RAM clear switch 98), and the seventh bit (b7) indicates the ON / OFF state of the power on signal.

  The "RAM clear signal" is a signal for determining whether or not to initialize the predetermined area of the RAM, and normally, the ON / OFF state of the RAM clear switch 98 operated by the hall clerk (ON operation / OFF operation) Has a value corresponding to The "setting key switch signal" is one of the signals for determining whether to shift to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, and normally, the ON / OFF of the setting key switch 94 operated by the hall clerk It has a value corresponding to the OFF state (ON operation / OFF operation). For this reason, when the acquisition timing of the RAM clear signal and the setting key switch signal is delayed, the hall clerk misses the ON operation by releasing the hand from the switch, but in the present embodiment, such a situation is avoided. Therefore, these signals are to be acquired promptly when the power is restored. Further, the “break detection signal” is an error signal that occurs when it is detected when a wire (harness) connecting the substrates or between the substrate and the various sensors is broken or shorted. For example, if the wiring between the main control unit 20 (main substrate) and the payout control substrate 29 is broken, or if the wiring between the main control unit 20 and the upper start opening sensor 34a is broken, signal transmission and reception can not be performed. Therefore, the disconnection detection signal is also acquired promptly. Each bit value is “1” to indicate the ON state, and “0” to indicate the OFF state.

  When SPa23 to SPa24 are finished, next, the value of the seventh bit (b7) of the A register, that is, the ON / OFF data of the power-on signal of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) is set to the carry flag CF (SPa25), If carry flag CF is not 1 (CF ≠ 1), that is, if the power on signal is not ON (b7 ≠ 1), jump to the start address of SYSTEM_50, that is, the processing state is the first power source abnormality check process of step S066. Returning to (_VDDCHK), the processing of steps S066 to S069 is repeatedly executed (SPa26) until the carry flag CF is 1 (CF = 1), that is, the power-on signal is ON (b7 = 1). When the power-on signal is turned on, the initial setting process is exited, the process returns to the main control side main process of FIG. 6A, and then the branch determination information acquisition process of step S013 is executed.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B, when the above-mentioned initial setting process (step S011) is completed, the information for branch determination information acquisition process of FIG. 6A is executed (step S013). In this branch determination information acquisition process, the value of W register, that is, 8 bits of input port 1 (P_INPT1) transferred to W register in input port 1 data acquisition process (step S067) in the initial setting process of FIG. Take the logical product (AND) of data and mask data "01100001B", and the 0th bit corresponding to the setting key switch signal, the 5th bit corresponding to the door open signal, and the 6th bit corresponding to the RAM clear signal Mask the bit (SPb1). As a result, the ON / OFF state (the state of the signal (input state)) of the current setting key switch signal, the door open signal, and the RAM clear signal is acquired in the W register. For example, if the bit pattern of the W register after masking is "01100001B (0th bit, 5th bit, 6th bit is ON)", the setting key switch signal, the door open signal and the RAM clear signal are each ON state If "00000001B (0th bit is ON)", it indicates that the door open signal and the RAM clear signal are in the OFF state, and only the setting key switch signal is in the ON state.

  In this embodiment, a combination of ON / OFF states of three signals of a setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94), a door opening signal (door opening sensor 61), and a RAM clear signal (RAM clear switch 98), that is, The processing content (processing route) to be executed is different according to the value (combination of the 0th, 5th, and 6th bit values) of the W register obtained by the mask processing in step S013 (SPb1). It has become.

(About the processing contents of the transition destination by conditional branching: FIG. 30)
In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, the process is executed according to the value of W register (combination of the 0th, 5th and 6th bit values) described above with reference to FIG. 30 first. The outline of the processing route is explained. FIG. 30 is executed according to the combination of the setting key switch signal, the door open signal, and the ON / OFF state of the RAM clear signal (combination of the values of the 0th bit, the 5th bit, and the 6th bit of W register). Indicates the processing route (migration destination processing route).

  As shown in FIG. 30, there are a total of eight combinations of ON / OFF states indicating the input states of three signals of the setting key switch signal, the door open signal and the RAM clear signal, and the combination of the ON / OFF states of these signals That is, according to the value of the W register obtained in the branch determination information acquisition process (step S013), the process is branched (migrated) to one of the processing routes (i) to (iv) below. ing. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the combination of (the 0th bit, the 5th bit, the 6th bit) of the W register is 'W (x, y, z)' (however, “x, y, z” Each value of “0” is described as 0 or 1).

<(A) Setting change processing route (setting change mode)>
When the input states of the three signals of the setting key switch signal, the door open signal and the RAM clear signal are all in the ON state (in the case of W (x, y, z) = W (1, 1, 1)), the CPU 201 The processing state is shifted to “setting change processing route (steps S021 to S024, S030 to S032)” on the assumption that the setting change mode shift condition is satisfied. This setting change processing route is a processing route in which “setting change management processing (step S 023)” for controlling the setting changeable state and “in-area RAM clearing processing (step S 031)” for clearing a predetermined area of RAM are performed. For example, when a person in charge of a hall or the like performs a "setting change operation", the process proceeds. Although the details will be described later, when moved to the setting change processing route, an area (area excluding the storage area (measurement information storage area) related to display control of at least the performance indicator 99 in the work area (storage area) of the RAM 203 The entire area of the in-area RAM except for the external RAM is cleared (reset).

  In the present embodiment, when not transitioning to the setting change processing route, processing according to the value of the W register is processing of any of “RAM clear processing route”, “setting confirmation processing route”, and “backup recovery processing route” described below. Migrated to the root.

<(B) RAM clear processing route (RAM clear mode)>
When at least one of the setting key switch signal and the door open signal is in the OFF state and the RAM clear signal is in the ON state (W (x, y, z) = W (1, 0, 1), W ( In the case of any of 0, 1, 1), W (0, 0, 1)), the CPU 201 determines that the RAM clear mode shift condition is satisfied, and the processing state is “RAM clear processing route (steps S029 to S032)”. Migrate to The RAM clear process route is a process route in which the in-area RAM clear process (step S031) is executed without executing the setting change management process (step S023) described later. In the case where the specific area of the RAM is cleared by the “RAM clear operation” without performing the “setting change operation”, the process proceeds. Although the details will be described later, the "specific area" is a storage area excluding at least the setting value storage area and the extra-area RAM area in the storage area of the RAM 203. Therefore, when the RAM clear processing route is executed, the range of the RAM clear is more limited than when the setting change processing route is executed.

<(Iii) Setting confirmation processing route (setting confirmation mode)>
When the setting key switch signal and the door open signal are in the ON state and the RAM clear signal is in the OFF state (when W (x, y, z) = W (1, 1, 0)), the CPU 201 confirms the setting. Assuming that the mode shift condition is satisfied, the processing state is shifted to “setting confirmation processing route (steps S027 to S028)”. This setting confirmation processing route is controlled to a setting confirmation state in which the current setting value can be confirmed without executing setting change management processing (step S 023) and intra-area RAM clearing processing (step S 031). (Step S027) 'and' backup restoration processing (step S028) 'for restoring backup data are processing routes to be executed. For example, a person in charge of hall or the like performs the current setting value by the “setting confirmation operation”. Will be migrated if you

<(D) Backup recovery processing route (backup recovery mode)>
When at least one of the setting key switch signal and the door open signal is in the OFF state and the RAM clear signal is in the OFF state (W (x, y, z) = W (1, 0, 0), W (0 , 1, 0), W (0, 0, 0)), the CPU 201 shifts the processing state to the “backup recovery processing route (step S028)” on the assumption that the backup recovery mode transition condition is satisfied. . This backup restoration processing route is a backup restoration processing (step S028) without any of the setting change management processing (step S023), the in-area RAM clearing processing (step S031), and the setting confirmation processing (step S027) being executed. Is a processing route to be executed, and, for example, it is shifted when the person in charge of hall or the like restores the power without performing any of the setting change operation, the RAM clear operation and the setting confirmation operation.

<(F) Power-on wait processing route (RAM error mode)>
As described above, when it is not transferred to the “setting change processing route” of the above (i), the “RAM clear processing route”, the “setting confirmation processing route” and the “backup restoration processing route” of the above (ii) to (iv) In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not an abnormality (RAM error) has occurred in the contents of the RAM 203 in the present embodiment. Steps S015 to S016) are performed. If it is determined in this RAM error determination processing that a RAM error has occurred, it is determined that the RAM error mode (power reactivation wait processing mode) shift condition is satisfied, and the processing state is “power reactivation wait processing route (Steps S017 to S020). When transitioning to the power supply reentry wait processing route, as predetermined error processing, for example, the progress of the game processing is forcibly stopped.

  The power reactivation wait processing route, as described above, is a processing route to be migrated when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM, but when transferred to the setting change processing route, the RAM error determination processing is performed. It is not executed, and therefore, it is not transferred to the power reactivation waiting processing route. Although the details will be described later, when transitioning to the setting change processing route, the entire area of the in-area RAM (including the setting value storage area is included by the setting change management process (step S023) or the in-area RAM clear process (step S031) described later. A work area related to a normal game is substantially initialized (cleared). That is, in the case of shifting to the “setting change processing route”, even if data in the RAM is damaged, the damaged data is initialized. For this reason, when the setting is changed, no RAM error occurs thereafter, and it is not necessary to execute the RAM error determination process to check whether the content of the RAM is abnormal or not. . For this reason, when transitioning to the setting change processing route, the RAM error determination processing is not executed, and the control load is reduced by not checking the contents of the RAM indiscriminately.

  On the other hand, when transitioning to a “RAM clear processing route” in which a specific area of the in-area RAM is cleared, or a “setting confirmation processing route” or a “backup recovery processing route” in which the RAM clear processing itself is not executed, Even if the data is corrupted, it may remain without being cleared. As a result, processing may run out of control, and problems such as failure to recover from backup data may occur. Therefore, when transitioning to a process route other than the setting change process route, the contents of the RAM are checked in advance prior to the execution of the process, and if there is an abnormality, it is determined that the RAM error has occurred. It is made to shift to the reentry waiting processing route. As a result, even when the processing route other than the setting change processing route is migrated, it is possible to prevent a failure due to data corruption or the like. When a RAM error occurs, the power supply is turned on again, and the RAM error is not canceled unless the RAM is cleared by the setting change processing route (see FIG. 6A, FIG. 8 and the like described later).

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 6A, after executing the above-mentioned branch determination information acquisition process (step S013), it is determined whether or not to shift the processing state to 'setting change processing route (setting change processing mode)' (setting change Branch determination processing: step S014).

  In this setting change branch determination process, the CP instruction compares the value of the W register of the first operand with the 8-bit data '01100001B' specified by the second operand to calculate their difference (SPb2). The processing branches depending on whether the comparison result (subtraction result) is zero or not, that is, whether the setting key switch signal, the RAM clear signal, and the door open signal are all in the ON state (SPb3). If the calculation result by SPb2 is zero, the bit pattern of the W register has the same value as '01100001B', that is, the setting key switch signal, the RAM clear signal, and the door open signal are all in the ON state W (1, It becomes a combination of 1, 1) (W (x, y, z) = W (1, 1, 1)). On the other hand, if the comparison result by SPb2 is not zero, the combination is other than that. (W (x, y, z) ≠ W (1, 1, 1)).

  Specifically, when the comparison result by SPb2 is zero, that is, "W (x, y, z) = W (1, 1, 1)", the zero flag ZF is set to 1 and the comparison result is not zero, That is, when “W (x, y, z) ≠ W (1, 1, 1)”, 0 is set to the zero flag ZF. Then, when the zero flag ZF is 1 (ZF = 1) by the JR instruction (“JR NZ, SYSTEM — 300”) of SPb 3 (ie, W (1, 1, 1)), the setting change mode transition condition The processing state is shifted to the setting change processing route (execution of the subsequent program 'SPc1' is executed), and the zero flag ZF is not 1 (ZF = 0), that is, W (1, 1, 1) If the setting change mode transition condition is not satisfied, the processing state is shifted to a RAM error determination process (determination process of step S015) described later (jump to SYSTEM 300). As described above, in the present embodiment, the RAM error determination process (steps S015 and S016) is not performed when transitioning to the setting change process route.

  In SPb3, the "JR instruction" of 8-bit relative jump is adopted as the jump instruction, not the "JP instruction" of 16-bit absolute jump. Since the address of the jump destination is specified by the absolute address (16 bits (2 bytes)) in the JP instruction, the address of the jump destination is specified by the relative address (8 bits (1 byte)) in the JR instruction. The JR instruction has an advantage that the program capacity can be reduced by one byte. However, since the jumpable target range of the JR instruction is from -128 to +127 bytes from the location of the program counter (PC register), the range is also limited by the JP instruction of the absolute jump. In the present embodiment, from the viewpoint of reducing the program capacity, all jump instructions used in the source code shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B use the JR instruction, and a scheme is made to make the most of the small memory capacity. .

(B. Setting change processing route (setting change mode): S014 → S021 ~ S024 → S030 ~ S032)
The processing content of the setting change processing route will be described with reference to FIGS. 6A to 6B, 10, and 31A to 31B. In the source code shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the execution order of the processing by the setting change processing route is indicated by thick arrows and numerals in the column of “at the time of setting change”. In the following, among the setting change processing routes, the processing of steps S021 to S024 and steps S030 to S032 will be mainly described to avoid redundant description.

  When shifting to the setting change processing route, first, the command data during setting change (BA5AH) is acquired (step S021, SPc1), and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission processing (_CMDOUT) ( Step S022, SPc2). When the effect control unit 24 receives the command under setting change, the effect control unit 24 uses the effect means to execute “effect under setting change” notifying that the setting value is being changed. For example, the decoration lamp 45 is fully illuminated in blue, and the speaker 16 outputs an alarm sound of “setting is being changed ♪”, and the liquid crystal display device 36 is displayed an effect image of “setting being changed”. It is to be noted that the effect control unit 24 is configured to end the effect during setting change being executed in response to the reception of the setting completion command (BA09H) described later.

  Next, setting change management processing (M_SETTI) is executed (step S 023). Here, the setting change management process (M_SETTEI) of the subroutine is called and executed (SPc3).

(10. Setting change management process: FIG. 10)
The setting change management process (M_SETTEI) of step S 023 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing details of setting change management processing.

  In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first clears the backup flag BF (step S901).

  Next, an input data creation process is executed (step S902). In this input data creation process, input information such as the RAM clear switch 98, the setting change switch 95, and the setting key switch 96 is acquired. For example, the input management process of the main control timer interrupt process (S083 in FIG. 17) It is supposed to be called and executed.

  Next, it is determined whether the set value Nc (set value data) stored in the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) of the in-area RAM is an abnormal value (a value other than 00H to 05H) (step S903). In the present embodiment, when the setting change processing route is executed, the power reactivation wait processing route (steps S017 to S020: RAM error processing) is not executed. Therefore, the setting value Nc is checked in advance before the setting change operation, and when an abnormality occurs, the setting value storage area is cleared (step S904). The processing contents of steps S903 to S904 will be described in detail below.

  If it is a normal gaming operation, the setting value storage area should store any setting value data (setting value Nc) of '00H to 05H (normal value)' corresponding to settings 1 to 6 It is. However, the setting value data may be damaged due to some problem, and a value not corresponding to any of the settings 1 to 6 may be set. Therefore, when the set value Nc is not within the range of 00H to 05H, it can be determined that some failure has occurred in the set value Nc.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the process of step S903, it is determined whether or not the set value Nc is in the range of 00H to 05H. Specifically, after the setting value Nc is acquired in the C register, the CP instruction compares the value of the C register (setting value Nc) with 06H to obtain their difference, and the comparison result (subtraction result) If “set value Nc <06H (subtraction result is negative)” (step S903: YES), the process jumps to step S905 described later, assuming that the set value Nc is a value within the normal range, while “set value Nc If ≧ 06H (the subtraction result is not negative) "(step S903: NO), the initial value 00H (setting 1) is set in the setting value storage area, assuming that the setting value Nc is an abnormal value (setting Value Nc 00 00 H). The initial value of the setting value is not limited to setting 1 (00H), and may be any value of setting 2 to setting 6 (01H to 05H).

  In the process of step S905, the first power supply abnormality check process (_VDDCHK) shown in FIG. 8 is executed (step S905).

  Next, a security signal (a setting change in progress signal and / or a door open state in progress signal) indicating that setting change is in progress (setting change operation in progress) is output from the frame external terminal board 21 (step S906). The chattering prevention waiting time (for example, about 0.12 ms) is set (step S 907). Then, it waits for the chattering prevention waiting time to elapse (step S 908, step S 909: NO). In the present embodiment, the process of steps S905 to S916 is repeated at high speed until the setting completion change switch 96 is turned off (step S916 described later: YES). It is determined whether the change switch 95 has been changed from OFF to ON. However, by providing the chattering prevention waiting time in steps S 907 to S 909, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to chattering of the setting change switch 95.

  If the chattering prevention waiting time has become 0 (step S909: YES), the input data creation process is executed (step S910), and it is determined whether the setting change switch 95 is in the ON state, that is, the setting change operation It is determined whether or not there is (step S911). In this embodiment, when the ON edge of the setting change switch 95 is detected, it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed. In the present embodiment, the input data creation processing for acquiring the input information of the setting change switch 95 is executed not only at step S 910 immediately before step S 911 but also at step S 902 at the start of the setting change management processing. . This is because, if the setting change processing is started while the setting change switch 95 is kept pressed, even if the ON edge of the setting change switch 95 is suddenly set, the empty detection is performed in step S 910. Thus, the determination process of step S 911 is not affected.

  If the setting change switch 95 is not in the ON state (step S911: NO), it is determined that the setting change operation has not been performed, and the process proceeds to step S915. On the other hand, when the setting change switch 95 is in the ON state (step S911: YES), the present setting value Nc is changed (updated) on the assumption that the setting change operation has been made (step S912). As for setting values during setting change (setting change operation), as described above, each time the setting change switch 95 is operated, it is switched so as to circulate in the range of the settings 1 to 6.

  Then, when the process of step S912 is finished, it is determined again whether the current setting value Nc is the normal value (step S913). If it is not the normal value (step S913: NO), the setting value Nc is set. 00H (setting 1) corresponding to setting 1 is set (setting value Nc 00 00H) (step S914).

  Next, based on the current setting value Nc, data for setting display to be displayed on the setting display unit 97 is created and output (step S915). As a result, the setting display 97 displays the current setting value during the setting change. However, the setting values displayed here are “provisional setting values” before the setting values are determined.

  After the process of step S915, it is determined whether the setting change completion switch 96 is in the ON state, that is, whether the setting change operation (setting change period) is completed (step S916). If the setting change completion switch 96 is not ON (step S916: NO), it is determined that the setting change operation is not completed (setting change operation end condition not satisfied), the process proceeds to step S905, and thereafter the setting change completion switch 96 The process of steps S 905 to S 916 is repeatedly executed until the state of the button changes to the ON state (until the setting change operation end condition is satisfied).

  If setting change completion switch 96 is turned ON (step S916: YES), the present setting value Nc (setting work value of C register) is stored in the setting value storage area of RAM 203 as the setting value is determined. (Step S917).

  Next, the setting value determination display process is executed (step S 918). In the setting value finalization display process, the current setting display data is cleared, and the lighting finalization data of the setting finalization LED is output. In the setting confirmation LED of this embodiment, when the DP unit (decimal point) of the setting display 97 which is a 7-segment LED takes on the function and the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on, the setting value being displayed disappears , And only the DP unit is turned on, and it is informed that the set value has been determined (setting determination display). In the present embodiment, the display mode in which only the DP unit is turned on at the time of setting determination has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a setting value display that does not exist in the six-step setting such as “7” or “8” may be adopted, or an alphabet or the like may be adopted. However, it is preferable that it is a display mode which can identify that setting value was decided.

The display mode of the setting value finalization display is not limited to the mode in which only the DP unit is lighted, and may be the next (A) or (の み) display mode.
(D) The DP unit is displayed (lighted) for a predetermined time together with the determined set value. For example, if the setting value is 6, "6." etc. are displayed for one second.
(乙) The DP unit is turned on after displaying the finalized set value for a predetermined period of time, instead of immediately clearing the setting display data (the DP unit is turned on simply by displaying the set value for a predetermined period of time). You do not have to light it).
In the case of the configuration of (A) or (B), the set value determined is displayed for a predetermined time, as compared with the configuration in which the fixed set value display is turned off and only the DP unit is lit. There is an advantage that the operator (for example, a person in the hall) can securely confirm the set value.

  Next, the output of the security signal (setting change in progress signal) is stopped (step S920), and the setting completion command data (BA09H) is obtained (step S921), and the obtained command data is transmitted by command transmission processing (_CMDOUT). It transmits to the effect control part 24 (step S922). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting completion command, the setting changing effect being executed is ended, and “setting change completion effect” is issued to notify that the setting change has been completed (the setting value has been decided). A period (predetermined time: for example, 10 seconds) is performed. For example, the decoration lamp 45 is fully lit in red, and an audio such as “setting is changed” is output from the speaker 16 (setting change completion sound), and the “setting is changed” on the liquid crystal display device 36 The effect image (setting change completion screen) is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, after the setting change management process (step S 023) is completed, the contents of the RAM are cleared by the in-area RAM clearing process (step S 031) described later. It is preferable to notify. Therefore, it may be configured to be able to notify that the RAM clear has been executed in addition to the setting change completion effect (a setting change RAM clear notification effect). For example, it is possible to simultaneously (overlaply) display “the setting has been changed” and “the RAM is cleared” on the liquid crystal display device 36. In addition, after the setting change completion effect is finished, a dedicated effect (Ram clear notification effect) for notifying the RAM clear may be configured to be executable. As the RAM clear notification effect, for example, the decoration lamp 45 is fully red-lit for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and an alarm sound from the speaker 16 when the RAM is cleared is output. Further, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays a background screen (a background image corresponding to a normal effect mode (normal state)) in the normal state (low probability screen display), and for the decoration pattern, decoration for the RAM clear time It is possible to display a combination of symbols (for example, "731": decorative symbol when the RAM is cleared) (a display mode when the first power is turned on). In this case, with regard to the display state of the liquid crystal display device 36, the display state (the first power-on display mode) is maintained even after the RAM clear notification by the decoration lamp 45 or the speaker 16 is ended, and the game is not started When a predetermined time (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed, the mode can be switched to a customer waiting mode (a "waiting customer waiting effect (customer waiting demo screen)" described later). Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear notification effect may be performed without executing the setting change completion effect.

  Then, the process waits for the setting key switch 94 to be in the OFF state (step S923: NO), and when the setting key switch 94 is in the OFF state (step S923: YES), the setting display 97 is displayed (here, Turn off the setting confirmation LED (DP unit) and exit from the setting change management process. Thus, a series of setting change operations are completed. In the present embodiment, the setting change completion effect is produced for a predetermined time regardless of whether the setting key switch 94 is in the OFF state. After that, the process returns to the main control side main process of FIG. 6A, and proceeds to the process of step S024 described later.

  In the present embodiment, in order to reduce the control burden, at least until the game start possible state is established (until the CTC setting process of step S036 described later is executed (the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. Before (or until at least the loop processing of steps S040 to S045 is executed), the error related to the “door open error” even if the door open sensor 61 is in the ON state (the front frame 2 is open) Notification (door open error notification) is not performed. However, from the viewpoint of security, when the door opening sensor 61 is in the ON state, information indicating that the door is in the opening state is transmitted to the hall computer HC by the security signal.

(Ψ: In case of notifying door open error)
Of course, the "door open error notification" may be executable even before the game start possible state is established. For example, the decoration lamp 45 is fully blinked in red, and the speaker 16 outputs a door open alarm sound of "door is open ♪" and causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display an effect image of "door is open". By the way, when changing the setting, normally, after the front frame 2 is released, the setting change operation (the setting key switch 94, the RAM clear switch 98, etc. is turned on) is performed, but the door opening error is In the case of being configured to be able to notify, it means that a door opening error has occurred from the start to the end of the setting change operation. Therefore, there arises a problem that either the door open error notification or the setting change effect effect or the setting change completion effect is to be preferentially notified, but the setting change is more effective than the door open error notification to clearly notify the processing state. It is preferable to set the notification priority of the medium effect and the setting change completion effect high. Specifically, when the setting change is started (when the setting change command is received), the door open error notification is switched to the setting changing effect, and after the setting change completion effect is finished (when the setting completion command is received) , And is configured to switch to the door open error notification. This makes it possible to clearly notify that the setting is being changed and that a new set value has been selected and determined (including changing to the same set value). Also, when the above-described RAM clear notification effect or setting change RAM clear notification effect is executed, the notification priority such as the RAM clear notification effect should be set higher than the door open error notification to clearly notify the processing state. Is preferred.

  Note that, “determining notification priority high” means, for example, (self) overlapping (simultaneously), in addition to the case where (戊) one effect is executed with full priority over other effects. It is a concept that includes the case of execution. However, in the case of redundantly executing, the effect mode (informing mode) according to the informing priority order such as emphasizing informing the effect of the higher informing priority order (in the setting confirmation described later, “Ω: The same is true for "informing door open error". For example, speaking of the relation between the effect of setting change (high notification priority) and the door open error notification (low notification priority), in the case of the former (、), the door open error notification is interrupted and the setting change It refers to the form of executing the middle effect. In the case of the latter (self), it refers to a form informing a door opening error in a form accompanying the effect during setting change, for example, the effect by the decorative lamp 45 and the speaker 16 is an effect aspect during effect during setting change, liquid crystal display device 36 indicates an effect mode that emphasizes a person with a high notification priority, such as displaying "the setting is being changed" in a large size and displaying "the door is open" smaller than that.

(Modification 1-1)
In the present embodiment, an example in which a dedicated setting change switch 95 is provided as the setting change switch has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the setting change switch 95, the RAM clear switch 98 may function as a setting change switch. In this case, the setting change operation can be performed by the operation of the RAM clear switch 98 without providing the setting change switch 95.

(Modification 1-2)
Further, in the present embodiment, a dedicated setting change completion switch 96 is provided as the setting change completion switch, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the setting change completion switch 96, the setting key switch 94 may function as a setting change completion switch. In this case, the setting change end operation can be performed by the operation of the setting key switch 94 without providing the setting change completion switch 96 separately. In the case of the present modified example, the determination process of ON / OFF of the setting change completion switch 96 in the process of step S916 is the determination process of ON / OFF of the setting key switch 94. Further, the determination process of step S 923 is not necessary (the process of the broken line in the figure may be deleted), which leads to the reduction of the control load.

(Modification 1-3)
In addition, other sensor switches, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball (for example, sensor 34a, 35a, 52a, 43a, or 49a) may function as a setting change completion switch. In this case, in the determination process of step S916, it may be determined that the set value has been determined based on the fact that the game ball is detected (on state) by cleaning the game ball to the winning opening etc. . In addition, the combination of one modification or several modification is employable among above-described "modification 1-1"-"modification 1-3."

  As described above, when the setting change management process is completed, the process proceeds to step S024 in FIG. 6A, the address of the setting change command transmission address table (D_MKCADR2A) is acquired (step S024), and then the transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR ) Is executed (step S030). By the processing in steps S024 and S030, the effect control command (see the “setting change” column in FIG. 36) related to the setting change is transmitted.

  The contents of the above-described “steps S024 and S030” will be described in detail according to the source code of FIG. 31A.

  After setting the start address of the command transmission address table (D_MKCADR2A) for setting change in the HL register pair (SPd1), jump to SYSTEM_250 (SPd2) and call CALLV command to execute transmission command table selection processing (_MKCADR) ( SPf2). The setting change command transmission address table and transmission command table selection processing will be described in detail below.

(33A. Setting change command transmission address table (D_MKCADR2A): FIG. 33A (A))
The setting change command transmission address table will be described with reference to FIG. 33A. FIG. 33A shows a command transmission address table at the time of setting change.

  The setting change time command transmission address table according to the present embodiment includes loop number (number of tables to be specified) data as data for creating effect control command data to be sent at the time of setting change, and the top of the command creation table. An address is defined. In the case of the present embodiment, the table to be designated is the “specs specification command creation table (D_SPEC)” shown in FIG. 7B and the “guest waiting command creation table (D_BA04)” shown in FIG. The number of loops is two because there are two types.

(Command creation table: FIG. 33A (B) (C))
Next, the specification specification command specification command creation table (D_SPEC) and the “waiting customer command creation table (D_BA04) will be described.

  The “spec specification command creation table (D_SPEC)” and the “waiting command creation table (D_BA04)” include addition value data (here, 00H) and command data to be transmitted as illustrated. And are defined.

  The “addition value data” is offset data used when a change is made to command data (reference command data) serving as a reference. Therefore, when the addition value data is 00H, the reference command data is acquired as command data to be actually transmitted, and when the addition value is not 00H (for example, in the case of 01H), the addition value is added to the reference command data. Command data (in this example, reference command data + 01H) is acquired as command data to be actually transmitted.

(11. Transmission command table selection processing: FIG. 11)
Next, the transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR) of step S030 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing transmission command table selection processing.

  In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first sets the number of loops with reference to the “setting change command transmission address table” of FIG. 33A (A) acquired in step S024 (SPd1) (step S071).

  Next, the command creation table is selected with reference to the setting change time command transmission address table (step S072). Here, the specification designation command creation table of FIG. 33A (B) and the customer waiting command creation table of FIG. 33A (C) are sequentially selected in two loops. Then, the first command data creation process shown in FIG. 12 is executed.

(12. First command data creation process: FIG. 12)
FIG. 12 shows a flowchart of the first command data creation process of step S073. In the first command data creation process, as shown in FIG. 12, first, referring to the command creation table selected in step S072, command data to be sent is acquired (step S076), and then the command transmission of the subroutine is performed. The process (_CMDOUT) is called and executed, and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S077). Here, 'F611H (spec specification command data)' based on the spec specification command creation table and 'BA04H (guest waiting command data)' based on the customer waiting command creation table are acquired in two loops. These command data are sequentially transmitted to the effect control unit 24. That is, before the setting change operation is completed, after the setting change operation (BA5AH) is completed, the setting completion command (BA09H), the specification designation command (F611H), and the customer waiting command (BA04H) Will be transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in this order (see the description of “setting change” in FIG. 36).

  After the first command data creation process (step S073) of FIG. 12 is executed, the number of loops is decremented (step S074), and the processes of steps S072 to S075 are repeated until the number of loops becomes zero. Then, if the number of loops has become zero (step S075: = 0), this transmission command table selection processing is exited.

  The transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR) in FIG. 11 is commonly used also when the RAM clear processing route (steps S029 to S032) described later is executed. When this RAM clear processing route is executed, it is not the “setting change command transmission address table” shown in FIG. 33A selected by the setting change processing route but “RAM clear command transmission address table (D_MKCADR2) described later. Is selected (see step S029 in FIG. 6B and FIG. 33B). Then, transmission command table selection processing (_MKCADR) is executed (step S030), and a target effect control command is transmitted.

  When the effect control unit 24 receives the above-mentioned waiting-for-guest command, based on a predetermined execution condition, “waiting-for-waiting demonstration (waiting for waiting for guest) for explaining the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and its introduction (demonstration) Make the screen appear. Specifically, after receiving the customer waiting command, the game is not started, that is, the operation holding ball does not occur (without receiving the hold addition command) for a predetermined time (for example, 180 seconds). If it has, it will make the customer waiting waiting effect appear.

  Note that, as described above, after the setting change operation is completed, the above-mentioned customer waiting command is transmitted following the setting completion command (step S921) from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24. However, the effect control unit 24 does not execute the customer waiting waiting effect (the customer waiting demonstration screen or the like) at least until the setting change completion effect is finished. Note that after the setting change completion effect is completed, the above-described RAM clear notification effect may be executed, and after the RAM clear notification effect is completed, the customer waiting waiting effect may be executed. In order to make the customer waiting waiting effect appear after this setting change completion effect, the above-mentioned 180 seconds may be waited and executed after the reception of the customer waiting command, or it may be executed immediately (without waiting for 180 seconds). You may

  In addition, after the start of the customer waiting waiting effect (demonstration screen display), when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the mode is shifted to the “power saving mode”. In the case of the present embodiment, in the power saving mode, for example, after the start of the customer waiting waiting effect, the operation holding ball does not occur and the predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) is not switched to the menu screen (game setting screen). Can be taken as the transition condition (power saving mode transition condition). When the power saving mode transition condition is satisfied, the effect control unit 24 ends the customer waiting standby effect and shifts to the power saving mode, and causes the effect dedicated to the power saving mode (effect in the power saving mode) to appear. For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 is controlled to display a screen for power saving (for example, the liquid crystal screen displays the character display "power saving in progress") and control to turn off some or all of the decorative lamp 45 and other performance LEDs. (Power saving control).

  By the way, in the present embodiment, the game is not in progress (when the game is not in the symbol variation display game, and the operation holding ball is zero (including the case where the customer waiting transition effect is not included)) or When the operation of the effect button 13 or the direction key 75 is detected, the volume, the light amount and the like can be switched and displayed on the “menu screen (game setting effect)” in which the setting of the game can be made. It is preferable to notify the player of the switchable timing, that is, the button operation valid period (menu screen switching operation valid period) in the demonstration screen. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the button LED 13b is excluded from power saving targets, and the button LED 13b lights up or blinks in a notification mode (for example, orange) different from the normal notification mode (for example, white) during the menu screen switching operation valid period. And to notify that it is a period during which switching operation to the menu screen is possible.

(In-area RAM clear processing: step S031)
Returning to the description of FIG. 6B, when the transmission command table selection process (step S030) described above is finished, the in-area RAM clear process is then executed (step S031, SPg1 to SPg3). In the in-area RAM clear process, at least a set value storage area in the in-area RAM area for storing data used in a normal game process (a process related to a symbol variation display game, a process related to hit game, etc.) The entire area (normal data storage area) except for the above is initialized (cleared), and the operating state of the gaming machine is returned to the initial state. Therefore, even if the in-area RAM clear process is executed, the out-of-area RAM (see FIG. 30) used for the process related to the base value (performance display) is not cleared.

  In the present embodiment, the program and storage area for processing related to performance display are different from the area (in-area memory (first memory area)) accessed by the CPU 201 during normal game progression (the out-of-area memory (second memory) Memory area)). Specifically, main control unit 20 can store game data used in game processing (for example, processing other than processing related to display of performance indicator 99) related to 'normal game progress' according to the processing state Information display processing relating to 'performance information display (base display)' not directly related to the game progress according to the first RAM area (in-area RAM) and the processing state (steps S034, S043, FIG. 17 of FIG. RAM 203 including a second RAM area (outside area RAM) capable of storing performance information data used in step S102 etc.) and a first ROM area (in area) storing a game control program for executing the normal game processing ROM 202 including a ROM) and a second ROM area (outside area ROM) storing an information display control program for executing the above-mentioned information display process Configured to have a CPU201 for executing game control operation based on the game control program and information display control program, a. Here, the clear target is only the RAM area (in-area RAM) related to the in-area memory. The setting value storage area (setting value data) is not to be cleared even if it is data in the area RAM. The initialization / change of the setting value data is performed in the setting change management process (step S023 in FIG. 6A) shown in FIG. 10 described above.

  The above-mentioned "normal data storage area" mainly includes various flags used in various random number update processing (step S041) described later and the main control unit-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 17), an operation timer, a counter, etc. A storage area corresponding to each of the game progress data is defined. Typical data as the game progress data include the following data. Below, as a representative game progress data, a part thereof is exemplified.

(A) Flags relating to various functions for designating a game state ("Pu-Para-Pulls Release Extension Status Flag" which designates the operation status of the open extension function, "Normal symbol time-short which designates the operation status of the normal symbol time short function "Status flag", "Normal symbol probability variation status flag" to specify the actuation status of the normal symbol probability variation function, "special symbol time variation status flag" to designate the actuation status of the special symbol time minor feature, designation of the actuation status of the special symbol probability variation function "Special symbol probability change state flag": game state specification flag)
(B) "special symbol time reduction number counter" to count the number of operations of special symbol time reduction function, "special symbol probability variation number counter" to count the number of activations of special symbol probability variation function,
(C) "Various data related to big hit lottery and supplementary lottery (big hit determination flag, small hit determination flag, normal symbol determination flag, special symbol determination data, normal symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, normal stop symbol number, Various random numbers etc. used for each lottery)
(D) "Parameters related to the fluctuation display operation state of special symbols or ordinary symbols (in-motion flag, special symbol operation status, ordinary symbol operation status, special symbol operation confirmation data, etc.)", "Can identify current gaming state Game state data (playing state number YJ), "number of operation holding balls (special drawing 1 operation holding ball number, special drawing 2 operation holding ball number, general drawing operation holding ball number)",
(E) “Various data related to the execution of a hit game (current number of rounds (number of special motorized product operations), specified number of rounds, number of big winning prize winnings, condition device operation flag, small hit flag, character continuous operation Device operation flag, special electric combination product operation status, round display LED number etc), "Various data related to the execution of the public release game (normal electric combination product operation status, common electric combination product operating flag etc)"
(F) "Various operation timers for managing the game progress (except for the timer for displaying the base value)", "a winning counter for counting the number of winning balls",
(G) “ON / OFF data pertaining to switches / sensors (except for ON / OFF data of sensors such as a winning opening pertaining to base value display)”,
(H) "Various error flags", "backup flag BF", etc.
In any case, when the in-area RAM clearing process (step S031) is executed, all data in the normal data storage area is set to the initial state except for the setting value storage area and the out-of-area RAM.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the address map of FIG. 29, 0 to 255 bytes in the RAM 203 are defined as the in-area RAM, and 256 to 511 bytes are defined as the out-of-area RAM. Further, in the case of this embodiment, one byte of the start address (address 0000H) of the in-area RAM is secured as the set value storage area. Further, in the in-area RAM, a predetermined area other than the setting value storage area and the normal data storage area is used as a stack area for saving the return address when the subroutine is called. Specifically, 2 bytes are used as a stack area for saving (PUSH) the return address upon calling of “set zero processing (_ZEROSET2)” indicated by SPg3 in FIG. 31A by the CALLV instruction. The above-mentioned zero set process (_ZEROSET2) is a process for clearing the data of the designated address to zero.

  Therefore, it is necessary to exclude a total of 3 bytes of the area to be cleared of the in-area RAM from the set value storage area and the area used as the stack area for the return address described above. Therefore, in the in-area RAM clear process, first, the next address of the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) is set in the HL register pair as the start address of the clear target area in the HL register pair (SPg1) to clear the data. As the number of times of zero set processing (_ZEROSET2) to be performed, 253 is set in the B register (SPg2). Then, by the CALLV instruction, the subroutine zero set processing (_ZEROSET2) is called and executed (SPg3). As a result, the area (253 bytes) excluding the setting value storage area of the in-area RAM and the stack area for return address saving is cleared to zero.

  Although details will be described later, the main control is not performed on the out-of-area RAM, that is, the RAM area related to performance information (measurement information storage area, performance display storage area, etc.) The contents of the out-of-area RAM are checked in the performance display monitor process (step S102 in FIG. 17) during the side timer interrupt process, and the RAM clear process (out-of-area RAM clear process) is executed when there is an abnormality in the contents. (Refer to step S102 in FIG. 17 and step S824 in FIG. 25). Thus, for example, in order to normalize the gaming state (initialization) or to change the set value, the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation, for example, during a hit game or in a definite change state, the business hours end. Even if this is done, only the normal data storage area is cleared without clearing the data related to the base value. Therefore, it is possible to take over over power failure without being influenced by the RAM clear operation and the setting change operation.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 6B, when the in-area RAM clear processing in step S031 is finished, next, an initial value at the time of RAM clear is set for specific data in the in-area RAM (normal data storage area) (power on Time initial data setting process: step S032, SPg4 to SPg6). In this power-on initial data setting process, the start address of the work area initial setting table (D_INSET) (not shown) is set in the HL register pair (SPg4), and specific data is set in the designated work area by the CALLV instruction. Call for 'data set processing (_DTSET)' to execute (SPg5).

  In the above-mentioned "Work area initial setting table (D_INSET)", data specifying a specific address of the in-area RAM and initial data at the time of RAM clearing set in the storage area specified by the address are defined. By executing the above-mentioned "data set process (_DTSET)", initial data is set to the storage area of the designated destination.

  In this embodiment, the error notification timer (W_SGTMER), the special figure 1 stop symbol number (W_T1STPNO), and the special view 2 stop symbol number (W_T2STPNO) are designated as the storage area of the designated destination, and the error notification timer (W_SGTMER) is designated. Is set to 30000 ms, and the special stop symbol number 200 (special lost symbol data: for example, lost A correspondence stop) for the special symbol 1 stop symbol number (W_T1STPNO) and the special symbol 2 stop symbol number (W_T2STPNO), respectively. Design data is to be set. The error notification timer here is the output time of the RAM clear signal (one of the security signals (which may be a security signal common to the security signal being changed)) indicating that the RAM clear has been executed. The RAM clear signal is output to the hall computer HC through the frame external terminal board 21. In this embodiment, as the initial data, the same special stop symbol number is set to the special symbol 1 stop symbol number and the special symbol 2 stop symbol number, but different lost symbol data may be set. In addition, data other than lost symbol data may be used, and for example, data corresponding to a specific symbol (a symbol dedicated to clearing the RAM) which is not displayed during the game may be set. Also, non-lighting (lighting-off) data (lighting-off data) may be set. Further, similarly to the special symbol, the symbol data of the lost, the non-lighting data, etc. may be set for the data (normal stop symbol number (W_FSTPNO)) regarding the normal symbol.

  Then, when the data setting process (_DTSET) of SPg5 is completed, the process jumps to step S033 (SYSTEM_850) described later (SPg6). As a result, after the setting change processing route is completed, the processing state is shifted to the processing of step S033 of the merging point.

  In order to determine that the setting change transition mode transition condition is satisfied in the setting change branch determination process (step S014), after the front frame 2 is released, the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are used. It is necessary to turn on the power while both are on. When the setting key switch 94 or the RAM clear switch 98 is turned on after the front frame 2 is opened and the power switch (not shown) inside the gaming machine is turned on, from the power on to the on operation Usually, it takes several seconds. However, before the ON operation, the process of step S067 in the initial setting process of FIG. 7 is executed and the input information of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) is acquired, so at least the door open signal is in the ON state. Is detected, but the OFF state is detected for the setting key switch signal and the RAM clear switch signal. That is, when the setting change branch determination process is executed, combinations other than W (1, 1, 1) are acquired, and setting change transition mode transition conditions are not satisfied in the setting change branch determination process, and the setting change is made. This is because the processing route is not executed. In this case, as shown in the figure, the processing route on which the processing of step S015 and the subsequent steps are executed is followed, and thereafter, the setting change operation is controlled to the prohibited state. In this case, once the power is turned off, the power may be turned on again while the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are turned ON. If it is determined that the setting change transition mode transition condition is satisfied, then the setting change operation permission state is maintained even if the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are turned off. However, in the case of using the setting key switch 94 as the setting change completion switch instead of the setting change completion switch 96, as described above, the setting key switch 94 is turned off after the setting change transition mode transition condition is satisfied. Then, the setting change period (setting change operation) is ended.

  Next, each processing route of the RAM clear processing route (RAM clear mode), the setting confirmation processing route (setting confirmation mode), and the backup recovery processing route (backup recovery mode) will be sequentially described. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, "RAM error determination processing (steps S015 to S016)" executed prior to these processing routes will be described in detail.

(RAM error determination processing: steps S 015 to S 0 16)
As described above, when the determination result in step S014 in FIG. 6A is a combination other than W (1, 1, 1), it is assumed that the setting change mode transition condition is not satisfied, and the processing state is set to It is shifted to "RAM error determination processing" of step S016 (when SPb3: zero flag ZF = 1, jump to SYSTEM_300).

  The RAM error determination process is a process of determining whether or not the process state is shifted to the 'power reentry wait process route (RAM error mode)' in steps S017 to S020. In the RAM error determination process, it is first determined whether or not the RAM is abnormal (step S015). Here, the data in the RAM area to be determined is the set value data of the set value storage area (W_SETTEI). As described above, for setting values, six setting values of settings 1 to 6 are defined, and if normal, the setting value storage area (W_SETTEI) corresponds to six setting values. One of 00H to 05H should be stored. However, due to some problems such as noise, an abnormal value other than 00H to 05H may be stored.

  Therefore, in this process, the CP instruction compares the set value data of the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) with 06H to calculate their difference (SPh1), and if the comparison result is negative (“Set If the set value Nc is within the normal range, the process proceeds to the determination process of step S016 (SPh2: if carry flag CF = 1, the process of SPh3 is executed), while the process If the comparison result is not negative (if the set value Nc ≧ 06H), it is determined that the set value Nc is an abnormal value, and the process proceeds to the power reactivation wait processing route of steps S017 to S020 related to the power reactivation wait process ( SPh2: If carry flag CF ≠ 1, jump to SYSTEM_400). The details of the power supply reactivation wait processing route will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S015 that the RAM is not abnormal (NO in step S015), it is then determined whether the backup flag BF is a normal value (5AH) (step S016, SPh3 to SPh4). ). The backup flag BF is a backup flag of the in-area RAM “5AH (normal value)” when the backup process is normally executed in the process of the second power source abnormality check process (step S081 in FIG. 17) described later. It is set in the storage area (W_BACKFLG). Therefore, if normal, the backup flag BF should be 5AH. However, there is a possibility that the backup flag BF may not be a normal value due to some trouble. Therefore, in this processing, the difference between the value of backup flag BF (W_BACKFLG) and 5AH (normal value) is calculated by the CP instruction (SPh3), and if the comparison result is zero ( Assuming that the backup flag BF is a normal value, the process proceeds to the determination processing of step S025 (SPh4: jump to SYSTEM_600 when the zero flag ZF = 1), while if the comparison result is not zero (BFバ ッ ク ア ッ プ 5AH), assuming that the backup flag BF is an abnormal value, shift to a power supply reactivation wait processing route described later (SPh4: when the zero flag ZF = 0, execute SPi1 of SYSTEM_400 of the next address).

  If the RAM is not abnormal and the backup flag BF is also a normal value (5AH), the process proceeds to the RAM clear branch determination process shown in FIG. 6B (step S025, SYSTEM_600 in FIG. 31B). The RAM clear branch determination process is a process of determining whether or not to shift the process state to the 'RAM clear process route (RAM clear mode)'.

  Here, the RAM clear branch determination processing is executed when the value of the W register is a combination other than W (1, 1, 1), specifically, as shown in FIG. Bit), at least one of the door open signal (fifth bit) and the RAM clear signal (fifth bit) is in the OFF state (when the determination result in step S014 is NO). Among these, in order for the RAM clear processing route transition condition to be satisfied, it is sufficient that at least the RAM clear signal is in the ON state, that is, the sixth bit is 1.

  Therefore, in the RAM clear branch determination processing, it is determined whether or not the sixth bit of the W register is one. First, the value of bit 6 of the W register is set to carry flag CF (SPj1). Then, if the carry flag CF is 1 (CF = 1) by the JR instruction of SPj2, the RAM clear processing route transition condition is Assuming that the condition is satisfied, the process jumps to 'SYSTEM 200' shown in FIG. However, if carry flag CF is not 1 (CF ≠ 1), it is determined that the RAM clear processing route transition condition is not established, and the setting confirmation branch determination processing of step S026 which is the next processing, that is, SYSTEM_600 shown in FIG. 31B. Execute processing of SPk1. The details of the setting confirmation branch determination process (step S026) will be described later.

(B. RAM clear processing route (RAM clear mode): S025 → S029 to S032)
The processing content of the RAM clear processing route will be described. In the source code shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the execution order of the processing by the RAM clear processing route is indicated by thick arrows and numerals in the column "at the time of RAM clear". In the following, in order to avoid redundant description, the processing of steps S029 to S032 in the RAM clear processing route will be mainly described.

  When shifting to the RAM clear processing route, first, the address of the command transmission address table (D_MKCADR2) at RAM clear in FIG. 33B is acquired (step S029, SPe2), and then the transmission command table selection processing (_MKCADR) in FIG. (Step S030, SPf2 of SYSTEM_250). The processing contents are substantially the same as the address acquisition processing of step S029 and the address acquisition processing of step S024 already described, except for the acquired address table (see SPd1 and SPe2).

(33B. RAM clear command transmission address table (D_MKCADR2): FIG. 33B)
FIG. 33B shows the above-described RAM clear command transmission address table. The basic configuration of the RAM clear command transmission address table is the same as the setting change command transmission address table shown in FIG. 33A, and therefore, the details thereof will be described while being omitted as appropriate.

When the command transmission address table at the time of the RAM clear is referred to, as shown in FIGS. 33B (B) to (D),
(B) "RAM clear command creation table (D_BA02)",
(C) "Spec specification command creation table (D_SPEC)",
(D) “Guest waiting command creation table (D_BA04)”,
The three types of command creation tables are sequentially selected (the number of loops is three), and the command data defined in these command creation tables are sequentially transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in three loops (see FIG. (See 11 transmission command table selection processing). That is, in the RAM clear processing route, three types of commands of the RAM clear command (BA02H), the specification designation command (F611H), and the customer waiting command (BA04H) are transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in this order. (See the "clear RAM" column in FIG. 36).

  When the effect control unit 24 receives the RAM clear command (BA02H), the effect mode is set to the “normal effect mode” in the initial state, the effect state is returned to the initial state, and the RAM is cleared using the effect means. The error notification (RAM clear notification effect) corresponding to is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). For example, the decoration lamp 45 is fully lit in red, the alarm sound from the speaker 16 is output when the RAM is cleared, and the liquid crystal display device 36 displays a rendering image such as "RAM is being cleared". Also, in step S029, while the RAM clear command is sent, the customer waiting command is sent, but at this timing the customer wait waiting effect is not executed, and the RAM clear notification is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) After being done, the customer waiting waiting effect is executed. For example, the warning sound is faded out, and a guest waiting demonstration screen or the like is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. In the present embodiment, the RAM clear notification effect (RAM clear notification) is to be executed with the highest priority.

  When the transmission command table selection process (step S030) is completed, the in-area RAM clear process (steps S031 and SPg1 to SPg3) and the power-on initial data setting process (step S032 and SPg4) as in the setting change process route already described. Perform ~ SPg 6). As a result, after the RAM clear processing route is completed, the processing state is shifted to the processing of step S 033 (SYSTEM_850) of the merging point.

  Note that in the in-area RAM clearing process (step S031) according to the present embodiment, the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) of the in-area RAM is not initialized. Therefore, when the RAM clear processing route is executed, only the other game data (data relating to the normal data storage area) is cleared without changing the setting value at the time of power shutoff. For example, although the set value remains the same value at the time of the previous power off, the game is started in the state where the gaming state and the hold data are initialized (the normal state and the initial state such as no hold data). It will be. Thus, for example, when it is desired to hand over only the set value from the sales the day before, the clear work is completed by the simple operation of ON / OFF operation of the RAM clear switch 98 even if the setting change operation with many work processes is not performed. It has the advantage of

  The description will return to the RAM clear branch determination process (step S025) of FIG. 6B. When the RAM clear processing route transition condition is not satisfied in the RAM clear branch determination processing, that is, when the value of the sixth bit of the W register obtained in SPj1 of FIG. 31B is 0 (carry flag CF ≠ 1 And the setting confirmation branch determination process of step S026, that is, the process of SPk1 of FIG. 31B.

  The setting confirmation branch determination processing is processing to determine whether to shift the processing state to the “setting confirmation processing route (setting confirmation mode)” or to shift to the “backup restoration processing route (backup restoration mode)”. Specifically, the value of the W register is a combination of W (1, 1, 0), that is, whether the setting key switch signal (bit 0) and the door open signal (bit 5) are in the ON state or not. Is determined (step S026). If the value of the W register is a combination of W (1, 1, 0) (step S026: YES), the "setting confirmation process" of step S027 is executed assuming that the setting confirmation mode shift condition is satisfied. If it is other than (step S026: NO), it is determined that the backup recovery mode transition condition is established without the setting confirmation mode transition condition being established, and "backup recovery processing" in step S028 described later is executed.

  The setting confirmation branch determination process described above will be described according to the source code shown in FIG. 31B. The CP instruction compares the value of the W register of the first operand with the 8-bit data '00100001B' specified by the second operand. If the comparison result (subtraction result) is zero, that is, W (1, 1, 0), the zero flag ZF is set to 1, and if it is not zero, that is, W If not (1, 1, 0), the zero flag ZF is set to 0 (SPk1). Then, if the zero flag ZF is 1 by the JR instruction of SPk2, it is determined that the setting confirmation mode transition condition is satisfied, and the progrum of SYSTEM_650 (SPm1 to SPm20) which is the next processing, that is, the setting confirmation processing of step S027 is executed. Do. However, if the zero flag ZF is not 1 (zero flag ZF = 0), the setting confirmation mode transition condition is not satisfied, in other words, the backup restoration processing state described later (assuming that the backup restoration mode transition condition is satisfied) It shifts to step S028) (jump to SYSTEM_800).

(C. Setting confirmation processing route (setting confirmation mode): S026 → S027)
The setting confirmation process of step S027 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6B, 13, and 31A to 31B. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing details of setting confirmation processing. In the source code shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the execution order of the processing by the setting confirmation processing route is indicated by thick arrows and numerals in the “setting confirmation” column. In the following, among the setting confirmation processing routes, the setting confirmation processing in step S027 will be mainly described to avoid redundant description.

  In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first sets the setting confirmation command data (E021H) in the DE register pair (step S930, SPm1), and the acquired command data is transmitted by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) to the effect control unit 24. (Step S931, SPm2). When the effect control unit 24 receives the command during setting confirmation, the effect during setting confirmation is executed using the effect means. For example, an effect image such as “setting in check” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

(Ω: Informing a door open error)
By the way, when checking the set value, as in the case of the setting change, first, the setting key switch 94 is turned ON after opening the front frame 2, but it is possible to notify the door opening error If the door is open, a door open error notification is generated prior to the effect during setting confirmation. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation is finished, conversely, the front frame 2 is closed after the setting key switch 94 is turned OFF, but a door open error occurs also during this period (until the front frame 2 is closed). That is, from the start of the confirmation of the set value to the end of the confirmation, the door open error occurs in any way. When the door opening error is configured to be notified, the door opening error occurs from the start of the confirmation of the set value to the end of the confirmation. Therefore, there is a problem that which of the door opening error notification and the setting confirmation effect is given priority notification, but in order to clearly notify the processing state, like the setting changing effect and setting change completion effect already described It is preferable to set the notification priority of the effect during setting confirmation higher than the door open error notification. Specifically, when the setting confirmation is started (when the setting confirmation command is received), the door open error notification is switched to the setting confirming effect, and after the setting confirmation is completed (when the setting confirmation end command is received), the door It is configured to switch to the open error notification. This makes it possible to clearly notify that the setting is being confirmed. For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 can simultaneously display displays such as "setting in check" and "in door open error". However, even in this case, it is preferable to highlight the display of "setting confirmation in progress" rather than the display of "during door open error" in order to give priority notification that setting confirmation is in progress.

  Next, setting value data is acquired from the setting value storage area (W_SETTEI) into the C register (step S932, SPm3).

  Next, the first power source abnormality check process (_VDDCHK) of the subroutine is called and executed by the CALLV instruction (step S933, SPm4).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94) is in the ON state (steps S934 to S936, SPm5 to SPm7). Specifically, the data of input port 1 (P_INPT1) is transferred to register A (SPm5), and the 8-bit data of input port 1 (P_INPT1) transferred to register A and the mask data "00000001B" AND) to mask bits other than the 0th bit corresponding to the setting key switch signal (SPm6). As a result, the ON / OFF state of the current setting key switch signal is acquired in the A register.

  If the setting key switch signal is in the ON state, the value of the A register obtained by the above-described mask processing of SPm 6 becomes “00000001B”, and 0 is set to the zero flag ZF (ZF = 0). In this case, the process shifts to SPm8 by the JR instruction of SPm7, and 8-bit data '00000010B' specified by the second operand is set in the A register (SPm8). Subsequently, “00000010 B” of the A register is output to the external terminal port 2 (P_GAIBU 2) (SP m 9). In the external terminal port 2 (P_GAIBU2), for example, the 0th bit is a setting change signal and the first bit is an information terminal for outputting a security signal (for example, a setting confirmation signal). Therefore, the security signal is output from the frame external terminal board 21 to the hole computer HC by the SPm 9 (see step S 937).

  Next, during setting confirmation, data for setting display to be displayed on the setting display unit 97 is created (step S938), the data is output controlled, and the current setting value Nc is displayed on the setting display unit 97 (step S939). .

  The processes in steps S938 to S939 will be described along the source code with reference to FIG. FIG. 32A shows a pick-up of source codes (SPm3, SPm10 to SPm14) corresponding to the processes of steps S932 and S938 to S939 from the source code shown in FIG. 31B.

  Referring to FIG. 32A, CPU 201 first sets the top address of the setting display data table (D_7SEGDATA) shown in FIG. 32B to the HL register pair (SPm10). In the setting display data table, as shown in FIG. 32B, display pattern data for 7 segments corresponding to settings 1 to 6 is defined.

  Next, the setting value data stored in the C register, that is, the setting value data acquired in SPm3 (see step S932) is transferred to the A register (SPm11). Next, the content of the address specified by the value (HL + A) obtained by adding the value of the HL register pair (head address of the setting display data table) and the value of the A register (setting value data) is set in the W register. (SPm12). That is, the start address (the LED display pattern of 1) of the setting display data table is the reference address, and the setting value data of the A register (any value of 00H to 05H corresponding to settings 1 to 6) is an offset to the reference address Act as a value. For example, if the current setting value is 3, since the A register (offset value) is 02H, the LED data “01001111B ('') specified by the address obtained by adding 02H to the start address of the setting display data table '3 LED display pattern)' is set in the W register. Then, bit data '00010000 B (b4-b7: dynamic lighting common 0 to 3)' for setting the dynamic lighting common C3 for display on the setting indicator 97 to the ON state is set in the A register (SPm13).

  Then, the LED display pattern data of the W register is output to the LED data port (P_LED) for dynamic lighting data, and the dynamic lighting common data of the A register is output to the LED common port (P_LEDCMN) (steps S939 and SPm14). The operation of the mnemonic “OUTW (p), WA” shown in SPm 14 is “(p + 1, p) ← WA” (“p ′” indicates an I / O port address).

  The current setting value Nc is displayed on the setting display 97 by the above-described SPm10 to SPm14. In addition, it is preferable that the setting confirmation LED (DP unit) does not cause the setting display LED (DP unit) to light up or blink in the setting display during the setting confirmation. This is that the setting display during setting confirmation is to display the setting value that has already been confirmed. If the DP unit is turned on even during the setting confirmation, is it a display when setting values are confirmed by the setting change operation? This is because there is a risk that confusion may occur on the display whether the display is being confirmed during setting.

  When SPm14 is finished, the process jumps to SYSTEM_700 (SPm15), and thereafter, until the OFF state of the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94) is confirmed (until determination in step S936 is NO), SPm4 to SPm15 (Processes of steps S933 to S939) are repeatedly executed. That is, until the setting confirmation (setting confirmation period) is completed, the processes of steps S933 to S939 are repeatedly executed, and the current setting value is continuously displayed on the setting display 97 (setting confirmation display).

  Returning to the description of step S936, when the setting key switch 94 is in the OFF state (step S936: NO), the value of the A register obtained by the above-mentioned mask processing of SPm 6 becomes "00000000B", and the zero flag ZF is set. 1 is set (ZF = 1). In this case, assuming that the setting confirmation is completed, the process jumps to SYSTEM_750 (SPm7), and the setting confirmation end processing of steps S940 to S943 is executed.

  Here, as the setting confirmation end processing, first, an exclusive OR (XOR) of WA register pairs is obtained, the value of the WA register pair is updated to 0000H, and then the LED common port (P_LEDCMN) is used using the updated value. And the external terminal port 2 (P_GAIBU2) to zero clear (SPm16 to SPm18). Thus, the setting confirmation display by the setting display unit 97 is ended (turned off), and the security signal is stopped (steps S940 and S941). In the present embodiment, after confirmation of the setting (after confirmation of the OFF state of the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94)), the display of the setting value is ended immediately. As described above, the setting value itself is not changed, and there is little need to notify the final setting value (fixed setting value) as after the setting change. Therefore, when the setting confirmation is completed (after confirmation of the OFF state of the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94)), a process (step S918 in FIG. 10) of displaying the setting value as after the setting change is performed. The display of the set value is immediately ended without performing the process (step S936: NO → S940). This can contribute to the reduction of program capacity and the reduction of control burden.

  Then, the E register is incremented (SPm19). When this SPm19 is executed, since the value “21H” of the lower byte of the command data during setting confirmation (E021H) acquired in SPm1 (step S930) is set in the E register, the INC instruction of SPm19 is executed. As a result, the value of the E register is updated to "22H". As a result, the DE register pair acquires "E022H" in which the value of the D register is "E0H (see SPm1)" and the value of the E register is "22H", that is, 'setting confirmation end command' data is acquired Steps S942, SPm1, SPm19). Then, the command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) (step S 943, SPm 20), whereby a series of setting confirmation periods are completed. When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting confirmation end command, the effect during setting confirmation is ended. This means that a series of setting confirmation periods have ended. In addition, when the effect control unit 24 receives the confirmation end command, it may only simply end the effect during setting confirmation under execution, but using the effect means, the “setting confirmation end effect” is performed for a predetermined period (predetermined period Time: for example, 5 seconds) may be performed. For example, the decoration lamp 45 is fully illuminated yellow, and a sound (setting confirmation completion sound) such as "setting confirmation is complete" is output from the speaker 16, and "setting confirmation is completed" on the liquid crystal display device 36, etc. The effect image (setting confirmation completion screen) of can be displayed.

  When the above setting confirmation processing is completed, the processing state shifts to “backup restoration processing” to be described next (step S028).

(D. Backup recovery processing route (backup recovery mode): backup recovery processing (step S028) execution route)
Next, processing contents of the backup restoration processing route will be described with reference to FIGS. 6B, 14, 31A to 31B. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing backup recovery processing. In the source code shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the execution order of the processing by the backup recovery processing route is indicated by thick arrows and numerals in the column of "at backup". In the following, among the backup recovery processing routes, backup recovery processing in step S028 will be mainly described to avoid redundant description.

As described above, the processing route on which the backup recovery processing of step S028 is executed is
(I) Through the setting confirmation process of step S027, the route on which this backup restoration process is executed, (II) Setting change processing process according to the setting change process route (step S023), RAM in the area according to the RAM clear process route There is a processing route in which the backup recovery processing is executed alone without any of the clear processing (step S031) and the setting confirmation processing (step S027) relating to the setting confirmation processing route being executed. The backup recovery processing route of the above means a processing route on which the backup recovery processing is executed alone in the latter case. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30, in the backup recovery processing route, W (x, y, z) is W (1, 0, 0), W (0, 1, 0), W (0, 0, 0) Will be executed in any case).

  In FIG. 31B, the CPU 201 first calls up and executes “backup return command processing (M_MKINFO)” for transmitting an effect control command related to backup return (SPn1). This backup restoration command process (M_MKINFO) includes SPn1 to SPn4, and implements the processes of steps S951 to S957 in FIG. 14 by these programs.

  The “backup return command processing (M_MKINFO)” of SPn1 will be described with reference to FIG. The command processing for backup restoration (M_MKINFO) is mainly configured of the processing of steps S951 to S956 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first acquires the address of the backup return time command transmission address table (D_MKCADR1) shown in FIG. 33C (step S951), and then the transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR) of FIG. Execute (step S952). The processes of steps S951 to S952 and the process contents of steps S029 to S030 of FIG. 6B described above are substantially the same except for the command transmission address table to be acquired.

(33C. Backup return command transmission address table (D_MKCADR1): FIG. 33C)
FIG. 33C shows the above-mentioned backup return command transmission address table. The basic configuration of this backup return command transmission address table is the same as the command transmission address table at the time of setting change in FIG. 33A and the RAM clear command transmission address table in FIG. 33B described above. While explaining.

When the backup return command transmission address table is referred to in the transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR), as shown in FIG. 33C (A),
“Power failure return display command creation table (D_BA03)” in FIG. 33C (B),
“Special figure 1 hold count specification command creation table (D_B0C0M)” in FIG. 33C (C),
“Special figure 2 pending number specification command creation table (D_B1C0M)” in FIG. 33C (D),
The three types of command creation tables are selected in this order (the number of loops is three), and the command data defined in these command creation tables are sequentially transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in three loops. (See the transmission command table selection process of FIG. 11). That is, in the backup recovery processing route, first of all, three types of power failure recovery display commands (BA03H), special figure 1 pending number designation command (B0xxH), and special figure 2 pending number designation command (B1xxH) to the effect control unit 24 Commands are transmitted in this order (see the column of “backup restoration” in FIG. 36).

  Here, regarding the power failure return display command, as shown in FIG. 33C (B), since the addition value data is 0, BA03H of the reference command data is transmitted as the command data. However, with regard to the special figure 1 pending number specification command and the special figure 2 pending number specification command, as shown in FIG. 33C (C) (D), the addition value data is according to the values of 'W_T1GONUM' and 'W_T2GONUM' B001H and B101H of the reference command data change. This will be described in detail below.

  'W_T1GONUM' of the special figure 1 pending number specification command creation table of FIG. 33C (C) is the special figure 1 pending number data storage area of the in-area RAM, and the special figure 2 pending number specification command creation of FIG. 33C (D) 'W_T2GONUM' of the table is a special figure 2 operation pending ball number data storage area of the in-area RAM. Therefore, the values of 'W_T1GONUM' and 'W_T2GONUM' vary depending on the number of existing operation pending balls (0 to 4 (maximum number of pending storages)).

  For this reason, when the special figure 1 operation holding ball specification command creation table is referred to, any one of 00H to 04H corresponding to 0 to 4 special drawing 1 operation holding ball numbers at power-off (at the time of backup) When a value is acquired as addition value data and the special figure 2 operation holding ball specification command creation table is referred to, similarly, any of 00H to 04H corresponding to 0 to 4 special drawing 2 operation holding ball numbers This value is acquired as addition value data. Therefore, the special figure 1 reservation number designation command is any of B001H to B005H, and the special figure 2 reservation number specification command is any of B101H to B105H, and the command data after this addition is sent to the effect control unit 24. Will be sent. As a result, the number of operation holding balls at the time of power interruption is correctly notified to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 is based on the special figure 1 operation holding ball designation command and the special figure 2 operation holding ball designation command. The hold icon corresponding to the number of operation hold balls can be lit and displayed on the hold display sections a1 to d1 of the hold display area 76 and the hold display sections a2 to d2 of the hold display area 77 shown in FIG. 5. .

  Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives the power failure return display command (BA03H), the effect means is used to cause the “recovery completion effect” to appear to notify that the recovery is completed. For example, on the liquid crystal display device 36, an effect image such as "Return from blackout, please restart the game" is displayed for a predetermined time.

  Then, when the transmission command table selection process of step S952 is finished, next, a second command data creation process is executed (step S953).

(15. Second command data creation process: FIG. 15)
FIG. 15 shows a flowchart of the second command data creation process. In this second command data creation process, as shown in FIG. 15, first, spec specification command data (F611H) is acquired (step S961), and the acquired command data is transmitted by command transmission processing (_CMDOUT) to the effect control unit 24. (Step S962).

  Next, the return game state specification command data (FAxxH to FExxH) is acquired (step S963), and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) (step S964). The return game state specification command (FAxxH to FExxH) is, for example, a command to specify the game state number YJ at the time of backup, and in the case of the normal state (low probability, no power support), "FA01H", definite change state "FB01H" for high probability / power support, "FC01H" for short status (low probability / power support), and "FD01H" for low probability (high probability / power support) Will be sent. The effect control unit 20 grasps the game state based on the return game state designation command data, and causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display a background image of the effect mode corresponding to the game state, and also about the decorative symbol The display of the combination (for example, "315": decoration pattern for return) for display at the time of backup restoration is displayed (second power-on display mode). After the return of backup, the game operation is normally started. Therefore, according to the processing state after return of backup, the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 (for example, customer waiting command, hold addition command, fluctuation The effect control process according to the pattern designation command, the command related to the hit game, etc.) is executed. The above-mentioned second power-on display mode is the same display mode as the first power-on display mode when the RAM is cleared, and the display mode is the same until the first symbol variation display game after recovery from backup is started. You may maintain it. Then, if 180 seconds have elapsed without the start of the game, the customer waiting waiting effect may be executed.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 14, when the second command data creation process of step S953 is finished, it is then determined whether the special symbol (both of the special figures 1 and 2) is not changing (step S954).

  For determining whether or not non-fluctuating, the special symbol motion status of the special symbol motion status storage area (W_TJOBST) of the intra-area RAM is obtained, and the status specifying that the obtained status value is non-fluctuating It is determined whether it is a value. This "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol, and this status value is changed according to the processing state (the processing state of the variation display operation of the special symbol), and the special symbol operation status storage area It is stored in (W_TJOBST). In the special symbol operation status, specify that the behavior of the special symbol is in the waiting state for the next change ("standby (01H)"), and that the special symbol's behavior is in change (variation display) "During fluctuation (02H)", specifying that the fluctuation of special symbol is finished and stopped (confirmed) being displayed (during special symbol confirmation time) "during confirmation (03H)", special symbol is waiting And "wait for customer (00H)" for designating that it is in the non-pending storage state (see the special symbol management process of FIG. 17 described later, etc.). If the special symbol is not changing, the special symbol operation status is 01H in waiting or 00H in waiting for customers, but in this determination process, it is "00H" specified in waiting for customers It is determined whether or not.

  Returning to the description of the determination processing in step S954, if the special symbol is not changing, that is, if the special symbol operation status is "00H" specified for waiting for customers (step S954: YES), the waiting for command data for customers (step S954) BA04H) is acquired (step S955), and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) (step S956).

  As described above, at the time of backup restoration, first, BA03H (power failure return display command), B0xxH (first special hold number specification command: 'xx = 01H to 05H'), B1xxH (second The special reserve quantity specification command: 'xx = 01H to 05H'), F611H (spec command), FAxxH to FExxH (game state specification command upon return) are sequentially transmitted in this order, and the special symbol is not changing, BA04H (User waiting command) is additionally transmitted (see the column of “backup return” in FIG. 36).

  In addition, during waiting for customer waiting effect (including menu screen and power saving mode), during special symbol change, during definite display (during special symbol confirmation time), effect operation at the time of back-up when power failure occurs during hitting Is as follows.

(A) If the power is turned off while waiting for a customer (with a customer waiting command sent)
A background display / restoration symbol "315" corresponding to the effect mode (effect mode related to the game state number YJ) is displayed by displaying "Return from blackout please restart the game" for a predetermined time. Is displayed (second power-on display mode). From this display state, when 180 seconds pass without the start of the game, the customer waiting waiting effect is executed.
(B) If the power is turned off during special symbol change (without sending a customer waiting command)
While displaying "Please recover from the power failure, please restart the game", then, at the time of power failure triggered by the reception of the "movement stop command (BF01H)" which is sent at the end of the change of the special symbol A background display / decorative symbol "315" corresponding to the game state is displayed (the same applies to lost and hit).
(C) If the power is turned off while the special symbol is displayed (without sending a customer waiting command)
In the case of a hit after the finalized display, the message "Return from a power failure, please restart the game" is displayed, and then hit according to the command (big hit start command, small hit start command, etc.) sent during the hit. Perform the middle effect (opening effect etc.). In this case, since the decorative symbol information at the time of hitting is not transmitted at the time of backup restoration, it is not displayed.
If there is an operation holding ball in the case of a loss after the finalized display, display "Please return from the blackout please restart the game", and during the symbol variation display game pertaining to the operation holding ball, at the time of the power failure Background display / decorative symbol “315” corresponding to the game state of is displayed. In addition, it is a case of loss after a definite display, and when there is no operation | movement reservation ball | bowl, it is the same as the case of said (A).
(D) When a power failure occurs during the big hit start interval (during opening presentation period) (No command transmission while waiting for customers) "Displayed from power failure Please restart the game" is displayed and sent after the big hit start interval The effect corresponding to the command (for example, the round start command transmitted at the start of the 1R round) is executed.
(E) If a power failure occurs during a round game (no customer waiting command transmission)
Display "Return from blackout, please restart the game", and execute the effect according to the round start command sent at the start of the next round.
(F) If a power failure occurs during the big hit end interval (during the ending effecting period) (No command transmission while waiting for customers)
If there is an operation holding ball after the end of the big hit game, perform the effect based on the information included in the command sent at the start of the change (for example, change pattern specification command etc. (see special symbol change start process in Figure 22 below)) Do. If there is no operation holding ball after the end of the big hit game, it is the same as the case of (A) above.
(G) If a power failure occurs during a small hit game (no customer waiting command transmission)
During the small hit game, keep on displaying "You have recovered from the blackout, please restart the game". Further, during the small hit game, the game state remains the same as the game state at the time of winning, and the round game is not executed. For this reason, when there is an operation holding ball after the small hitting end interval, the effect under the effect mode according to the gaming state is started, and when there is no operation holding ball, it is the same as the case of (A) above. Become.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 14, when the command transmission process of step S956 is finished, the RAM recovery process at backup recovery is executed (step S957, SYSTEM_800 (SPn2 to SPn4)). On the other hand, when the special symbol is not in the non-varying state, that is, when the special symbol operating status is not "00H" specified in the customer waiting status (step S954: NO), the special symbol is in the midst of waiting for the next fluctuation start If there is, the command for clearing customer waiting is not transmitted, and the process of clearing the backup RAM is executed (step S957).

  In the backup recovery RAM clearing process, a specific area of the in-area RAM is cleared at the backup recovery time. In this embodiment, although not shown, the start address (address 0000H) of the in-area RAM is the setting value storage area (W_SETTEI), the address 0001H is the storage area of the backup flag BF (W_BACKFLG), and the address 0002H to The address (for example, the address 0021H) up to is the specific data storage area related to the error to be cleared when the backup is restored. For example, addresses 0002H to 0021H are assigned W_PWRCNT (power supply abnormality check counter shown in FIG. 18 described later) to W_SWFTMR 3 (pricing hole error detection timer 3). A storage area including a detection timer related to an error, an error notification timer, a discharge error flag related to a special winning opening discharge error, a discharge confirmation counter, and the like is defined.

  As shown in SPn2 to SPn4 of SYSTEM_800 in FIG. 31B, in the RAM recovery processing at the time of backup recovery, first, the address of W_BACKFLG (storage area of backup flag BF) is set in the HL register pair (SPn2), and then, Set the address + W_BACKFLG address + 1 'of' W_SWFTMR3 (winning opening error detection timer 3) to the B register as the number of times of processing in “zero set processing (_ZEROSET2)” (SPn3) and call zero set processing (_ZEROSET2) Execute (SPn4). As a result, the storage area of the backup flag BF to the specific storage area related to the error (here, W_SWFTM3) is cleared to zero.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the time of backup restoration, by initializing only a specific error-related work area, error information (such as radio wave error information) before power interruption is not carried over. As a result, the specific error can be resolved only by turning on the power again, that is, by executing the backup recovery process. However, if there is an abnormality in the set value data or the backup flag BF, the RAM error determination processing in steps S015 to S016 executes the power reactivation wait process (steps S017 to S020) described later, and repowers on again. The error can not be canceled unless the setting change operation is executed.

  As described above, when the backup restoration RAM clearing process is completed, the process state is shifted to the process of step S 033 of the merging point.

(E. Power supply reactivation wait processing route (RAM error mode: steps S017 to S020)
Next, with reference to FIG. 6A-FIG. 6B and FIG. 31A-FIG. In the source code shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the execution order of the process according to the RAM error processing route is indicated by thick arrows and numerals in the column "at the time of RAM abnormality". In the following, in order to avoid repeated description, the processing of steps S017 to S020 will be mainly described.

  As described above, in the case where it is determined that the RAM is abnormal in the determination processing of step S015, or the backup flag BF is a normal value in the determination processing of step S016, as described above. It is a case where it is determined that (5AH) is not.

  In the power reactivation wait processing route, first, the power reactivation command data (BA07H) is acquired in the DE register (step S017, SPi1), and the acquired command data is sent to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT). It transmits (step S018, SPi2). When the effect control unit 24 receives a power reapply command, it is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as a RAM error notification (power reapply instruction effect), "Please re-apply the power of the power supply and set the set value to 1." The effect image is displayed, the effect LED such as the decoration lamp 45 is completely turned off, and the speaker 46 is muted.

  Next, the backup flag BF (W_BACKFLG) is cleared to zero (step S019, SPi3), and the first power supply abnormality check process (_VDDCHK) of FIG. 8 is called and executed (step S020, SPi4).

  However, after the first power supply abnormality check process of FIG. 8 is executed, the first power supply abnormality check process is repeated indefinitely, and it is placed in a power supply reactivation wait state (see SPi5). That is, when an abnormality (RAM error) occurs in the storage contents of the RAM 203, the apparatus is placed in a power reopening wait state where the WDT clear processing (step S701) and the power supply abnormality confirmation processing (steps S702 to S703) are repeated indefinitely. It is eaten. Therefore, if a RAM error occurs at the time of power on, then the process relating to the game progress does not proceed, and the power is turned on again (in the case of this embodiment, the setting change management process of step S023 is executed) Game operation is stopped (game stop processing). If a RAM error occurs, WDT clear processing is executed until a power supply abnormality signal is confirmed, and WDT reset does not occur at the timing when the infinite loop processing is repeated. Therefore, if the setting value data and backup data remain damaged, the damaged data remains even if the power is turned on again, and the setting change processing route is not executed when the power is turned on. As long as the power is turned on again, the process for waiting for the power to be turned on (steps S017 to S020) is executed again as long as the power is turned on again. Therefore, once the RAM error occurs, the RAM error is not resolved even if the power is simply turned on again, and the setting change management process of step S 023 is executed, so long as the work area including the setting value storage area is not cleared. Is not resolved. Therefore, in step S017, the above-mentioned power supply reactivation command is transmitted, and the effect control unit 24 that has received the command returns "RAM error power supply again to the liquid crystal display device 36" as a RAM error notification (power supply reactivation instruction effect). Therefore, the hall clerk or the like is urged to eliminate the RAM error by displaying an effect image such as “set the setting value to 1”.

(∀: About prevention of fraud regarding setting value)
By the way, since the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are provided inside the gaming machine, when operating these switches, it is necessary to always open the front frame 2 (door). Therefore, when the setting change operation or the setting confirmation operation is 'normal operation', the door open signal (door open sensor 61) should always be in the ON state. In other words, the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94) or the RAM clear signal (RAM clear switch 98) is on even though the door open signal is off, that is, the front frame 2 (door) is closed. If it is in the state, it is considered to be 'incorrect operation (goto action)'. In particular, since the high and low of the set value is a game factor that greatly affects the profits of the pachinko hall and the player, it is necessary to closely monitor the items related to the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, at least the transition to the “setting change mode” related to the setting change is “transition destination processing route” in FIG. 30 on the condition that “the door is in the open state (door opening signal ON)”. Refer to the 'setting change' column in the column).

  In addition, the current setting value is, in principle, kept secret from the player, and if the setting value is known to the player, the profit of the pachinko hall may be seriously affected. There may be problems such as becoming an exchange of gaming machines among players. For example, if it is realized that the player has a low setting such as setting 1, the possibility of playing a game on the gaming machine becomes extremely small, which seriously affects the hall's reputation and the operating rate of the gaming machine. I will. In addition, if it is understood by the player that the setting is high, such as setting 6, etc., exchanges of gaming machines may occur among the players, which may lead to a major problem. Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only the transition to the “setting change mode” but also the transition to the “setting confirmation mode” are based on the condition that “the door is in the open state (door opening signal ON)” (see FIG. Refer to the “setting confirmation” column of the “transition destination processing route” column of 30)). That is, if the door (front frame 2) is closed (door open signal OFF), neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is transitioned, and accordingly, neither setting change nor setting confirmation can be made. There is. As a result, even with the door closed, using cheating equipment, even clever acts like secretly aiming for setting change and setting confirmation are nullified, and the effect of preventing cheating is enhanced.

  On the other hand, RAM clear and backup recovery are not related to setting change and the like, and it is considered that the degree of influence on the pachinko hall and the profit of the player is small. Therefore, the ON / OFF state of the door open signal is not a condition for transition to the RAM clear mode or the backup recovery mode. However, when the RAM clear is executed, the gaming state returns to the initial state (normal state), and the effect mode is initialized accordingly, and the history and setting related to the game are changed, etc. It can be said that it is an operation that can affect the game progress. Taking this point into consideration, the transition to the RAM clear mode may also be made the condition that “the door is in the open state (door open signal ON)”. In this case, the transition condition to the RAM clear mode is set only to “setting key switch signal OFF, door open signal ON, and RAM clear ON (W (x, y, z) = W (0, 1, 1))”. Only the transition to the backup recovery mode is an embodiment in which the ON / OFF state of the door open signal is not a condition.

  Further, in the present embodiment, three signals of 'setting key switch signal, door open signal, RAM clear signal' which are determination information related to the branch determination process in steps S014, S025, S026 are specified input ports (input port 1 (P_INPT1)) is configured to be input, and the states (ON / OFF states) of these signals are acquired collectively (see step S067 in FIG. 7 and SPa23 to SPa24 in FIG. 31A), and branch determination processing At the same time, it is determined (simultaneously) the state of these signals (uniformly) (see step S014 in FIG. 6A, SPb1 to SPb3 in FIG. 31A, step S026 in FIG. 6B, and SPk1 to SPk2 in FIG. 31B) It has been realized. Thus, the program capacity can be reduced, the branch determination processing can be simplified, and the control load can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the state of the door open signal is not set as the transition condition for the transition to the RAM clear processing route (the state of the signal of the door open signal is irrelevant), so two signals of the setting key switch signal and the RAM clear signal In the setting change branch determination process of step S 014, the state of the switch signal is other than W (1, 1, 1), that is, W (x, y, z) Of the eight combinations, the remaining seven combinations are known in advance (the determination result in step S 014 is NO), so that at least the ON / OFF state of the RAM clear signal regarding the possibility of the transition. (It is sufficient to determine only the value of the sixth bit of the W register). In addition, as for the transition to the backup recovery processing route, the state of the door open signal is not a transition condition (regardless of the state of the signal of the door open signal), the state of the two signals of the setting key switch signal and the RAM clear signal In step S014, the setting change branch determination process in step S014 and the RAM clear branch determination process in step S025 are performed in advance, and W (x,. It is only necessary to determine whether y, z) is W (1, 1, 0). Also according to these points, the determination process can be simplified and the control load can be reduced.

  In addition, after the power is turned on by using the RTC function, the power on / off operation, the setting confirmation operation, the setting change operation, and the RAM clear operation within business hours (for example, between 9 o'clock and 23 o'clock). If at least one event is detected, fraud detection means may be provided to detect this as fraud. In this case, output means for outputting a security signal relating to the fraud detection to the outside of the gaming machine and / or fraud notification means (for example, notification means for issuing a predetermined alarm sound or alarm light for a predetermined time) can be provided. . Thereby, the fraud prevention effect can be further improved. Note that it is not necessary to be able to detect all of the above-described power re-on operation, setting confirmation operation, setting change operation, and RAM clear operation, and one or more of these events can be detected. It is also good.

<36. Summary of effect control commands transmitted in each processing route: FIG. 36>
FIG. 36 shows types of effect control commands transmitted in each processing route of “change setting”, “clear RAM”, “confirm setting”, “return to backup” and “waiting for repowering on (RAM error)” and the transmission thereof It is an explanatory view showing an order.

  In FIG. 36, the command types colored in gray in the frame are shown as individual command types in each processing route, and the command types in white in the frame are command types that can be transmitted in common. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, “setting change in progress command (BA5AH) and setting completion command (BA09H)” of the setting change processing route, “RAM clear command (BA02H)” of the RAM clear processing route, setting confirmation processing The route "confirm setting in progress command (E021H) and setting confirmation end command (E022H)", and the "power on wait for power on wait command (BA07H)" in the power on wait process route are the command types to be transmitted independently for that process route. ing.

  In addition, “power failure return display command (BA03H), hold number specification command (B0xxH, B1xxH), and return on game state specification command (FAxxH to FExxH)” are commonly transmitted in the setting confirmation processing route and backup restoration processing route. “Spec specification command (F611H) and customer waiting command (BA04H)” are command types commonly transmitted on processing routes other than the repower on wait processing route. . However, with respect to the setting confirmation processing route and the customer waiting command (BA04H) related to the backup recovery processing route, it is transmitted only during non-fluctuation.

  As described above, after the processing according to the combination of the setting key switch 94, the RAM clear switch 98, and the ON / OFF state of the door open sensor 61 is finished, the process proceeds to the process of step S033.

  Referring to FIG. 6B, in step S033, the contents of all the registers are saved, and the operation confirmation timer setting process of the out-of-area program (FIG. 16) is executed to restore the contents of all the saved registers. (Steps S033 to S035). The processes of steps S033 to S035 work as an initial setting process at power on of the performance indicator 99.

(16. Operation confirmation timer setting process: FIG. 16)
The process of the operation check timer setting process (step S034) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the operation confirmation timer setting process.

  In this operation confirmation timer setting process, necessary initialization for executing the confirmation operation of whether or not the performance indicator 99 is operating normally is performed.

  In the confirmation operation according to the present embodiment, the “all blink display (operation) is performed by periodically repeating the display mode of the four 7-segment indicators 99a to 99d for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) for all lights and all lights off. Control to "confirmation display)" mode. This makes it possible to check for defects such as missing segments. The operation confirmation display process is performed in the performance display monitor process during the main control timer interrupt process described later (see step S102 in FIG. 17 and step S833 in FIG. 25 described later).

  In FIG. 16, the CPU 201 first saves the stack pointer (step S881), and then sets an initial value (for example, 5000 ms) in the operation check timer that counts the operation check time of the performance indicator 99 (step S882) The flash timer for counting the flash cycle of the performance indicator 99 is cleared to zero (flash timer 0 0) (step S883). Then, the stack pointer is restored (step S 884), and the operation confirmation timer setting process is exited. In addition, the work area | region of the data which concerns on display control of the performance indicator 99, such as said operation confirmation timer and the timer for blinks, is defined by RAM out of area | region.

  In the present embodiment, after the merging point, the operation confirmation timer setting process by the out-of-area program is called and executed. However, temporarily, for example, in the setting change processing route or in the setting confirmation processing route. If it is executed, the processing relating to the in-region pro rag and the processing relating to the out-of-region pro rag are mixed and the processing becomes complicated. Further, when executing a program, it is necessary to jump between the in-region prologue and the out-of-region prologue, etc., and there is a possibility that the JR instruction having a smaller amount of data than the CALL instruction can not be used effectively. In addition, when the operation confirmation timer setting process is executed after the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) is started, the operation confirmation display does not function well because the performance display monitor process (step S102) described later is executed. Is also possible. In consideration of such circumstances, it is preferable to execute the operation confirmation timer setting process at least after the merging point, specifically, before the timer interrupt process is activated from the merging point (before the step S036 It is preferred to carry out in processing of 2.). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6B, after completion of each processing route such as the setting change processing route, operation confirmation timer setting processing is performed before execution of step S036 related to activation of timer interrupt processing. .

  When the process related to the operation check in steps S033 to S035 is finished, next, a CTC setting process for periodically generating a timer interrupt is executed every 4 ms (step S036). Thereafter, an interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller is periodically output, and the main control timer interrupt process (4 ms interrupt process) shown in FIG. 17 is executed.

  Next, assuming that the game start enable state is set, the launch control signal (launch permission signal ES) for permitting the launch operation of the launch device 32 is set from the OFF state (launch prohibited state) to the ON state (launch allowed state) (step S037). Thus, the emission control signal is output to the payout control board 29. When receiving the emission control signal, the ejection control substrate 29 determines that the emission is permitted, and outputs the emission permission signal ES to the emission control substrate 28 to allow the emission operation by the emission device 32 (from the emission operation inhibition state) Transition to the firing operation permission state). Thereafter, the launch operation handle 15 can launch the game ball. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, before the CTC setting process (step S036) is performed, the emission control signal is controlled to be in the OFF state (see step S054 in FIG. 7). Therefore, the firing operation is prohibited until at least the setting change, the setting confirmation, the in-area RAM clear, and the backup recovery processing route are finished. As a result, it is possible to prevent an inadvertent firing operation from being executed during setting change or setting confirmation.

  In the present embodiment, the delivery control board 29 receives the firing control signal from the main control unit 20, and allows the firing control board 28 to perform the firing operation. In other words, the main control unit 20 receives the delivery control signal through the delivery control board 29. It is configured to control the emission control board 28 indirectly. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the emission control signal may be directly output to the emission control board 28 to allow the emission operation.

  Next, the game start command data (BA 77H) is acquired, and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) already described (steps S038, S039). When the effect control unit 24 receives a game start command, it executes an initial operation (initialization operation) on movable object such as the watch-shaped character 80 and the flower-shaped character 90. However, during the initialization operation, the image display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36, the light emission mode of the decoration lamp 45, and the sound output from the speaker 46 do not change. The initialization operation is exclusively responsible for the operation check at the time of power on of the movable object. When the initialization operation is performed under the possibility that the opening and closing operation of the front frame 2 (door) may be performed, the impact at the opening and closing operation of the door is transmitted to the movable object and the initialization operation is performed. There is a risk that can not be executed properly. Therefore, it is preferable to set the door closed (door open signal OFF state) as a condition for executing the initialization operation. However, simply by setting the door closed as a condition, the initialization operation is executed even when the door is temporarily opened or closed during setting confirmation or setting change, etc. Therefore, the impact is caused by the opening / closing operation of the door. The problem that the operation can not be performed normally remains completely unsolvable. Therefore, when the door is closed, the main control unit 20 can transmit the game start command and a command to notify the door closed (may be a dedicated command or a door open error cancel command). Preferably, when the effect control unit 24 receives at least these two types of commands, execution control of the initialization operation is performed.

  Then, when a series of power-on processes (steps S011 to S039: pre-game start process) are finished, the infinite loop process of steps S040 to S045 of the game process related to the normal game progress is executed. As a result, after that, the game can be controlled to a state in which the progress of the game is possible (a game startable state).

(Game processing related to normal game progression: loop processing of S040 to S045)
When the process of step S039 is finished, the loop process of steps S040 to S045 is performed. Here, first, in a state where the CPU is set in the interrupt disabled state (step S040), various random number update processing is executed (step S041). In the various random number update processing, various software random numbers (random numbers circulating in a predetermined numerical range by increment processing) are updated for the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game. For example, random numbers for special symbol judgment used for symbol lottery, random numbers for assistance per lottery (random number for assistance judgment used for winning lottery for assistance, random number for assistance determination used for symbol lottery for assistance) Random number (random number for special symbol judgment initial value random number, auxiliary hit judgment initial value random number, etc.) used for changing initial value (start value) of random number, random number for fluctuation pattern used for selection of fluctuation pattern, etc. Update.

  After completion of the various random number update processing (step S041), next, all registers are saved in the stack area (step S042), and performance display monitor aggregation division processing of the out-of-area program is executed (step S043). The processing is returned (step S044).

  The performance display monitor tabulation division process of step S040 executes a process of calculating a base value to be displayed on the performance indicator 99, and the program and storage area of the process relating to performance display are the CPU 201 as described above. The "memory outside the area (second memory area)" different from the "memory in the area (first memory area)" to be accessed during normal game progression is defined. Therefore, the CPU 201 first sets the contents of the stack pointer SP inside the area in the SP save buffer of the out-of-area RAM, and performs setting of the stack pointer SP in the out-of-area RAM (set value = 01FFh).

  Next, after executing the out-of-area RAM check process (see step S824 in FIG. 25 described later), the sensor (upper start) related to each winning opening obtained in the performance display monitor process (see step S102 in FIG. Based on the input data of mouth sensor 34a, lower start mouth sensor 35a, big winning hole sensor 52a, general winning hole sensor 43a, OUT monitoring switch 49a), presence or absence of winning in each winning hole, presence or absence of game ball discharge, etc. To check. Then, count processing (ball number addition processing) necessary for calculation is performed on the base value.

  In the ball count addition process, the process differs depending on whether the current gaming state is the normal state or not. Specifically, when the current gaming state is the normal state, when a winning is confirmed in any winning opening, the number of winning balls in the winning opening having a winning is added to the number of normal payouts ( The normal count value is updated by adding 1 to the number of normal outs and the number of all outs (out ball number addition processing), and updating the current count value. However, when the winning is not confirmed and the input to the OUT monitoring switch 49a is confirmed, 1 is added to only the normal out number and the total state out number, and these count values are updated (out state ball during normal state) Number addition process). Although details will be described later, whether or not the current gaming state is the normal state is determined depending on whether the 'normal state determination flag (R_TUJFG)' of the out-of-area RAM is the ON state (5AH) (see FIG. Steps S827 to S829 in the performance display monitor process of 25).

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not the normal state (if it is any of the probability change state, the time saving state, and the latent state), even if it is confirmed that a winning is made to any winning opening, Without adding the number of winning balls, only the total number of outs is incremented by +1, and when the winning is not confirmed and the input to the OUT monitoring switch 49a is confirmed, the total number of outs is also incremented by one ((1) Unusual state during out ball number addition processing).

  Then, a base value is calculated based on the updated normal dispensing number and the normal out number, that is, the latest normal dispensing number and the normal out number, and the value is stored in the measurement information storage area of the out-of-area RAM. Store.

  It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the current gaming state is the normal state may be made by checking ON / OFF states of various flags related to the gaming state in the area RAM. Specifically, "condition device operation flag (W_JKFLG)" which specifies the presence or absence of operation of the condition device, "special symbol time short status flag (W_TJTFLG)" which specifies whether or not the special symbol time short state, and high probability Check the ON (5AH) / OFF (00H) of "special symbol probability variation status flag (W_THIFLGDS)" to specify whether or not it is the status (big hit high probability status), and according to the combination of these flag values, You may judge the game state of. For example, when the condition device operation flag is OFF, if both the special symbol time short state flag and the special symbol probability change state flag are ON, the positive change state, the special symbol time short state flag is ON, and the special symbol positive change state flag is If OFF, the special symbol time short status flag is OFF, and if the special symbol probability variation status flag is ON, the latent status, if the special symbol status short status flag and the special symbol probability variation status flag are both OFF, it is normal. When the condition device operation flag is ON, it can be determined that the jackpot is in progress. Also, the gaming state number YJ managed by the in-area RAM may be directly obtained, and the current gaming state may be determined by the value of YJ.

  "Big wins in the game" is basically the same "low probability · no power support" as the normal state, but since it is a gaming state separate from the normal state, it is a big prize when measuring the base value The number of winning balls in the mouth 50 is excluded from the counting targets (the detection information of the large winning opening sensor 52a is not the measuring target). On the other hand, during the small hit game, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning, it may be included in the count target. This will be described in detail.

  When the small hit is won, the transition control of the internal game state caused by the win is not executed, and the small hit game is continued with the gaming state at the time of the winning. That is, when the small hit is won in the normal state, the normal state is continued even during the small hit game. In consideration of this point, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state in the small hit game is the normal state, the detection information of the large winning opening sensor 52a is not excluded from the measurement targets, and the number of winning balls is based. Count as the target of counting the value. Note that whether the player is in the big hit game or the small hit game may be determined by the presence or absence of the operation of the condition device. Specifically, the ON / OFF state of the condition device operation flag (W_JKFLG) is checked, and when the condition device operation flag is ON, it is determined that a big hit is in progress, and the detection information of the big winning opening sensor 52a Can be excluded from the counting targets of the base value.

  Also, from the time of initial power-on or all clear of out-of-area RAM, until the number of all-states out reaches a predetermined number (for example, 299), only the number of all-states out is counted as a test section and the base value etc. Does not measure. This is to consider performing an operation test when a gaming machine is first installed in a pachinko hall. For example, the game ball may be maintained on the starting opening to check the operation or to make a trial hit, and it is necessary to exclude the winning balls and the out balls from such operation tests from the measurement targets. Therefore, the first (first) measurement starts after the end of the test section.

  Also, if the total number of out-of-states reaches a specified number (60000 in this case) after the first (first) measurement has been started, the base value (first base value) at this point is displayed as the performance of the RAM 203 The data is stored in the storage area, and the current normal payout number, the normal out number, and the total out number are all cleared to zero (measurement data initialization processing) for the second measurement. That is, every time the specified number of 60000 is counted, the current base value is stored, and for the measurement of the next base value, the number of normal payouts under measurement, the number of normal outs, and the total number of outs are calculated. Clear to zero.

  The calculation of the base value is not completed in one loop process (steps S040 to S045), and the base value can be obtained by executing a plurality of loops. That is, when the base value calculation program is all executed in one loop process, the time taken for the one main loop becomes long, and the loop period is delayed indefinitely. In loop processing, random number update processing (step S041) for updating various random number values is also executed, so it is important to avoid the delay of the period period as much as possible in order to prevent goto acts such as shooting. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing is divided and performed a plurality of times so as to reduce the processing related to calculation of the base value and the display related to one execution of the loop processing. For example, in the first loop processing, the ball number addition processing and processing such as storing (updating) the results are performed, and in the second loop processing, processing necessary for calculating and displaying the real-time base value is performed, and the third processing In the loop processing of the above, processing required to display the history base value when the specified number of 60000 is reached is performed. If processing is not performed on the calculation and display of the base value in a single loop process, what process should be divided and executed at what timing (for example, in what loop process)? It can be determined appropriately. In the case of divided execution, for example, when the processing related to the base value is completed in a total of three loops, as in the first loop processing → second → final cycle, what processing is performed in the next loop processing The parameter (counter) must be memorized. The parameters for that may be re-executed from the number of times of power-off when the power is turned on, but may be initially set to be executed from the first (first) process when the power is turned on.

(Specific example of display mode of performance indicator 99)
A specific example of the display mode of the performance indicator 99 will be described. For example, in the case where the current base value is '35' when the number of all-states out reaches 60000, 4-digit character information (identification display unit (identification segment + “BL. 00” is displayed as the base display section (ratio segment) (the base value is 0 here because it is zero cleared by the measurement data initialization process described above), and “h” is displayed when the history base value is displayed. b6.35 "will be lit and displayed.

(During the test section)
In the above test section, when the real time base value is displayed to notify that the current measurement is a test section, “bL.” Is displayed on the identification display unit in a blinking manner, and the base display unit --- "is displayed. When the history base value is displayed, "b6." Is displayed on the identification display unit in a blinking manner, and "-" is displayed on the base display unit.

(First measurement: N = 1)
In addition, since the history base value is not saved at the time of the first measurement, “bL. **” ('**' is the base value currently being measured) is displayed when displaying the real-time base value. When the history base value is displayed, "b6.--" Is displayed. However, the identification display unit "b6." Is displayed in a blinking manner to notify that it is the first measurement.

(When measuring from next time on: N 2 2)
In addition, for the next and subsequent measurements (N 2 2), it is a measurement section with a variation in real-time base value until the number of all outs reaches a predetermined number (for example, 6000) after zero clear for the next measurement. In the case of displaying the real-time base value, “bL.” Is displayed on the identification display unit in a blinking manner, and the real-time base value is displayed on the base display unit as it is. When the history base value is displayed, "b6. **"('**' is the previous base value) is displayed. However, in the case of the first time (N = 1), since the history base value is not stored, when displaying the history base value, “b6 .--” is displayed, but “b6.” Of the identification display unit Is designed to blink.

  Then, after finishing the above-mentioned performance display monitor aggregation division processing and restoring all the registers (step S044), the interrupt enabled state is set (step S045), and the processing returns to step S040, and thereafter steps S040 to S045. Repeat the process of (main loop process). The CPU 201 is configured to repeatedly execute various random number update processing and performance display monitor total division processing except while performing timer interrupt processing that is intermittently executed.

<17. Main control timer interrupt processing: Figure 17>
Next, timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the main control side timer interrupt process. The main control side timer interrupt process is started by an interrupt from CTC at predetermined time intervals (about 4 ms), and is executed while executing the main control side main process.

  In FIG. 17, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 immediately executes the second power supply abnormality check process without saving the contents of the register (step S081). In this power supply abnormality check processing, as shown in FIG. 18, the power supply level supplied from the power supply substrate is monitored, and backup processing is performed when a power supply abnormality such as a power failure occurs. Therefore, the second power supply abnormality check process works as a backup unit that holds the storage content of the RAM (here, the in-area RAM) even after the power is shut off. The details of the second power supply abnormality check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, timer management processing is executed (step S082). The timer values of various timers (for example, the above-mentioned error notification timer, a special symbol combination product operation timer described later, etc.) used for the game operation control of the game machine 1 are updated here.

  Next, an input management process is executed (step S083). For detection information of various sensors and switches provided in the gaming machine 1 and input information of the state signal from the payout control board 29 (information on ON / OFF signal, information on rising state (ON edge, OFF edge, etc.)) Based on the input data creation and the winning counter updated.

  Next, setting abnormality check processing is executed (step S084). In the setting abnormality check process, it is determined whether the set value data (W_SETTEI) is normal, and an error process related to the set value is executed based on the determination result. The details of the setting abnormality check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, a timer interrupt random number management process is executed (step S085). In the timer interruption internal random number management process, the random numbers related to each variable display game are periodically updated. Specifically, in order to randomize the count value of the random number counter, the random number is updated (+1 is added for each interrupt) and the random number counter makes one round with respect to the special symbol determination random number, the auxiliary hit determination random number, etc. Every time, the process of changing the start value of the random number counter is executed. Note that the internal lottery random number (big hit determination random number) is generated by the above random number generation circuit, and is not updated here.

  Next, an error management process is performed (step S089). In this error management process, whether or not an error (abnormality) has occurred in the game operation is monitored based on detection information concerning various switches and sensors, a status signal from the payout control board 29, etc., and an error occurs. In this case, an error command (a command including error type information) or an error release command (sent when an error is canceled) according to the error type is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 or, if necessary, Execute forced stop processing of the game operation and the like.

  Subsequently, a winning ball management process is executed (step S090). In this prize ball management process, the above-mentioned prize counter is confirmed, and when there is a prize, a payout control command specifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29. When receiving the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the gaming ball payout device 19 based on the winning ball number information included in the payout control command, and executes the payout operation for the designated number of winning balls.

  Then, normal symbol management processing is executed (step S091). In this normal symbol management processing, processing necessary for the normal symbol variation display game (variation display operation of normal symbols) is executed. Here, it is monitored whether or not the game ball is detected by the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, and when the game ball is detected, predetermined game information (such as a random number for auxiliary collision determination) necessary for the lottery for the auxiliary collision Acquire (general-purpose drawing random number acquisition processing) and hold and store the game information as the holding data (general-purpose drawing operation holding ball) up to the maximum number of holding memories (here four) (general-purpose drawing storage processing). Then, when the predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, a lottery per assistance based on the common drawing operation reserve ball is performed, selection of the variation pattern of the normal symbol based on the lottery result per support and the stop display mode of the ordinary symbol (normal stop Determine the symbol). In addition, here, in order to make the normal symbol fluctuate and operate, data for LED display for fluctuation display is created if it is during fluctuation, and if it is not fluctuation, data for LED display for stop display is created (usually Symbol display data update process).

  Subsequently, a normal electric role management process is executed (step S092). In the ordinary electric role management process, a process necessary for executing the public use release game is executed. Here, in the case where the lottery result of the lottery per lottery is a hit, setting processing of data for solenoid control to the normal motorized combination solenoid 41c is executed. Based on the solenoid control data set here, an excitation signal is output to the normal electric combination product solenoid 41c in a solenoid management process of step S100 described later, whereby the open / close operation pattern of the movable wing piece 47 is It is controlled.

  Next, special symbol management processing is executed (step S093). In this special symbol management processing, processing necessary for the special symbol variation display game (variation display operation of special symbols) is mainly executed. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a special electric role management process is executed (step S095). In this special electric role management process, a process necessary to control execution of the hit game is executed. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a right-handed notification information management process is executed (step S097). In the right-handed notification information management process, the right-handed display device 39b is turned on when it is under the "right-handed advantageous" gaming state (in the present embodiment, in the hit game, time saving state, positive changing state). The LED data of is generated, and in the case of the “left hit advantageous” gaming state (normal state), the LED data for turning off the right hit display device 39 b is generated.

  Then, the LED management process is executed (step S098). In this LED management processing, output control of control signals (dynamic lighting data) to the LED display devices such as the normal symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the composite display device 38c, and the right turn display device 39b is executed. The control signal based on the LED display data created by the above-mentioned normal symbol management process (step S091), special symbol management process (step S093), right-handed notification information management process (step S097), etc. It is output.

  Then, external terminal management processing is executed (step S099). In this external terminal management process, various external end signals are created through the frame external terminal board 21 and output control is performed on external devices such as the data counter DT and the hall computer HC.

  Next, a solenoid management process is performed (step S100). In this solenoid management process, based on the solenoid control data set in the ordinary electric symbol management process (step S092) or the special electric symbol management process (step S094), the ordinary electric symbol solenoid 41c or the special winning opening solenoid 52c is used. Control of excitation signal output is performed. Thereby, the opening and closing operation of the movable wing piece 47 and the special winning opening 50 is realized.

  Next, in order to execute the performance display monitoring process of the out-of-area program, all the registers are saved, and after the performance display monitoring process is performed, all the registers are restored (steps S101 to S103). In the performance display monitor process, necessary processing is performed for display control of the performance indicator 99. The details of the performance display monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the WDT count value is cleared (step S104). As a result, the WDT is reset and the count value is returned to the initial value.

  After the processing of the above steps S081 to S104 is completed, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S104). As a result, the timer interrupt process is ended, the process returns to the main control side main process before the interrupt, and the main control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<18. Second power supply abnormality check process: Fig. 18>
Next, the second power source abnormality check process (step S081) in FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the second power source abnormality check process.

  In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first acquires input information of a power supply abnormality signal indicating power failure from the external signal input register (PINSTS) (step S711). Then, it is determined whether or not the levels of the power supply abnormality signal coincide twice in a row (step S712), and the processes of steps S711 to S712 are repeated until the levels coincide. If the levels of the power supply abnormality signal match (step S 712: YES), it is determined whether the power supply abnormality signal is at an abnormal level (step S 713).

  If the power supply abnormality signal is not at the abnormal level (step S713: NO), the backup flag BF is cleared (step S723), and the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is cleared (step S724), and the second power supply abnormality check process is exited.

  On the other hand, if the power supply abnormality signal is at the abnormal level (step S713: YES), 1 is added to the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter (step S714), and the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter after addition reaches the upper limit value Y? It is determined whether or not it is (step S715). This takes into consideration that the acquired data from the external signal input register (PINSTS) may be bitized due to the influence of noise etc., and the acquired data keeps the abnormal level continuously. When the upper limit value Y (for example, Y = 2) is reached, it is determined that the AC power supply is currently cut off.

  If the value of the power supply abnormality check counter has reached the upper limit value Y (step S 715: YES), backup processing is executed on the assumption that a power supply abnormality has occurred. Specifically, the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is cleared (step S716), the firing control signal is set to the OFF state (step S717), and the backup flag BF is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S718). The backup flag BF may be set to the ON state, and a checksum calculation may be performed to calculate a checksum value, and the calculation result may be stored in a predetermined area (SUM storage area) of the RAM 203. Here, the checksum operation is an 8-bit addition operation that targets the work area of the RAM 203. The checksum value stored in the SUM storage area at power-off, along with other data in RAM 203, is maintained by the backup power supply. In the case of storing the checksum at the time of backup, “checksum determination processing” is performed instead of part of the RAM error determination processing (see steps S 015 to S 0 16 in FIG. 6A) or steps S 015 to S 0 16. "Can be provided. In this case, in the checksum determination processing, the checksum at power restoration is calculated, and the calculated checksum value is compared with the checksum value stored in the SUM storage area at the time of power failure, and the comparison result does not match In this case, the process of waiting for the power to be turned on again (RAM error process) in steps S017 to S020 may be executed, and when the comparison results coincide, the process may be advanced.

  If a power failure occurs during the setting change management (step S023 in FIG. 6A) described above, the main control timer interrupt process is before activation (before execution of step S036 in FIG. 6B). 2 Power supply error check processing is not performed and backup processing can not be performed. In this case, if a power failure occurs after the backup flag BF is cleared to zero in step S901 during setting change management, it is determined that a RAM error has occurred when the power is restored next time (determination in step S016 of FIG. 6A). The result is NO (BF ≠ 5AH), and the process proceeds to the power-on wait processing route (steps S017 to S020 in FIG. 6A), and is controlled to be in the power-on wait state.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 18, when the process of step S 718 is finished, next, the power-off command data (BA 33 H) is acquired, and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) Step S719). The power-off command (BA 33 H) is an effect control command that designates that a power supply abnormality has occurred. The power-off command is composed of a power-off A command and a power-off B command each having a length of 16 bits, and is transmitted continuously in this order every eight bits. Adopting such a configuration is to prevent the power interruption status from being erroneously notified to other control units due to the influence of noise or the like.

  Next, 01H is set in the RAM protect register (RAMPT), and "RAM access prohibited area invalidated, RAM protected valid", data writing to the RAM is prohibited in the subsequent processing (step S720). Then, the output data of all the output ports are cleared (step S721). This prevents reading of the illegal address of the RAM and the like due to the voltage drop and rewriting the RAM abnormally, and a payout control that starts the same type of power supply abnormality check processing later than the main control unit 20. Unreasonable data transmission to the substrate 29 can be prevented.

  Then, the generation process of the interrupt signal is prohibited by the setting process for CTC, and the CPU is set to interrupt prohibition (step S 722), and the power supply voltage drops while repeating the infinite loop process to cause the CPU to be inoperative. wait.

<19. Setting error check process: Figure 19>
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the setting abnormality check process (step S084) in FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing setting abnormality check processing.

  In FIG. 19, the CPU 201 first determines whether the setting error flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), that is, a RAM error (setting error error) (step S731). If the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S731: = 5 AH), the setting abnormality check process is exited without doing anything. On the other hand, when the setting error flag is not ON (step S732: 732 5AH), the setting value Nc is acquired from the setting value storage area (W_SETTEI) of the in-area RAM, and the value corresponds to the normal value (setting values 1 to 6). It is determined whether or not any one of 00H to 05H) (step S732). This determination process is a process common to the contents of the determination process of steps S903 and S913 in the setting change management process of FIG.

  If the acquired setting value Nc is not any of 00H to 05H (step S732: NO), the setting error flag is set to the ON state (5AH) on the assumption that an abnormality has occurred in the setting value data (step S733). Then, the setting value abnormality command data (0E33H) is acquired (step S734), and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission processing (_CMDOUT) (step S735), and the setting abnormality check processing is exited. . When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting value abnormality command, a setting abnormality error notification (RAM error notification) is executed using the effect means. For example, the decoration lamp 45 is fully lit in red, and the liquid crystal display device 36 displays a message such as "RAM error, please call a staff member".

<20. Special symbol management process: Figure 20>
Next, the special symbol management process (step S093) in FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol management process.

  In FIG. 20, the CPU 201 first performs "special figure 1 start opening check processing" on the special symbol 1 side (upper start opening 34 side) (step S301), and then, the special symbol 2 side (lower start opening 35 side) The "special figure 2 starting opening check processing" concerning is executed (step S302). The details of the special figure 1 starting opening check process and the special figure 2 starting opening check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the starting opening check process in steps S301 to S302 is completed, the state of the small hit middle flag is determined (step S303). The "small hit flag" is a flag for designating whether or not the small hit game is in progress, and indicates that the small hit game is in progress when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH). If the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the small hit game is not in progress.

  If the small hit middle flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S303: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operating flag is determined (step S304). The "condition device operation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not the big hit game is in progress, and indicates that the big hit game is in progress when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), If the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the jackpot is not in progress.

  If the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S304: ≠ 5AH), that is, if it is not even in the small hit game or the big hit game (step S303: ≠ 5AH, and step S304: ≠ 5AH), special In accordance with the symbol operation status (00H to 03H), processing relating to the variation display operation of the special symbol is executed (step S305: special symbol operation status branch processing). On the other hand, in the small hit game (step S303: = 5 AH) or in the big hit game (step S304: = 5 AH), without processing the variation display operation of the special symbol of steps S306 to S308, as it is The process proceeds to the special symbol display data update process of step S309. Therefore, the variation display operation of the special symbol is not performed in the small hit game or the big hit game. In other words, during the hit game, the stop display mode of the special symbol is held in the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol while being displayed.

  In the special symbol operation status branch process of step S305, the special symbol operation status is either “waiting (00H, 01H)”, “changing (02H)” or “confirming (03H)” status value Then, the processing of steps S306 to S308 corresponding to each is executed. By these processes, the variable display operation of setting the start of fluctuation and the stop of fluctuation of the special symbol is realized. The details of the special symbol variation start process (step S306) and the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) which are closely related to the present invention will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23A to 23B, respectively.

  When one of the processes in steps S306 to S308 is finished, a special symbol display data update process in step S309 described later is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in change, and if it is in change, the data of the special symbol which repeatedly blinks every predetermined time (the data of 7 segment blinking display during change) If the special symbol is not in motion, data for stop display (data for 7-segment blinking display during stop display) is created. The display data of the special symbol created here is output in the LED management process (step S098) of FIG. 17, and the variable symbol display and the stop display of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. When the special symbol display data update process is finished, the special symbol management process is exited, and the special electric symbol management process of step S095 of FIG. 17 is executed.

(21. Special figure 1 starting opening check processing: Figure 21)
The special view 1 start opening check process (step S301 in FIG. 20) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the details of the special view 1 start opening check process. This special view 1 starting opening check processing plays a role as a winning processing when executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and mainly relates to the processing regarding holding storage when the game ball has won in the upper starting opening 34 Or, it is mainly constructed of processing relating to pre-reading advance notice effect (pending addition command). The special figure 1 start opening check process and the special figure 2 start opening check process are different only in whether the processing contents relate to the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side, Substantially the same processing content. Therefore, in order to avoid redundant description, the description will focus on the special view 1 start opening check process.

  In FIG. 21, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (a winning ball) has been detected at the upper starting opening 34 (step S311).

  If the winning of the upper starting opening 34 (special drawing 1 starting opening) is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the special drawing 1 operation holding ball number is four or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether the special figure 1 operation pending ball number is less than the maximum pending storage number (here four). In addition, when there is no winning detection of the upper starting opening 34 (step S311: NO), nothing is done and the special figure 1 starting opening check processing is exited.

  If the special figure 1 operation pending ball number is 4 or more, that is, if the over winning that exceeds the maximum pending storage number occurs (step S312: YES), the over winning command (in the case of special figure 1) to specify the over winning B006H, and in the case of the special view 2, B106H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S324). On the other hand, when the special figure 1 actuation ball number is not 4 or more, that is, less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added to the special figure 1 actuation ball number (+1) (step S313), step S314 Go to the process of

  If it progresses to the process of step S314, the various random numbers utilized for the special symbol variation display game 1 which concerns on the special figure 1 operation | movement pending ball which generate | occur | produced this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the variation pattern random number are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random value is stored in the pending storage area of the in-area RAM. This reserve storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information relating to the symbol variation display game as an operation reserve ball (hold data), and in this reserve storage area, the above-mentioned various random number values as reserve data are special symbols Until the variable display operation of 1 is performed (until the special symbol fluctuation display game 1 is executed), it is reserved and stored in the order of establishment of the start conditions (prize order). In the reserve storage area, a reserve storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (a special figure 1 reserve storage area (first reserve storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1) and a special symbol 2 And a second special storage area (second storage area)). In these reserve storage areas, reserve 1 storage area to reserve n storage area (n is the maximum number of operation reserve balls: n = 4 in this embodiment) are provided, and each set of reserve data for the maximum number of operation reserve balls Can be stored (pending storage order is to be stored in the order of pending 1 storage area, pending 2 storage area,..., Pending n-1 storage area, pending n storage area).

  Note that among the above-mentioned various random numbers, the special symbol determination random number and the variation pattern random number are extracted from a random number counter that generates random numbers by software corresponding to each. Since the random number values of these random number counters are updated in a random manner in the count value storage area corresponding to each of the in-area RAMs, in the interrupt processing that occurs intermittently and the main processing that is executed during the interrupt processing, The value is to be obtained as it is. On the other hand, the big hit determination random number value is extracted from a random number generation circuit (a big hit determination random number counter for counting the big hit determination random number value: not shown) that generates a random number in hardware. The random number generation circuit latches the count value at this timing when the detection signal of the gaming ball is input from the upper start opening sensor 34a or the lower start opening sensor 35a, and the count value is input to the microcomputer It has become. This count value is stored as a big hit determination random number value in a storage area for a big hit determination random value (random number latch buffer for special motorized product activation determination) in the area RAM provided separately from the pending storage area, The CPU 201 reads out and uses the jackpot determination random number value stored in the special electric power product operation determination random number latch buffer at a necessary timing.

  Next, pre-reading prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") which prohibits pre-reading judgment as winning command data (data corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the holding addition command) for creating a holding addition command (details will be described later). Is acquired (step S315), and it is determined whether the "special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition" is satisfied (step S316). The above-mentioned “special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition” is a condition for prohibiting the pre-reading judgment for the special figure 1 operation holding ball (prohibiting pre-reading notice). In this embodiment, the special figure 2 action reserve ball can be generated with a higher probability than the special figure 1 action reserve ball. On the other hand, the special figure 1 action holding ball can occur with higher probability than the special figure 2 action holding ball. Special figure 2 pre-reading is prohibited. In the determination process of step S316, when the current game state is a game state involving a power support state, the special view 1 prefetch prohibition condition is established and the determination result is 'YES'.

  If the special view 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the process (steps S317 to S321) related to pre-reading determination is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S322 described later. In this case, the pre-reading determination for the special view 1 action holding ball this time is not executed, and a holding addition command having pre-reading prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created (see step S322 described later). ). As a result, the execution of the pre-read advance notice effect is prohibited (the pre-read advance notice effect for the current operation reserving ball is not executed).

  If the special view 1 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), it is then determined whether the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S317). If the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S 317: 5 AH), that is, if a RAM error (setting error) has occurred, the process (steps S 317 to S 321) related to prefetching determination is skipped, and The process proceeds to step S322. In this case as well, the pre-reading determination for the special view 1 action holding ball this time is not executed, the hold addition command having pre-reading prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created, and pre-reading notice effect is not executed. In other words, it can be said that the prefetching prohibition data (9FH) is data designating that the process (steps S318 to S321) related to the prefetching determination is not executed.

  When the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S317:? 5AH), the setting value command is transmitted, and the random number determination process (big win random number determination process at the time of winning) is executed (step S318). The above “setting value command” includes information that can specify the current setting value, and when effect control is performed on the presentation control unit 24 (for example, setting suggestion effect described later) based on the setting value. Used for The above-mentioned random number judgment processing is performed as a part of 'pre-reading judgment' processing, and in this case, it is executed when the current operation reserving ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. A "prefetch readiness determination" is performed in advance to determine "described later" in step S410 of FIG.

  In the random number determination process, first, a hit random number determination table (not shown) is acquired, and a jackpot determination random number value for the special electric power product operation determination random number latch buffer is acquired. Then, based on the acquired jackpot determination random number value and the hit random number determination table, a winning lottery (pre-reading winning determination) for the current operation holding ball is executed, and the lottery result (pre-reading winning result) is obtained.

  In the above-mentioned random number judgment table, there is a "random number judgment table (not shown) for special figure 1" related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball (special symbol variation display game 1) and a special figure 2 operation holding ball (special symbol) The “random number determination table for special figure 2 (not shown)” related to the variable display game 2) is included, and the “random number determination table for special figure 1” is particularly During the starting opening check process of FIG. 2 "special figure 2 for each random number determination table" is referred. The hit random number determination table is also used when performing a winning lottery in the later-described “random number determination process for determining the special motorized product operation (step S410 in FIG. 22)”.

  In these hit random number judgment tables, the hit classification (big hit, small hit, or lost) is determined according to the big hit lottery probability state (high probability state (high probability) and low probability state (low probability)). Determination area (judgment value) for the jackpot and the jackpot judgment random number value (big hit judgment random number size: 65536) are defined in association with one another. Specifically, the jackpot judgment random value is any judgment value Depending on whether they belong to or not, the hit type is determined. Therefore, even if the acquired jackpot determination random number values belong to the same determination value, it is determined whether the current jackpot lottery probability (the operating probability of the condition device) is a high probability or a low probability. The hit classification may be different, such as "big hit" and "lost" on the other hand.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the hit random number determination table is provided with a hit determination table (a table in which at least the winning probability of the big hit differs according to the settings 1 to 6) corresponding to each setting value (settings 1 to 6). It is done. Further, in the case of this embodiment, the ratio of the big hit lottery probability at the high probability to the big hit lottery probability at the low probability (probability fluctuation ratio: high probability / low probability) is the same in each set value, and the ratio is 10 It is set to a value that does not exceed. For example, setting 6 "low probability 1/320, high probability 1/32", setting 5 "low probability 1/330, high probability 1/33", ..., setting 2 "low probability 1 / In 390, high probability 1/39, and setting 1 “low probability 1/410, high probability 1/41”, a big hit is won.

  Note that the above probability fluctuation rates may be different rates in each set value, or may be different rates in part. Further, instead of providing a hit determination table corresponding to each set value (settings 1 to 6), a common hit determination table may be provided for a part of each set value. For example, “Low random number determination table for low setting” common to settings 1 to 2, setting 3 “random number determination table for 3 for setting,” setting 4 “random number determination table for 4 for setting”, settings 5 to 6 A common "high setting per random number determination table" can be provided. In this case, the common random number determination table is referred to with some setting values (setting 1 and setting 2 and setting 5 and setting 6 in this example), and the same degree of profit (outgoing rate) is the same performance among the settings. Can be In this case, the substantial setting can be made into "three stages". In addition, even when the common hit random number determination table is referred to, the original six-step setting can be performed if the symbol selection rate of each hit type is set to a probability different for each setting value. As described above, by sharing the random number determination table with a part of the set values, the actual setting can be reduced to less than six steps even in the case of the six-step setting model as in this embodiment. .

  When the random number determination process of step S318 described above is finished, next, special stop symbol data creation process is executed (step S319). This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as part of the 'pre-reading determination' process, and here, it is executed when the current operation reserving ball is subjected to the variable display operation. The “pre-reading symbol determination” is performed to determine in advance the lottery (see step S411 in FIG. 22 described later).

  In the special stop symbol data creation process, “a symbol table (not shown) according to the prefetch read result obtained in step S318 and the special symbol type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to be processed this time Select "). Then, the random number value for special symbol determination obtained in step S314 is acquired, and the symbol lottery for the current operation reserving ball is performed based on the selected symbol table and the acquired random number value for special symbol determination The symbol determination is executed, and the lottery result (pre-reading symbol result) is acquired.

  The "symbol table" includes a big hit type, a small hit type, a "big hit symbol table" for determining a lost type, a "small hit symbol table", and a "lost symbol table", and each symbol table is a special symbol. It is provided corresponding to the type. These symbol tables are also used when performing symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation in special stop symbol creation processing (step S411 in FIG. 22) described later.

  In the symbol table, a determination area (determination value) for determining a hit type (pattern type) and a special symbol determination random number value (special symbol determination random number value: 200) are defined in association with each other. Specifically, depending on which determination value the random value for special symbol determination belongs to, the winning type is determined according to a predetermined symbol selection rate. In the present embodiment, the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number are acquired as data indicating the lottery result.

  The "special symbol determination data" is data for identifying the winning type (type of winning: big hit type, small hit type, and lost type), and specifically, the big hit 1 to 11, small hit shown in FIG. 1 is data for identifying which of the losers A to C (not shown) has been won. This special symbol determination data is a process requiring winning type information (for example, a game state transition preparation process in step S412 in FIG. 22 described later, a special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S413, a process related to execution control of a big hit game (The special electric symbol management process of FIG. 24) is data used, etc. Further, the above "special stop symbol number" is data for specifying a special stop symbol aspect to be displayed on the special symbol display device in a stop state. It is used when specifying the stop symbol type of the special symbol on the main control unit 20 side.

  If there is only one winning type to be drawn, the symbol table may not be provided. For example, when the type of loss is one type of loss A, if loss result is loss without providing a loss symbol table (without performing a symbol lottery), it is sufficient to determine the loss A as the winning type. . In addition, in the case of this embodiment, since "small hit" is excluded from the big hit lottery object of the special figure 2 side (small hit is not elected), although the small hit symbol table for special figure 2 is not provided, A small hit symbol table may be provided in which the symbol selection rate is 0%.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the selection ratio of the jackpot type for providing a relatively high profit is higher on the side of the special figure 2 than on the special figure 1 side, and the symbol lottery is advantageous for the player. As a result, the player who receives the lottery of the special symbol variation display game 2 rather than the special symbol variation display game 1 is considered as a more advantageous game development for the player. In particular, in the presence of power support, the winning probability on the lower starting opening 35 side is dramatically improved, and the opportunity to execute the special symbol variation display game 2 is also increased. Not only that, it is considered as an advantageous gaming state for the player also from the viewpoint of the symbol lottery.

In addition, although a common symbol table may be defined in all settings, a symbol table according to the setting may be defined. In this case, it can be configured as follows.
(A) In part or all of the settings, the symbol selection rates of one or more winning types are different. For example, with respect to symbol lottery rates of big hit 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 4, “7%, 4%, 35%, 13%” in the case of setting 1 and “15%, 5%” in the case of setting 6 It can be 30%, 12%.
(B) In all or a part of each setting, the probability variation rush rate (the symbol selection rate serving as a chance to shift to probability variation and / or latency) differs. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the probability change rush rate is 65% (the percentage of latent probability and probability variation big hit is 65%, and the percentage of time-hours and large credits is 35%). The probability change rate can be 60%, and in the case of setting 6, the probability change rate can be 65%. In addition, the same applies to the short-time rush rate (big hit symbol selection rate that triggers transition to the short-time).
In any case, as the setting becomes higher, it may be determined so that the payout performance is advantageous to the player.

  When the special stop symbol data creation process of step S319 described above is finished, next, the starting hole winning combination random number determination process is executed (step S320). The start-up winning combination random number determination process is also performed as part of the "pre-reading determination" process, and in this case, "the variation at the start of variation, which is executed when the current operation reserving ball is subjected to the variation display operation The “look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination” is performed in advance to determine the pattern lottery (see step S413 in FIG. 22 described later).

  When entering the above-mentioned starting opening winning combination random number judgment processing, the result of the winning lottery obtained in the random number judgment processing in step S318, the result of the pre-reading symbol judgment obtained in the special stop symbol data creation processing in step S319, and It is executed when the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation related to the current operation holding ball, that is, when the current operation holding ball is subjected to the variable display operation, using the 'random number for fluctuation pattern' acquired in the process The result of the special symbol variation pattern creation process (see S413 in FIG. 22 described later) is read ahead and determined. Then, based on the pre-read determination result, a process of creating winning command data 1 (second byte (EVENT): lower byte) used for creating the hold addition command is performed. As a result, for the winning command data 1, the prefetch prohibition data "9FH" set in step S315 is data for designating the content of the prefetch variation pattern (except for the holding ball number information) by this starting hole winning combination random number determination process. It will be updated to the value. The specified contents of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern according to this embodiment include normal fluctuation type, N reach loss, weak SP reach loss, medium SP reach loss, strong SP reach loss, N reach big hit, weak SP reach big hit, medium SP reach big hit, strong SP reach big hit There is a big hit, and 2R latent probability / small hit designation, etc., and the expectation of winning on the prefetching fluctuation pattern is higher in this order, and the probability of winning by the prefetching lottery is relatively larger as the prefetching fluctuation pattern is higher. It is getting higher. In the case of the present embodiment, as described above, the content designated by the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is not the kind of reach itself “N reach 1”, for example, but “N reach type (N reach 1 or N It is specified that it is "reach 2)".

  In the present embodiment, the prefetch read-through determination data obtained in the random number determination process in step S318 is immediately used in the special stop symbol data creation process in subsequent step S319, and this data is not required thereafter. The pre-read symbol determination data obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process is immediately used in the subsequent step S320 start hole winning time random number determination process, and thereafter this data is not required and the start hole The look-ahead fluctuation pattern information (data of the winning command 1) obtained in the winning random number determination process is only used to create the hold addition command, and this data is not required thereafter. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the various data obtained by the series of prefetch determination processes in steps S318 to S0323 are not stored in the RAM one by one as they are taken in the register. As a result, the memory capacity of the ROM and RAM can be reduced, and the control load can be reduced.

  After completion of the series of pre-reading determination processing of the above steps S318 to S321, subsequently, based on winning command data 1 of the lower byte (EVENT) side designating the pre-reading fluctuation pattern, the current number of operation pending balls and the special symbol type Based on the upper byte side winning command data 2 (MODE), a "pending addition command" is created (step S322), and this is sent to the effect control unit 24 without being stored in the RAM 203 (step S323) , Exit from the special figure 1 start opening check processing.

  As for the above-mentioned award command data 2 (MODE), when the special figure 1 starting opening check process is executed, any value of "B6H to B9H" according to one to four special figure 1 operation holding balls. Is set, and when the special view 2 start opening check process is executed, any value of “BBH to BEH” is set according to the special view 2 operation holding balls 1 to 4. Therefore, the hold addition command includes prefetch determination result information obtained in a series of processes (steps S318 to S320) related to prefetch determination, specifically, information capable of specifying a prefetch variation pattern.

  However, in the case of the read ahead prohibition condition or when an abnormality occurs in the setting value data, the read ahead prohibition data (9FH) acquired in step S315 is maintained as it is, and the hold addition command “** 9FH “**” is generated from B6H to B9H and any value from BBH to BEH) and is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (the determination result of step S315 is NO, the determination result of S316 is NO) Processing route of)).

  When the hold addition command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 having received the hold addition command relates to whether or not the advance notice effect can be performed if the information included in the hold addition command is other than the pre-reading prohibition designation. If a lottery (pre-reading notice lottery) is performed and it is determined that execution is possible according to the drawing result (if the pre-reading notice lottery is won), a presentation scenario of pre-reading notice (hold change notice) (hereinafter referred to as “hold notice scenario”) And create a previewing notice effect for the current operation pending ball based on the scenario. In the suspension notice scenario, a plurality of types of effect scenarios for realizing various suspension change announcements are prepared, and as a representative example, here, it is assumed that the new operation suspension ball is the fourth one and the operation suspension ball is An example of an effect scenario selected when displayed as the hold icon of the hold display unit d1 will be described, and the description of the case of one to three operation hold balls is omitted to avoid redundant description.

  Here, as a reserve announcement scenario, not only the reserve change (change of reserve color) at the time of winning, but also the advance notice for which the reserve indication changes in response to the shift indication, for example, the third action reserve ball for the present action reserve ball And, when the reserve icon at the time of winning is displayed in “white (normal reserve color)”, the reserve display mode is “white reserve (at the time of winning) → blue reserve (the first shift display) every time shift display is performed An example (scenario 1 to 8) will be described in which a hold change notice such as changing to "red hold (second shift display)" is adopted.

(1) The scenario of “white → white → white → white” (hold display section d1 (at the time of winning) → hold display section c1 → hold display section b1 → hold display mode when displayed on hold display section a1) The effect scenario is the one that continues to be displayed as a white color hold of the normal color without a hold change occurring, and is selected with a high probability in the case of non-winning pre-reading notice lottery or the pre-reading fluctuation pattern with lower winning expectation degree. .
(2) The scenario scenario of scenario 2 "white → white → blue → blue" and scenario 3 "white → white → green → red" is displayed in the hold display mode with a relatively low probability of winning when winning. The hold change notice is a step-up hold notice that can be gradually developed in response to a shift indication, and finally, a hold indication form in which the expectation for winning is relatively higher than the hold indication form at the time of winning. Is displayed. Such a step-up type hold notice is an effect in that it allows the player to expect what display mode the hold display mode of the final change destination will be, even if the hold at the time of winning is “white”. It can be said that it is a highly effective hold change notice.
(3) Scenario 4 "blue → blue → yellow → SP (blue)" and scenario 5 "blue → blue → yellow → SP (red)" are the same as the above-mentioned "steps" as in the production scenario of scenario 2-3 above. It belongs to “Up type hold notice”, but the big difference from the scenario of the above mentioned scenario 2-3 is not only the change of the hold color but also the special hold such as “SP (blue)” “SP (red)” The point is changed to an icon (for example, a special hold display mode in which character information is attached to a hold icon colored in a predetermined hold color). In the case of this embodiment, the pending display mode of "SP (blue)" or "SP (red)" is selected only when the look-ahead change pattern type is 'SP reach type', and the operation pending ball according to SP reach “SP reach fixed hold” which announces that it is That is, this "SP reach fixed holding" is a holding display mode for giving notice of the occurrence of the SP reach having a relatively high expectation of winning among the reach types. Further, the relationship between the expectation of winning is the relationship of “SP (blue) <SP (red)”, similarly to the relationship of the expectation of winning the reserved color. That is, in the case of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern that designates any of the weak, medium, and strong SP reach, the selectivity of scenario 4 in which the SP (blue) appears is a relation of “weak>medium> strong”, and SP ( The selectivity of scenario 5 in which red) appears has a relationship of “weak <medium <strong”.
(4) In the presentation scenario of “SP → SP → SP → SP” in scenario 6, the suspension icon at the time of winning is one mode of SP reach confirmation suspension, but in the case of this scenario 6, the suspension icon of the special pattern Special SP reach confirmation pending (special SP reach confirmation pending) accompanied by the character information of "SP" is displayed. The special SP reach confirmation hold is positioned as an SP reach confirmation hold with a relatively higher expectation of winning than the above "SP (blue)" and "SP (red)".
(5) The presentation scenario of “SP → SP → SP → rainbow” of scenario 7 is similar to the presentation scenario of scenario 6 except that scenario 6 differs from the scenario of scenario 7 in that the action holding ball is In the stage before being digested, it is a point that is changed to "rainbow color hold" to notify the jackpot finalization (predictive). Therefore, scenario 7 is selected only for the big hit look ahead variation pattern.
(6) Scenario 8 “blue → blue → yellow → 'set + hold color green'” indicates the expectation of winning by the hold color, and internally set by the hold icon (item image or character) of “set” This is a special hold change notice (setting-related pre-reading notice effect) having setting-relevant remarks which will be described later in the original nature of the hold change notice that suggests a value.

  Which scenario is selected is selected with a predetermined selection rate according to the contents of the look-ahead change pattern. Although details will be described later, the appearance rate can be made different for each of settings 1 to 6 in all or part of scenarios 1 to 8.

  In addition, if the information included in the hold addition command is the prohibition on prefetching, the effect control unit 24 determines that the prefetching advance notice can not be performed without executing the prefetching notice lottery or forcibly forcing the prefetching notice lottery to be lost. . As a result, the occurrence of the pre-reading advance notice effect is prohibited. In the present embodiment, the pending addition command is sent regardless of whether the setting error is generated or not, and the pending addition command of the read ahead prohibition designation is sent in the case of the setting error error. The reason is as follows.

  In the case of the present embodiment, even if a setting abnormality error occurs, the game operation is not forcibly stopped (for example, the game is not allowed to continue playing, such as prohibiting the symbol variation display operation or stopping the firing operation). As the reason, firstly, as described above, the resolution of the setting error is resolved by performing the setting change operation (refer to the setting change management process in step S 023, etc.), but the setting change operation during business Is likely to fall under the prohibited matter as a matter of jealousy in terms of legal requirements. Second, when the setting error is caused, if the game operation process is forcibly stopped immediately, the player is given a sense of distrust to the game machine. For example, when the symbol variation display game in progress is executed during normal operation, or in the case of a big hit game, etc., a setting error error occurs and control is made immediately to the state where the game can not be performed immediately And, the profit that the player should be able to obtain is lost, and the player is distrusted. In consideration of such circumstances, in the present embodiment, when a setting abnormality error occurs, the error notification is stopped and the game progress itself such as the symbol variation display game and the hit game is conditional. It is supposed to proceed as it is. In this embodiment, "conditional but expressed" means that, in the present embodiment, when a setting error occurs, the advance notice is prohibited or the result of the symbol variation display game is forcibly controlled to a loss. (Refer to step S317 in the start opening check process of FIG. 21, and step S409 in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 22 described later). As described above, the reason for advancing the game as it is "conditional" is that if a setting error error occurs, stopping the error notification and taking any other measures will result in the effect control processing due to a defect. It is because there is a possibility that it may affect or a big hit lottery may not be performed correctly.

<22. Special symbol variation start process: Figure 22>
Next, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) in FIG. 20 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start process.

  In FIG. 22, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 operation holding ball number is zero (step S401), and when the special figure 2 operation holding ball number is not zero (step S401: NO), The process at the start of the change (steps S403 to S416) targeted for the number of operation pending balls is executed. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 actuation ball number is zero (step S401: YES), it is determined whether the special figure 1 actuation ball number is zero or not (step S402). When the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the process at the start of fluctuation (steps S403 to S416) is executed for the special figure 1 actuation ball number. According to the processing in steps S401 and S402, “Priority in which the special view 1 operation reserving ball or the special view 2 operation reserving ball is to be preferentially subjected to the variable display operation (which operation reserving ball is to be digested) The change order is determined. In the present embodiment, when there is an operation holding ball in both the special view 1 operation holding ball and the special view 2 operation holding ball, the special view 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested.

  In addition, when the number of operation holding balls of both the special drawing 2 operation holding ball number and the special drawing 1 operation holding ball number is zero (step S401: YES, and step S402: YES), the state of "operation holding ball absent" It becomes. The state of "no operation holding ball" is a case where the special symbol is in a standby state and is in a state without holding memory, and the effect control unit 24 is notified of entering into this state, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The apparatus 36 is controlled to switch to a demonstration screen display for waiting for customers. Therefore, when it becomes "no operation holding ball", it proceeds to step S417 and determines whether the special symbol operation status is "standby (00H)" indicating the above "no operation holding ball" state. (Step S417).

  When the judgment processing in step S417 is passed, that is, when the above-mentioned "operation holding ball is not present", the special symbol operation status at this time is "standby (01H)" (step S417: NO: The special symbol operation status is switched to "standby (00H)" (refer to step S472 under processing during special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 23A described later) (00H is stored in the special symbol operation status: step S418). Then, a customer waiting command (BA04) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S419), and the special symbol variation start process is exited. As described above, the effect control unit 24 generates a customer waiting waiting effect when it receives 180 seconds while the game is not started after receiving the customer waiting command.

  If the special figure 1 actuation holding ball number or the special figure 2 actuation holding ball number is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), steps S403 to S416 are sequentially executed. In addition, about the process of step S403 to S416 demonstrated below, when it is' NO 'by determination of said step S401, the process which made the special figure 2 operation | movement ball object target, and determination of said step S402' When it is NO ', it becomes processing for special figure 1 operation reservation balls, but the method of processing is the same. Therefore, in order to avoid repeated description, unless it is necessary to be specific, it will be described without distinction as to which processing is intended for the operation reserving ball.

  When the process proceeds to step S403, the number of operation reserve balls on the special view side provided for the current variation display operation is decremented by 1 (step S403), and the “deduction subtraction command” including the operation reserve ball number information after subtraction is produced by the effect control unit 24 (Step S404).

  Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information to designate the special symbol type on the current variation start side, and if Special figure 1 is the variation start side, "00H", and if Special figure 2 is the variation start side For example, "01H" is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

  Next, the pending data stored in the pending storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the pending 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of the steps S406 to S407, pending data (big hit determination random number, special symbol determination random number, and variation pattern) stored in the pending storage area (pending 1 storage area) corresponding to the pending storage number n = 1 The random number is read out and stored in the judgment random number storage area of the in-area RAM, and the pending data stored in the pending storage area corresponding to the pending n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) It stores in the pending | holding storage area corresponding to -1 '(step S406), clears pending | holding 4 storage area, and provides an idle area (step S407). As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game matches the order of the number of operation holding balls n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation holding balls obtained at the starting opening winning combination are any holding memory As well as specifying whether it corresponds to an area, it is possible to store new activated balls for storage.

  Next, gaming state information transmission processing is executed (step S408). In the gaming state information transmission process, the state command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This state command includes at least gaming state information capable of specifying the current gaming state, and in the present embodiment, also includes special symbol time reduction counter information (remaining time reduction information). The information included in the state command is used in the effect control unit 24 for transition control of the effect mode, and a remaining time reduction display effect for displaying the remaining number of times of the time saving state.

  Next, it is determined whether the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S409). If the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S409: ≠ 5AH), the setting value command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and then the special electric role determination operation random number determination process is executed (step S410). In this random number determination process for special motorized combination determination, the jackpot determination random number for big hit determination is used to execute a 'falling lottery' at the time of the start of variation for the operation retaining ball provided for the variation display operation this time. The procedure of the random number determination process for the special motorized product operation determination is substantially the same procedure as the random number determination process of step S318 described above, and therefore will be appropriately omitted to avoid repeated description.

  Here, first, based on the special symbol operation confirmation data, the hit random number determination table on the current process target side (for example, if the special figure 1 side is the process target, the hit random number table for special figure 1) is acquired. Next, the jackpot judgment random number stored in the judgment random number storage area is acquired, and a hit lottery based on the jackpot judgment random number and the hit random number judgment table is executed. Then, if the lottery result is a "big hit", the big hit determination flag is set to "5 AH", and if "small hit" is won, the small hit determination flag is set to "5 AH", "big hit" and "small hit" If the player does not win in any of the “hits”, the current hit determination result is “loss”, and the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag are both set to “00H”.

  In the special stop symbol creation process of step S411, the winning symbol result of the random determination process for the special electric product operation determination of step S410 and the random value for the special symbol determination are used, and "symbol lottery related to the current special symbol variation display game" Execute ". The basic processing procedure of the special stop symbol creation processing is substantially the same as the special stop symbol data creation processing of step S319 described above, and therefore, will be appropriately omitted to avoid redundant description.

  Here, first, a symbol table (one of a big hit symbol table, a small hit symbol table, and a lost symbol table) according to the special symbol operation confirmation data and the random lottery result of the special electric utility product operation determination random number determination processing is selected. Do. For example, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H and the big hit determination flag is 5AH, that is, the current variation start side is 'special figure 1 side', and the hit lottery result is 'big hit', the special figure A jackpot symbol table for one is selected. Then, the special symbol determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the special symbol determination random number value, the "symbol lottery" according to the current special symbol variation display game Is executed, and the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number, which are the lottery results, are stored in the corresponding area of the in-area RAM.

  When the special stop symbol creation process of step S411 is finished, a game state transition preparation process is executed (step S412). In this game state transition preparation process, when the jackpot is won, it is necessary to designate the game state (see FIG. 4) after the big hit game based on the current game state and the special symbol determination data (big hit type). Various data are stored in the corresponding area (transition state buffer) of the in-area RAM. The data set here is used in the jackpot end process (step S509 in FIG. 24) described later.

  When the game state transition preparation processing in step S412 is finished, next, special symbol variation pattern creation processing is executed (step S413). In the special symbol variation pattern creation process, a variation pattern distribution table (not shown) according to the current gaming state and the symbol lottery result (special symbol determination data) of the special stop symbol creation process is acquired. In the fluctuation pattern distribution table, one or more kinds of fluctuation patterns are the set value Nc, the number of operation pending balls (the number of existing operation pending balls excluding the operation pending ball provided for the current variation display operation), the symbol lottery The result is determined in association with the variation pattern random number value (the size of the random number value: 10000), and the variation pattern at the start of the variation is determined by executing the lottery using the variation pattern random number. In the present embodiment, fluctuation pattern distribution tables corresponding to settings 1 to 6 are defined. Therefore, even if the selection condition of the variation pattern (the number of operation pending balls, the symbol lottery result, the variation pattern random number value, etc.) is the same, the variation pattern selected according to the set value may be different. In addition, even in the case of the same fluctuation pattern, the selectivity may differ depending on the set value. For example, in the case of setting 1, the selection ratio of strong reach in the case of the number of operation holding balls 3 and loss C is “290/10000”, but in the case of setting 6, “580/10000” or the like. In the present embodiment, a 'special variation pattern' is provided which can be selected only in the high setting area (settings 5 to 6). When a notice effect (special effect) corresponding to the special variation pattern is produced, it is definitely notified that the current setting value is the high setting area (one mode of setting suggestion effect described later).

  The information on the variation pattern determined in this way mainly includes another hit lottery result of hitting and losing (in the case of this embodiment, detailed symbol lottery result information is included in the decoration symbol designation command), Current gaming state, fluctuation time, execution indication information of specific advance notice effect (presence or absence of reach effect, reach effect type (N reach type or SP reach type), presence or absence of pseudo run, specified information such as pseudo run frequency), setting It can contain a value. The main control unit 20 creates a “variation pattern designation command” that enables identification of the content, and transmits this to the effect control unit 24. The information included in the variation pattern designation command is used when determining various notice effects in the symbol variation display game of this time. Further, the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern is set in the "special symbol combination product operation timer" which is the timer management region of the in-region RAM.

  Next, the in-fluctuation flag corresponding to the current fluctuation start side is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S414). The above-mentioned "in-fluctuating flag" is a flag that indicates which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is in motion, and indicates that the special symbol is in motion if the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), When the said flag is an OFF state (= 00H), it shows that the special symbol is stopping. In the present embodiment, the "special symbol 1 variation in progress flag" corresponding to the special figure 1 and the "special symbol 2 variation in progress flag" corresponding to the special figure 2 are handled. Here, the special figure 1 side is described as the processing target (the change start side), so the special symbol 1 during change flag is turned ON.

  Next, a decorative symbol designation command corresponding to the symbol lottery result obtained in the special stop symbol creation process of step S411 is acquired, and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). The decoration symbol specification command is composed of two bytes of a high-order byte (MODE) specifying the special symbol type on the variable side and a low-order byte (EVENT) specifying the winning type. Therefore, the decorative symbol designation command includes information on the special symbol type on the variable side and the winning type (symbol lottery result). The decorative symbol specification command mainly uses a combination of decorative symbols (pattern types that make reach symbols) when forming a reach state, a combination of decorative symbols (decorative stop symbols) to be finally displayed on stop, and symbols The variable display game is used when determining a notice effect or the like corresponding to a winning type. Upon receiving the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command, the effect control unit 24 controls the appearance of the symbol variation display game of this time based on the information included in these commands.

  Then, as the variation start time setting process, the special symbol operation status is switched to "during variation (02H)" (store 02H in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the determination random number storage area (zero clear) (step S416) ).

  As described above, when the special symbol variation start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process of FIG. 20 (step S309) is performed, and thus the variable symbol display of the special symbol is started. Thus, the special symbol management process (step S093) is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric symbol management process (step S095) of FIG.

(About the presentation aspect related to the setting value)
The effect control unit 24 is configured to be able to manage the current setting value from the setting value command. In this embodiment, based on the information included in the setting value command and the information included in the hold addition command, the variation pattern designation command, the decoration symbol designation command, etc. At various timings such as pre-reading notice at the time of occurrence and hit during a hit game, effects (setting related effects) related to the current set value (internal set value) can be produced. . As a result, it is possible to give the player an estimation element for estimating an internal setting value from the point of view. In particular, the setting value is one of the important factors that greatly affect the player's profit, and it can be said that the setting value is one of the matters that cause a great deal of interest when the player plays a game. Therefore, giving the player an estimation factor of the setting value is an important element in enhancing the game interest, and by making the presentation related to the setting, the variation of the presentation can be diversified. Can.

The above “setting related effects” can include the following effect modes (a) to (d).
(A) It is possible to make it possible to reveal a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting or definitely notifying an internal setting value. As such a setting suggestion effect, for example, the following effect modes (a) to (mi) can be adopted.
(A) "Low setting indication effect" that suggests a low setting area (settings 1 to 3),
(S) "High setting suggestive effect" that suggests high setting area (setting 4 to 6),
(D) "Even setting suggestion effect" that suggests even setting (setting 2, 4, 6),
(Y) "Odd setting suggestion effect" that suggests odd setting (setting 1, 3, 5),
(M) "Set value finalization effect" which announces a specific set value definitely. For example, "setting 6 fixed effect" which announces "setting 6" of the highest setting value decisively,
(M) "specific range suggestion effect" that suggests the setting value of the specific range. For example, setting 3 to 5 (α ≦ setting value ≦ β), setting 4 or more (α ≦ setting value), and the like. Examples of these effect modes include displaying a specific item image and a character image, and generating a specific sound effect (for example, explosion sound) or a specific light effect (for example, flash effect). Such settings suggestive effects are mainly reach effects and pseudo-runs, player participation type effects, prefetch notice effects, specific hit effects during a hit game (for example, opening effects, effects during rounds, intervals between rounds) It can accompany and appear on various advance notice effects such as the effect, the ending effect, etc., and the background effect in the specific gaming state. In addition, about the appearance rate of the various setting suggestion effects demonstrated by said (A)-(mi), it can define suitably according to the content of setting suggestion. For example, high probability in the order of settings 1 to 6 or different appearance rates for settings 1 to 3 and settings 4 to 5 and setting 6 or settings 1 to 3 with the same appearance rate for settings 4 to 6 respectively Different appearance rates can be used. That is, when the setting suggestion effect appears, the degree of expectation of the content can be determined appropriately. Specifically, even with setting 6, a low setting suggestion effect may appear, but if a high setting suggestion effect appears at a higher rate than the low setting suggestion effect, the internal setting value is a high setting range Expectations will increase. This point is the same as the event in which the expectation of winning is indicated by the notice effect (the same applies to (b), (c) and (d) described next).
However, in the case of the setting value finalization which announces the setting definitively, since the setting becomes clear when the effect appears, the expectation for the setting becomes 100% ((b) and (c) described next) The same applies to (d)).

  (B) Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a variation pattern distribution table according to the set value, and to select a variation pattern according to the set value. As a result, in all or some of the settings, it is possible to make the selection rate of a specific fluctuation pattern different, or to set a fluctuation pattern that can be selected only in a part of the settings. Therefore, the appearance rate of one or more types of specific preview effects can be made different probabilities (for example, the appearance rate of strong SP reach differs between the first setting and the second setting, etc.), and the same notice Even when a rendition appears, the difference in the appearance rate gives rise to a setting inference factor. In addition, if the “special effect” described above appears, it can also be notified that the setting of the specific range (high setting area) is definite. Such a setting-related effect can be said to be an effect mode that not only reports the expectation of winning but also has the function of the setting suggestion effect of (a) described above by using the existing effect.

  (C) It is possible to make setting-related effects using a decorative symbol appear. For example, in all settings or a part of settings, the appearance rate of a specific decoration stop pattern aspect (for example, "2" "2" "4" etc.) can be made into a different probability. For example, at the time of losing, the appearance rate of the loose eyes of “2”, “2” and “4” can be 1% in setting 1 and 5% in setting 6. In addition, as a specific decoration stop symbol aspect, the decoration stop symbol aspect corresponding to hit may be sufficient, and the decoration stop symbol aspect corresponding to loss may be sufficient. Also in the aspect using this decorative pattern, as in the case of (b) above, a setting inference element can be provided using an existing effect. In particular, in the case of adopting the decoration stop symbol mode corresponding to the loss, even in the case of a loss, it is possible to give an interest of observing the decoration stop pattern and estimating the setting.

  (D) Further, it is possible to make setting-related effects using pre-reading advance notice effects (in the present embodiment, hold change notices). For example, as in the case of "setting related pre-reading advance notice effect" described above, change the hold display (hold icon) to a hold display for setting suggestion and exert the same function as the setting suggestion effect of (a) above. Can. Moreover, not only this but in all the settings or a part of the settings, the appearance rate of one or more types of specific pending change notices may be different probabilities. For example, to describe representatively an embodiment adopting the previously described suspension change notice scenarios 1 to 8, at least one appearance rate of the scenarios 1 to 8 in all settings or a part of settings. It can be different. For example, the selection rate of scenario 2 in the case of the prefetch variation pattern having “N reach loss” as the specified content may be a selection rate different for every setting, or may be a selection rate different for some settings. Also, in the case of the prefetch variation pattern with the above “special variation pattern” as the specified content, by executing a special scenario such as “white → white → white → high setting”, setting of a specific range (high setting range) Certain facts can also be notified in a definite manner. Also in the aspect using this preview advance notice effect, as in the above (b) and (c), the setting inference element can be given using the existing effect.

  In the above (b), (c) and (d), any appearance rate is set, and any setting inference element (for example, setting suggestion effect described in the above (a) (low setting suggestion effect-specific range suggestion effect) Whether or not to provide the same setting estimation element as at least one of the above can be determined as appropriate. In addition, the setting related effects in (a) to (d) above are determined a predetermined number of times (for example, after the power is turned on or after the end of the big hit game (it may be after the big hit due to a specific big hit). When it reaches 128 games), the appearance rate can be made high probability within a specific game number range (for example, between 128 games and 150 games).

(For the case where a setting error has occurred: processing route from S409 to S411)
Returning to the description of the determination process of step S409, when the setting error flag is determined to be in the ON state (5AH) in step S409, that is, the process contents when it is determined that a setting error error has occurred Do.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined in the determination process of step S409 that the setting error flag is in the ON state, the above-described random number determination process for the special electric combination product operation determination (winning lottery) is not performed. Special stop symbol creation processing is to proceed. That is, when a setting error occurs, the winning lottery at the start of fluctuation is not executed. In this case, the current lottery result is always "loss". This is the previous game variation display game, if you win a big hit or small hit, the big hit determination flag indicating a win win, small hit determination flag is cleared (00H) at the end of the symbol change display game (Refer to steps S475 and S477 in FIG. 23A described later). Therefore, in the symbol variation display game of this time, when the winning lottery process of step S410 is not executed, the winning lottery result is always "loss".

  Therefore, in the special stop symbol creation process of step S411, the symbol lottery is executed based on the fact that the above-mentioned winning lottery result is "loss". Here, even in the case of the setting abnormality error, the loss type (in the case of the present embodiment, any of the losses A to C) may be determined using the lost symbol table as usual, but the error dedicated loss D may be provided, and in the case of a setting abnormality error, this loss D may be determined (a 'lost D' not normally selected is provided). In this case, when a setting error occurs, the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number corresponding to the lost D are determined as symbol lottery results, and the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b display during normal operation. The special stop symbol which is not to be done is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the error-only loss D is not used in common between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 but the corresponding error-only loss (for example, the special figure 1-specific loss D1 and the special figure 2-specific loss D2) May be provided. Further, in the case where a loss dedicated to an error is not provided, only a specific loss (for example, the loss A) may be selected among the losses A to C selected at the normal time.

(About selection of fluctuation pattern at setting error)
Next, special symbol variation pattern creation processing is executed (step S411). During the setting error, as described above, "lost" is always determined. In other words, it is a case where a forced loss is substantially forced. In this case, a “variation pattern distribution table for setting error (variation pattern distribution table for setting abnormality)” may be provided, which is selected only in the case of a setting abnormality error in consideration of forced loss, for example, special It is possible to provide a variation pattern distribution table (for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2) for setting error according to the symbol type. Here, since a forced failure occurs during a setting abnormal error, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table for setting errors, a table configuration in which a fluctuation pattern specifying an advance notice effect with a low degree of resemblance is selected with high probability That is, it is preferable not to select a fluctuation pattern for designating a notice effect (such as a high expectation degree notice effect or the like) having a high degree of resemblance. In consideration of this point, for example, it is possible to make a variation table shown in the following (W) to (S) have a selectable table configuration. In addition, when it calls a "normal fluctuation pattern" in the following (W)-(s), it only points to a fluctuation pattern (here, a lost normal fluctuation pattern) which designates a normal fluctuation which does not designate reach or a pseudo ream.

Configuration (W): Do not select at least the reach variation pattern.
Configuration (f): Do not select at least the reach fluctuation pattern and the pseudo connected fluctuation pattern. In other words, only the normal variation pattern is selected.
Configuration (Yo): Do not select a reach variation pattern that specifies at least a specific reach. As a specific reach, for example, SP reach having a relatively high expectation of winning, or 'strong SP reach' having a relatively high expectation of winning among SP reach (SP reach other than weak SP reach (medium SP reach) And strong SP reach)) and so on. If "at least no reach variation pattern of SP reach designation is not selected", it is possible to select N reach designation, pseudo-continuous presence designation, a fluctuation pattern of normal variation, and the like.
Configuration (T): One of a plurality of types of normal fluctuation patterns is selected.
In the case of this configuration (T), one of, for example, a plurality of types of normal fluctuation patterns (normal fluctuation 2s, normal fluctuation 8s, and normal fluctuation 12s in the case of this embodiment) selectable during normal operation can be selected. Can be configured. It should be noted that even if there are multiple types of setting variation error dedicated normal variation patterns (hereinafter abbreviated as “error normal variation pattern”) which are selected only at the setting anomaly error, any one of them may be selected. Good.
Configuration (f): Select only a specific normal variation pattern.
In this configuration (S), there is no particular limitation on a specific normal fluctuation pattern. For example, the normal fluctuation pattern with the longest fluctuation time (for example, normal fluctuation 12s) may be selected, or the normal fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time (for example, normal fluctuation 2s) may be selected. A normal variation pattern (eg, normal variation 8s) may be selected. In addition, it is considered as a forced loss during the setting abnormality error, and in consideration of the player's disadvantage, it is preferable to delay the digestion time of the operation holding ball. That is, a configuration in which only the normal fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation 12s) having the longest fluctuation time is selected is preferable. Further, a normal fluctuation pattern for error (for example, a normal fluctuation 5 s) may be provided, and this fluctuation pattern may be selected at the time of a setting abnormality error.

  In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned structure (T), you may select either among several types of normal fluctuation patterns according to the number of operation | movement holding balls. Further, in the case of the configuration (S), since only the specific normal fluctuation pattern is selected, only the specific normal fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the number of operation pending balls. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of loses A to C are provided, but the normal fluctuation pattern described in the configuration (T) may be selected in at least one lose. Preferably, the normal variation pattern described in the configuration (TA) (SO) is selected for any loss. Also, if there is an error-specific lose D (or a loss D1, a loss D2) selected only at the time of the setting abnormality error described above, the variation pattern distribution table for setting abnormality is referred to when the loss is selected. It can be configured.

(About the fluctuation display production such as decoration design, the notice production during the design fluctuation)
In addition, it is preferable to include information (setting abnormal error information) that can specify that the 'setting abnormal error' is specified in the fluctuation pattern designation command selected during the setting abnormal error. By receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command including the setting abnormality error information, the effect control unit 24 recognizes that the fluctuation pattern designation command sent this time is the fluctuation pattern selected during the setting abnormality error, Thus, it is possible to execute the effect control according to the decorative symbol variation display game for exclusive use during the setting abnormality error. Note that the effect control unit 24 can recognize that a setting abnormality error has occurred by receiving the “set value abnormality command (see step S734 in the setting abnormality check process of FIG. 19)”. Since the command is exclusively used for notification of abnormal setting error, to execute the decoration symbol variation display game dedicated to abnormal setting error, separately transmit a fluctuation pattern specification command including abnormal setting error information. It is preferable to set it as a structure.

As a decorative symbol variation display game dedicated to the above setting abnormality error, it is possible to configure, for example, the effects control system as shown in (U) to (Y) below. In any case, when the special symbol variation display game (variation time of the special figure) is ended, the decorative symbol variation display game is also ended.
Effect (c): While the setting error is in error, the advance effect itself is not shown. For example, as the image display effect, only the background image display (a normal background image corresponding to the effect mode or a background image for an error) and the variation display of the decorative pattern are performed, which are not related to the winning expectation.
Effect (ヰ): Does not display the variation of the decoration pattern. In this case, the variation display operation of the special symbol is being performed, but the decorative symbol remains stopped.
Effect (No): A variation display (variation display during RAM error) is performed only during a setting error. For example, "shake fluctuation (temporary stop state)" is performed, in which the decoration pattern is oscillated up and down without starting the normal change display. In this case, the swing fluctuation may be performed with the combination of specific symbols (for example, a lost corresponding decorative symbol such as “2” “4” “0”).
Effect (e): Normal variation display is performed, but when it is stopped display, stop display is performed with a specific symbol combination (for example, a lost corresponding decorative symbol such as “2” “4” “0”) or After performing normal fluctuation display, shake fluctuation (temporary stop state) is performed for a predetermined time with a combination of specific symbols, and then stop display is performed.
Effect (G): Change from a normal decoration pattern to a special decoration pattern during setting error. For example, a normal decorative symbol is a symbol displaying numbers 1 to 9, but a dedicated decorative symbol during a setting error is, for example, the left, middle, right symbol, "D", "La", "-", etc. Change to the special symbol that displayed the character of. In this case, it is preferable to set the decoration stop design to a special meaning. In the above-mentioned effects (c) to (c), when the decoration pattern is stopped or temporarily stopped, if an aspect such as "D", "L", or "-" is displayed, the player or the surrounding clerk, etc. It is possible to immediately notify that a RAM error has occurred.
Effect (Ya): At least the sound effect is set to the mute state or the lowest volume on the game setting. In this case, it is effective in giving a sense of incongruity to the player and immediately informing the user of the setting abnormality error. Further, the light amount according to the image display effect may be set as the minimum light amount in the game setting.
In the above effects (c) to (d), although an example in which setting error error information is included at least in the variation pattern specification command has been described, even if setting error error information is included in the decoration symbol specification command. Good.

(Modification example when a setting error occurs)
In the above embodiment, when a setting error occurs, the process is to skip the winning lottery (step S410), but the step including not only the winning lottery but also the symbol lottery (step S411) and the variation pattern lottery (step S413) S411 to S413 may be skipped to leave the process without doing anything. In other words, the special symbol management process is ended without starting the symbol variation display game. In this case, since no variation pattern specification command or decoration symbol specification command is created for the effect control unit 24, it is preferable to control the game execution impossible state, assuming that a RAM error has occurred. For example, when a RAM error occurs, at least data transmitted to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in order to explicitly notify that the game progress has stopped (the special symbol variation display game is not being executed). Clear (Output port). In addition, during this RAM error, it is preferable not to execute at least the processing of "normal symbol management processing (step S091)-special electric motorized item management processing (step S095)" as processing related to the symbol variation display game. Since it is considered that it occurred during normal operation when playing a game, the special electric role management process may be configured to be executable even in the setting abnormality error. It should be noted that even if the processing in steps S411 to S413 is skipped, a normal pattern (for example, a normal fluctuation pattern only for setting abnormal errors, etc.) is forcibly forced as a loss without being controlled to the game inoperable state. The game processing may be advanced by transmitting a variation pattern designation command or a decoration symbol designation command based on the selection. Further, since the performance display monitor process (step S102) is a process belonging to the out-of-area memory side, the process may be either executable or not executable even if a setting error occurs.

<A. Special symbol during processing>
Next, the special symbol variation process (step S307) will be described.

  In the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the variation time T of the special symbol set in the special symbol combination product operation timer has elapsed. If the fluctuation time T has not elapsed (variation time T ≠ 0), the special symbol is in fluctuation, so the special symbol fluctuation process is ended without doing anything. If the variation time T of the special symbol has passed (variation time T = 0), a "variation stop command (BF01H)" indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as a production control command. . Upon receiving the change stop command, the effect control unit 24 recognizes that the change time of the special symbol has elapsed and the special symbol change display game has ended, and causes the decorative symbol in the change display to be stopped (fixed display). Thereby, with the end of the special symbol variation display game, the decorative symbol variation display game is also ended.

  Next, as the setting process at the time of the fluctuation stop of the special symbol, the special symbol finalization signal output time (for example, 100 ms) and the final display time (for example, 500 ms) are stored in the corresponding area of the area RAM. Switch to "Checking (03H)" (store 03H in the special symbol operation status), and store the OFF state in the special symbol variation flag. And, when the setting processing at the time of the fluctuation stop of the special symbol is finished, it escapes the processing during the special symbol fluctuation. The above “special symbol determination signal output time” is a margin time for securing an output time of a special symbol determination signal notifying that the special symbol has been determined and displayed from the frame external terminal board 21 to the hole computer HC. It is. Further, the "fixed display time" is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the variation display of the special symbol is ended and the stop display of the special symbol is performed.

  When the special symbol variation processing described above is exited, the special symbol display data update processing of FIG. 20 (step S309) is performed, the special symbol management processing is exited, and the processing proceeds to the special electric symbol management processing of step S095 of FIG.

<23. Processing during special symbol confirmation processing (processing at the time of fluctuation stop): Figure 23A and Figure 23B>
Next, the special symbol confirmation process (step S308) will be described. 23A and 23B are flowcharts showing the details of the processing during the special symbol confirmation time of FIG. 20 (step S308).

  In FIGS. 23A and 23B, CPU 201 first determines whether the special symbol combination product operation timer is zero or not (step S471). The "fixed display time" is set in the special symbol combination product operation timer here (refer to step S307 of the above special symbol variation processing). Until the special symbol character product operation timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the processing is ended during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

  If the special symbol combination product operation timer becomes zero (step S471: YES), it is determined that the special symbol variation display game this time is over, and the special symbol operation status is switched to "standby (01H)" (special symbol operation The 01H is stored in the status (step S472), and the gaming state number YJ (any value of 00H to 03H) corresponding to the current gaming state is stored in the gaming state determination area (W_YJTPTN) (step S473).

  Next, the big hit determination flag is acquired, and the state of the big hit determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the big hit judgment flag is ON state)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) (step S474: 5 AH), various settings are performed when the big hit symbol stops (step S475). Here, as shown in the figure, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the big hit judgment flag, the condition device operation flag is turned ON (5 AH is stored) on the assumption that the big hit is won, etc. Set to stateless.

(When the big hit judgment flag is OFF state)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S474: ≠ 5AH), then the small hit determination flag is obtained and the small hit determination flag state is determined (step S476) . If the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S476: ≠ 5AH), that is, if it is a "missing" that is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the process proceeds to step S478.

  On the other hand, when the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) (step S 476: 5 AH), various setting processing at the small hit symbol stop is performed (step S 477). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small hit determination flag and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small hit flag as various setting processing (small hit game start pre-processing) at the small hit symbol stop. When the various setting processes at the time of the above-mentioned small hitting design stop are finished, it advances to the processing of step S478.

  If it progresses to the process of step S478, it will be determined whether the special symbol time short circuit number counter (remaining time short circuit frequency) is zero (step S478). If the special symbol time minor counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol time number counter is not zero (step S 478: NO), the special symbol time number counter is decremented by 1 as a digest of the current variation number (step S 479), and the special symbol time number counter after subtraction is It is determined whether it is zero (step S480).

  If the special symbol time minor count counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), since the number of times the special symbol minor status end has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything. On the other hand, if the special symbol time minor counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), it is determined that the special symbol minor status has reached the end number, and the setting process at the time minor end is performed (step S481). Here, as the setting process at the time reduction end, the power control function is set to the OFF state, and the transition to the power non-supply state, that is, the transition setting process from the time reduction state to the normal state is executed. Thereby, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the “normal state” is selected. This step S481 processing works as a variation pattern selection condition switching means for switching control of the selection condition of the variation pattern (variation pattern selection mode) based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (the same applies to steps S486 and S491 described later) .

  When the setting processing at the time reduction end of step S481 is finished, next, gaming state information transmission processing is executed (step S482). Here, the state command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The information included in the status command here includes information indicating that the time saving status has ended. By this state command, the effect control unit 24 recognizes that the time saving state has ended in the current game, and recognizes that the game is to be shifted to the normal state from the next game. Thereby, when the next game (decorative symbol variation display game) is started, the effect control unit 24 performs control to switch to a background image (background effect) for the "normal effect mode", and as a firing position in the normal state , Performs production control processing for making "launch position guidance production (left-handed notification production)" to indicate aiming for the left flow down path 3b, and executes production control processing under the normal production mode from the next game Do. Since the effect control unit 24 can grasp that the time saving state has ended in the current game, the effect control unit 24 may switch to the “normal effect mode” at the end of the current game. For example, the background image (background effect) for the normal effect mode may be switched in this game (the same applies to step S487 described later).

  Next, it is determined whether the special symbol probability variation counter (the number of remaining STs) is zero or not (step S483). If the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488. On the other hand, when the special symbol probability variation number counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation number counter is decremented by 1 as the variation number digest of the special symbol this time (step S484), and the special symbol probability variation after the subtraction. It is determined whether the number counter is zero (step S485).

  If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), since the ST prescribed count has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol probability variation number counter after subtraction is zero (step S 485: YES), the setting number at the end of the probability variation is executed, assuming that the variation number of the special symbol has reached the ST prescribed number of times (65535 in this embodiment) (Step S486). Here, as shown in the figure, as the setting process at the end of the probability variation, the function related to the probability variation state is set to the OFF state. Thereby, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the “normal state” is selected. In the case of the latent state as well, similarly to the processing of the definite state, the ST prescribed number of times is monitored in steps S483 to S485, and the end timing of the latent state is managed in the setting process at the time of the final change.

  When the setting process at the end of the definite variation in step S486 is finished, next, a game state information transmission process is executed (step S487). Here, the state command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as in the above step S482, but the information included in the state command here includes information indicating that the probability change state has ended, and the effect control is performed by this state command The unit 24 grasps that the definite variation state has ended in the current game, and grasps that the next game is to be shifted to the normal state. Thereby, when the next game is started, the effect control unit 24 performs switching control to the background image (background effect) for the "normal effect mode", and executes effect control processing under the normal effect mode from the next game. . Since the effect control unit 24 can grasp that the probability change state has ended in the current game, the effect control unit 24 may switch to the “normal effect mode” at the end of the current game.

  When the game state information transmission process of step S487 is finished. Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation frequency counter is zero, that is, whether the game state transition prescribed frequency (in the present embodiment, the remaining CZ frequency) is zero (step S488). In the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 includes CZ management means for managing transition control to the CZ mode, and here, the number of remaining CZs is monitored. Also, in the present embodiment, as described above, 'CZ' and 'normal state' are in the 'normal' state of the internal gaming state, and '' latent in the 'latency state' of the internal gaming state. We are dealing with "state" and "CZ". That is, the latent state and the normal state have a common "CZ". Therefore, during the CZ period, the same variation pattern distribution table (variation pattern distribution table for CZ) can be selected regardless of the internal gaming state even though they are different internal gaming states. It is managed by a predetermined identifier (a variation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode)) whether or not the CZ variation pattern assignment table is selected. The same variation pattern is selected in both "CZ (normal)" and "CZ (latency)" according to the present embodiment, and the same effect can be generated. As a result, during the "CZ" period, a concealed state of the jackpot lottery probability is realized in terms of effect.

  If the special symbol variation frequency counter is zero (step S488: YES), the processing is ended during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol fluctuation frequency counter is not zero (step S488: NO), the special symbol fluctuation frequency counter is decremented by 1 as a digest of the current fluctuation frequency (step S489), and the special symbol fluctuation frequency counter after the subtraction. Is judged whether it is zero (step S490).

  If the special symbol variation frequency counter after subtraction is not zero (step S 490: NO), it is determined that the CZ mode has not ended, and the processing is ended during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

  If the special symbol variation frequency counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), it is determined that the CZ mode has ended, and transition setting processing of the gaming state is executed (step S491). Here, the transition setting process of the gaming state after the remaining CZ number of times has ended is executed. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 has a CZ management means for managing the CZ mode, and designates the game state of the transition destination according to whether the big hit lottery probability state at the end of CZ is low probability or high probability. Specifically, if it is the current CZ (normal), it shifts to the normal state, and if it is CZ (latent), it shifts to the latent state. Thereby, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the “normal state” or the “latency state” is selected.

  Next, gaming state information transmission processing is executed (step S492). Here, the state command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as in the above step S482, but the information included in the state command here includes information that the CZ has ended, and the effect control unit is made by this state command 24 grasps from the next game that "normal state" or "latent state" will be made. Thereby, when the next symbol variation display game is started, the effect control unit 24 performs control to switch to a background image (background effect) for the "normal effect mode" or a background image for the "latency effect mode", The effect control process under the effect mode is executed. Since the effect control unit 24 can grasp that the CZ mode has ended in the current game, the effect control unit 24 may switch the effect mode at the end of the current game. However, since the CZ mode is a game mode in which the gaming state (latency, normal) is concealed to give a sense of latent expectation, it is possible to immediately switch the background image in this game to maintain the expectation. It is preferable to switch to the next game without switching.

  As described above, when the special symbol variation start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process of FIG. 20 (step S309) is performed, and the special symbol management process (step S093) is exited. The process proceeds to (step S095).

<24. Special Electric Rolled Goods Management Process: Fig. 24>
Next, the special motorized prize management process (step S095) in FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the details of the special motorized prize management process of step S095.

  In FIG. 24, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the small hit middle flag (step S501). If the small hit middle flag is in the ON state (step S501: = 5 AH), the small hit process is performed (step S504), and the special electric role management process is exited. In this small hit process, a small hit game control process for controlling a series of operations of the special variation winning device 52 (the opening and closing control of the big winning opening 50) related to the small hit game, a small hit start at the start of the small hit game Command transmission processing including transmission of a command and transmission of a small hitting end command at the small hitting game end, transition processing to the CZ mode after small hitting game ending, etc. are performed.

  If the small hit middle flag is in the OFF state (step S501:? 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). If the condition device operation flag is OFF (step S 502: ≠ 5 AH), in this case, it is not in the small hit game (step S 501: ≠ 5 AH), neither in the big hit game, so nothing is done Exit the management process.

  If the condition device operation flag is in the ON state (step S502: = 5 AH), the processing according to the special electric combination product operation status (00H to 04H) is performed (step S503: special combination electric product status branch processing). The "special motorized work item operating status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variation winning device 52. This status value is changed according to the processing state, and the special motorized work item operating status storage area of the in-area RAM Stored in In the special motorized role operation status, "Start in process (00H)" to specify that it is in standby state before the big hit game start, and to specify that it is in standby state before the round game is started. 01H) ”, specifying that a round game is being executed“ in operation (02H) ”, specifying that it is being determined whether to continue the next round game“ continuing determination (03H) ” The "big hit end processing (04H)" is included to designate that the end processing at the end of the big hit game is under way.

  In the special electric combination product operation status branch process in step S503, the special electric combination product operation status value is “start processing in progress (00H)”, “operation start processing in progress (01H)”, “in operation (02H)”, “continuation determination ( The processes in steps S505 to S509 are executed in accordance with which of the status values "03H)" and "big hit end processing (04H)". By these processes, a hit game corresponding to various types of hits is realized.

<Big hit game control processing (step S505-S509)>
(9-1. Big hit start processing)
The big hit start process (step S505) will be described. At the time of the jackpot game start, the special electric role combination operation status is set to the initial value "start processing (00H)". Therefore, in the case of a big hit, the big hit start process is performed first.

  Here, as a setting process at the time of the big hit game start necessary when starting the big hit game, 5AH (ON state) is stored in the item continuous action device operation flag of the in-area RAM, and thereby the special electric role Control continuous operation (round game) to an acceptable state. Then, switch the special motorized combination product operation status to "in operation start processing (01H)" (store 01H in the special motorized combination product operation status), and set the number R of continuous number counters to manage the number of consecutive executions of the round game Stores 01H to be specified. Next, referring to the big hit start setting table (not shown), according to the special symbol determination data (big hit type), the "maximum number of rounds (prescribed round number)" corresponding to the current big hit in the corresponding area of the in-area RAM. , "Round display LED number (display data for round number display device 39c)" is stored, and "start interval time" is stored in the special symbol combination product operation timer. "Start interval time" is an interval section until the special fluctuation winning device 52 operates after the big hit is decided after the definite display time of the special symbol has passed (see step S471 in Fig. 23A), and the opening effect is It refers to the time width that defines the section.

  Next, a "big hit start command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and this big hit start processing is exited. The "big hit start command" includes, besides the role of instructing the start of the opening effect, information capable of specifying the current big hit type and the gaming state at the time of the big hit, and the big game is played in the production control unit 24. It is also used when determining a series of hit effects (opening effects corresponding to each jackpot type, effects during rounds, effects of round completion, ending effects, etc.) developed in the middle. Thus, the big hit game is started.

(9-2. Special motor part start operation processing)
Next, the special electric combination product operation start process (step S506) will be described.

  Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol combination product operation timer is zero. An interval time before the start of a round is set in the special symbol role thing operation timer here. As this interval time, in the first round (1R), the "start interval time" set in the big hit start process (step S505) is monitored, but this process (step S506) is passed from 2R onwards. When doing this, the "interval time before opening (interval time until the next round game is started)" is monitored. Since the round game of this time is not completed until this special symbol combination product operation timer becomes zero, the special electric combination product operation start process is exited without doing anything.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol character product operation timer is zero, that is, when the interval time before opening (in the case of the first R, the start interval time) has elapsed, according to the special symbol determination data (big hit type) and the current number of rounds The opening / closing operation pattern of the special winning opening 50 is set (big winning opening opening / closing operation setting processing). Here, solenoid control data for storing the special winning opening / closing operation time (maximum opening time) in the special symbol combination product operation timer and controlling the special winning opening solenoid 52c (large according to the number of rounds) Set the winning opening / closing operation pattern data). Further, along with the special winning opening opening start operation, a special winning opening opening command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The "big winning opening open command" includes round game start information and current round number information, and is used when the effect control unit 24 produces an effect during rounds corresponding to the number of rounds. Then, the special electric combination product operation status is switched to "in operation (02H)" (02H is stored in the special electric combination product operation status), and the special electric combination management process is exited. Thereby, the special winning opening 50 is opened to the upper limit of the special winning opening opening and closing operation time, and the round game of this time is started.

(9-3. Special electric part processing during processing)
Next, the special electric combination product operation process (step S507) will be described.

  Here, first, it is monitored whether or not the number of winning balls in the special winning opening 50 has reached the maximum winning number, and when the maximum winning number has been reached, the special symbol combination product operation timer is cleared. As a result, the timer value set in the special motorized product activation start process (step S506) is forced to zero, and when the maximum winning number is reached, the large winning opening 50 being opened is closed. It should be noted that nothing is done until the special symbol character product operation timer reaches zero, that is, until the special winning opening opening operation time (maximum opening time) elapses or the maximum winning number is reached, As it is, the special motorized part is out of processing during operation.

  If the special symbol combination product operation timer becomes zero, it is determined that the special electric combination product operation status is "continuing judgment (03H)" on the assumption that the current round game is over (the special electric combination product operation status is 03H Store the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) in the special symbol character product operation timer. The above-mentioned "remaining ball discharge time" refers to a spare time for discharging the remaining balls inside the big winning opening after the big winning opening is closed. In addition, with the special winning opening closing (round game end), the interval command between rounds is transmitted to the production control section 24, it exits the processing under the special electric bonus item operation. This "inter-round interval command" includes round game end information and the current number of rounds, and is used by the effect control unit 24 when the interval effect (inter-round interval effect) between the rounds until the next round is made to appear Be done. Exit the processing during the operation of the special motorized role.

(9-4. Special electric combination product operation continuation determination processing)
Next, the special electric combination product operation continuation determination process (step S508) will be described.

  Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol combination product operation timer is zero. Since the remaining ball discharging time (1980 ms) after closing the special winning opening is set in the special symbol role product operation timer here (see step S507), it is determined whether or not this remaining ball discharging time has elapsed. Be done. Until the above-mentioned special symbol character product operation timer becomes zero, it does nothing and exits this special electric character product operation continuation determination processing.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol character product operation timer becomes zero (remaining ball discharge time elapsed), acquire the consecutive number counter and whether the current number of rounds has reached the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) or not judge. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, the continuous number counter is incremented by 1 (+1) as processing when continuing the round game, and the "pre-opening interval time" is stored in the special symbol combination product operation timer, and special electric role Switch the object operation status to "in process of starting operation (01H)" (store 01H in the special motorized product operation status). On the other hand, when the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds, "end interval time" is stored in the special symbol role thing operation timer as various setting processing at the end of the prescribed number of rounds, and the special electric role thing operation status Is switched to “finishing process (04H)” (store 04H in the special motorized role operation status). In addition, the above-mentioned "end interval time" is an interval section until the big hit game is finished after the round game of the last round is finished and the remaining ball discharging time has passed, and the time which defines the ending effect section Point to the width.

  Then, the "big hit end command" instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and this special electric combination product operation continuation determination processing is exited. The "big hit end command" includes information on the current big hit type and the gaming state at the time of winning, that is, information capable of specifying the gaming state after the big hit game is over, and in the effect control unit 24, after the big hit game It is also used when deciding the rendering mode of. Thereby, the round game of the specified number of rounds is ended.

(9-5. Big hit end processing)
Next, the big hit end process (S509) will be described.

  Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol combination product operation timer is zero. Since the above-mentioned end interval time is set to the special symbol role thing operation timer here, it is determined whether or not this end interval time has elapsed here. Until the special symbol character product operation timer becomes zero, it does nothing and exits this big hit end processing.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol role thing operation timer becomes zero (end interval time elapsed), as various setting processing at the time of big hit end, transition setting processing for specifying the game state after the big hit game is executed. Here, each value of the transition state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process (step S 412 in FIG. 22) described above is set in the flag area or counter corresponding to various functions for specifying the game state. . Thereby, flags relating to various functions for specifying the gaming state are set to ON or OFF, and the gaming state after the big hit game is specified. For example, after a big hit game, when transitioning to a definite change state, a general electric utility open extension state flag ON, a normal symbol time short state flag ON, a normal symbol probability change state flag ON, a special symbol time short state flag ON, a special symbol definite change state The flag is ON, and the special symbol probability variation counter is set at 65536.

  Next, various setting processing at the end of the big hit is performed. Here, the various data (various flags and counters used in steps S505 to S509) used during the big hit game control process are cleared, and the game state notification LED data (the state notification data by the composite display device 38c) is updated. , Switch the special motorized work product operating status to "start processing (00H)" (store 00H as the special motorized work product operating status).

  When the big hit end process is finished, a series of control processes related to the big hit game are finished, and the present big hit game is finished.

<25. Performance display monitor process: Figure 25>
Next, the performance display monitor process (step S102) in FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the details of the performance display monitor process.

  In the present embodiment, the operation program and storage area of processing relating to performance display are defined in the out-of-area memory (second memory area). Therefore, the CPU 201 first sets the contents of the stack pointer SP inside the area in the SP save buffer of the outside area RAM (step S821), and sets the stack pointer SP of the outside area RAM (step S822).

  Subsequently, a test process for controlling a test shot signal terminal related to output processing of a test signal to the test shooting apparatus is executed (step S823). The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine in which the testing organization of a third party (designated testing organization based on the provisions of Article 20, Paragraph 5 of the Act on Regulation of Sex Business etc. and Adjustment of Business etc.) is appropriate. In response to a type test for determining whether or not it is possible, a "type test signal" capable of specifying the control state of the gaming machine can be output from the frame external terminal board 21. This type test signal is a signal that can not be used as a signal for the data counter DT or the hall computer HC, and is different from the outer end signal.

  In this trial shot test signal terminal management process, the 1-byte long external output buffer (corresponding to the trial shot test device information port 1 to 5) provided in the out-of-area RAM is the game information (test information) required for the type test. Acquire and supply the information (for example, flag ON / OFF information) to the 8-bit output port (test fire test equipment information terminal port 1 to 5) and externally output various test information as a type test signal It is supposed to be. In this embodiment, a flag, a counter value, and the like generated upon proceeding with the game processing are acquired from the RAM 203, and such information can be output from the test shot test device information terminal (test shot test device information terminal port 1 to 10). It has become.

  Next, the out-of-area RAM check process is executed to check whether or not the stored data related to the performance display of the out-of-area RAM is damaged or the like (step S824). The details of the out-of-area RAM check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the outside area LED management process is executed (step S825). In the out-of-area LED management process, output control of a control signal (dynamic lighting data) is performed on the performance indicator 99 based on display data created in step S831 described later. Here, the data set in the output buffer for identification display unit and the output buffer for base display unit set in step S831 at the time of the previous interrupt is output to each of the 7-segment displays 99a to 99d of the performance indicator 99 for identification Control display of the display unit and the data display unit. The output buffer for identification display unit is for storing the display pattern data of the base display unit, and the output buffer for base display unit is provided in the out-of-area RAM. Note that this area outside LED management process may be executed after a display update process (step S831) described later. Further, the output of the control signal to the performance indicator 99 may utilize the LED management process (step S098 in FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process.

(Processing relating to operation confirmation display: processing route from step S826 to S833)
Next, it is determined whether the operation confirmation timer is zero, that is, whether 5000 ms of the operation confirmation time set at the time of power on has elapsed (step S826). If the operation check timer is not zero (step S826: ≠ 0), the “operation check process” is performed to display the operation check (all blinks) when the power is turned on (step S833). The above operation check timer is set in the operation check timer setting process (step S034 in FIG. 6B) which is a part of the process at the time of power on. The operation confirmation timer is reset (5000 ms reset) when power is restored, and operation confirmation is continued until the operation confirmation time 5000 ms elapses, instead of restarting the operation confirmation display (full blinking) from the power-off state. Display will be done. The details of the operation confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Processing for normal display: processing route from step S826 to S827)
On the other hand, when the operation confirmation timer is zero (step S826: = 0), the normal display process (steps S828 to S831) for displaying the performance information on the performance display 99 is determined as the end of the operation confirmation display. I will go.

  First, 00H is set in the normal state determination flag (step S827). The normal state determination flag is a flag for specifying whether or not it is a “measurement target section” for measuring performance information (base value in the case of the present embodiment). In the case of this embodiment, when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that it is a measurement target section (during normal state), and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), measurement is not performed. Indicates that the target section (game state other than the normal state) is.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal state (step S 828). If it is the normal state (step S 828: YES), the normal state determination flag ((R_TUJFG) is ON (5AH) (Step S829), which specifies that the section is a measurement target, but if it is not in the normal state (step S828: NO), nothing is done, that is, the normal state determination flag is in the OFF state ( The process proceeds to step S 830. Therefore, in this case, the normal state determination flag is maintained in the OFF state, and it is designated that the current gaming state is the measurement non-target section.

  By the way, a storage area for managing the same data as the current gaming state information (for example, gaming state number YJ) managed in the in-area RAM is provided in the out-of-area RAM, and even in the out-of-area RAM, the current gaming state information (The gaming state number YJ) can be managed, and in the above-mentioned step S 828, the gaming state information (the gaming state number YJ) of the out-of-area RAM is acquired, and whether the current gaming state is the normal state or not Can be determined. However, in such a configuration, although the gaming state information is managed by the in-area RAM, duplicate identical data are managed by the out-of-area RAM, and the out-of-area memory is squeezed indiscriminately As a result, the control load is increased, and as a result, the memory area of the entire RAM 203 is compressed. In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, access to the in-area RAM is not prohibited when executing the process relating to the out-of-area memory (the process relating to performance display and the process relating to the shooting test). It is preferable to reduce the amount used as much as possible because the capacity of the RAM is strictly limited due to the demand. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the gaming state number YJ on the in-area RAM side is directly acquired without providing a storage area for managing the current gaming state information (gaming state number YJ) in the out-of-area RAM. A determination process of whether or not in the normal state is performed.

  Next, switch input data setting processing is executed (step S 830). In the switch input data setting process, based on the switch input data acquired in step S083, input data regarding the presence or absence of a winning on each winning opening related to performance display is created and set (step S830). The data created here is, in the performance display monitor tabulation division process in the main control side main process (step S043 in FIG. 6B) described above, the number of normal payouts, the number of normal outs, the base value, all states Used to count the number of outs.

  Next, to create and set LED display data to be displayed on the performance display 99 based on the base value obtained on the above-mentioned performance display monitor tabulation division process (step S043) on the main processing side (in the infinite loop process) The "display data update process" is executed (step S831). The data created here is output-processed in the area outside LED management process (step S 825) at the next interruption. The details of the display data update process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the content of the stack pointer SP which has been evacuated is restored, and the performance display monitor process is exited (step S832). Thereby, display of performance information of the performance display 99, specifically, real-time display of the current base value (real-time base value) and the previous history information (history base value) is realized.

The performance display monitor process of FIG. 25 described above functions as an information display control means for controlling the information display means (performance indicator 99) based on the information display control program.
In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a gaming information storage area (W_YJTPTN) capable of storing gaming state data (playing state number YJ) capable of specifying the current gaming state is provided in the area RAM of the RAM 203 On the other hand, a RAM outside the area of the RAM 203 is provided with a specific information storage area (R_TUJFG) capable of storing specific data indicating a specific gaming state (for example, a normal state) (step S829). The information display control means determines that the current gaming state is a specific gaming state (normal state) based on the gaming state data (gaming state number YJ) stored in the gaming information storage area (W_YJTPTN) of the area RAM. Specific information storage means for storing the specific data in the specific information storage area (R_TUJFG) when it is determined by the determination means (step S 828) whether or not there is a specific gaming state by the determination means (Step S829), calculating means (S043, S830 in FIG. 6B) for calculating specific information (base value) regarding the game result based on the specific data, and information regarding the specific information calculated by the calculating means Display control means (S043 in FIG. 6B, S in FIG. 25) for display control of the base value on the information display means (performance indicator 99) Configured to include 25, S831 and), the.

<26. Out-of-area RAM check processing: Figure 26>
Next, the out-of-area RAM check process (step S824) in FIG. 25 will be described. FIG. 26A is a flowchart showing details of the out-of-area RAM check processing according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 26B is a flowchart showing a modification of the out-of-area RAM check processing. This out-of-area RAM check process is a process (common process) executed not only during the performance display monitor process of FIG. 25 but also during the performance display monitor tabulation division process of FIG. 6B (step S043).

  In this out-of-area RAM check process, a check is made as to whether or not the process relating to the performance display is correctly executed (step S841), and a check as to whether or not an abnormality (data corruption etc.) has occurred in the data of the RAM area related to the performance display. If there is an abnormality, data initialization processing for clearing the measurement data is executed (step S843).

  In FIG. 26, the CPU 201 first determines whether the check data is the normal value (AA 55H) of the initial value (step S841). The check data is data to be monitored in a process of comparing and determining the total number of out-of-states R and the number of out-of-normal times S (out-of-balls confirmation process: not shown) Also in the normal case where the out number S is large (R <S), it is determined that the counting abnormality has occurred, and “00H” indicating that is set in the check data. If the check data is not the normal value (AA 55 H) (step S 841: NO), the process proceeds to step S 843 to execute data initialization processing described later.

  On the other hand, if the check data is a normal value (step S841: YES), it is then determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the count data (step S842). The occurrence of an abnormality in the count data is, for example, when the switch input data indicates an abnormal value, or when the arithmetic processing related to the performance information is not properly executed. As a case where the arithmetic processing is not correctly performed, there may be mentioned, for example, a case where arithmetic processing (ball number addition processing) for a sensor related to calculation of performance information is not correctly performed. The sensors to be counted in the present embodiment are five types of sensors: an upper starting opening sensor 34a, a lower starting opening sensor 35a, a general winning opening sensor 43a, a special winning opening sensor 52a, and an OUT monitoring switch 49a. Therefore, whether "ball number addition processing" for all these sensors, specifically, winning ball number addition processing (not shown) and out ball number addition processing (not shown) were executed correctly It is determined whether or not.

  The ball number addition process is executed in the performance display monitor aggregation division process (step S043) in the main process shown in FIG. 6B, as described above. In this ball number addition process, first, the presence or absence of winning is checked in order for the four sensors of the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the special winning opening sensor 52a. If the winning is confirmed, the winning ball number is added, and the winning ball number adding process is performed. Every time the processing is completed, 1 is added to the sensor detection number counter which counts the number of times of processing. Go (Sensor detection frequency counter +1). Specifically, first, the presence or absence of winning of the upper starting opening sensor 34a of the first counting target sensor is checked, and when the winning is confirmed, the number of winning balls of the upper starting opening is added (first winning balls number Addition processing) When the addition processing of this time is completed, 1 is added to the sensor detection number counter, and the counter value is updated to "01H". Subsequently, the presence or absence of a winning of the lower starting opening sensor 35a of the second counting target sensor is checked, and when the winning is confirmed, the number of winning balls of the lower starting opening is added (second winning ball number adding process). When the addition processing of this time is completed, the sensor detection number counter is incremented by 1, and the counter value is updated to "02H". Likewise, the winning ball number addition process (third and fourth winning ball number adding process) for the third and fourth count target sensors, the general winning opening sensor 43a and the big winning opening sensor 52a, is performed. The process is sequentially performed, and each time the addition process is finished, the sensor detection frequency counter is incremented by one to update the counter value. Therefore, after the fourth prize ball number addition processing for the fourth winning opening sensor 52a is finished, the sensor detection number counter is updated to "04H". Finally, out ball number addition processing for the OUT monitoring switch 49a is performed, and when the out ball number addition processing is completed, the sensor detection number counter is cleared to zero (00H). As described above, the first to fourth prize ball number addition processing and the out-of-ball number addition processing are performed as one cycle, and this is executed for each interrupt.

  Therefore, the range of possible values for the sensor detection number counter is "00H" to "04H", and when the ball number addition processing (last out ball number addition processing) is correctly completed, the sensor detection number counter is "00H" Should be set. However, when this value becomes a value other than "00H" to "04H" due to some trouble, or when starting the winning ball number addition process for the upper starting opening sensor 34a of the first counting target sensor, "00H In cases other than “1”, etc., it can be determined that the arithmetic processing is not correctly executed, that is, the count data is not correct due to an abnormality. Therefore, in the process of step S842, if the count data is valid (in step S842: within the range), the data initialization process of step S843 is skipped and it is determined that the operation is normal. .

  On the other hand, if the count data is not valid (step S842: out of range), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and data initialization processing is executed (step S843). In the data initialization process, "AA55H", which is the initial value (normal value), is set in the check data, and the extra RAM area (performance display storage area, measurement information storage area, etc.) related to performance display is cleared. Clear the display data inside. However, only the measurement information storage area may be cleared in the RAM area related to the performance display. The reason is that the data stored in the performance display storage area usually stores the previous base value data (if this is the first measurement, a specific value for the test section is stored (data This data is considered to be saved as the result of previous processing correctly, and the operation confirmation timer may also be cleared. Even if the data initialization process is executed, a new base value is calculated only by displaying an error on the performance indicator 99 and without executing special error processing such as stopping the game or not measuring a new base value. The subsequent processing (steps S824 to S829 in FIG. 25) is performed.

  When the data initialization process of step S843 is executed, error notification (base value count error notification) may be performed over a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes). In this case, the performance indicator 99 can be displayed in a display mode dedicated to errors. In addition, even while an error is being displayed, it is possible to measure a new base value (the number of normal payouts, the number of normal outs, the count of all outs, and the calculation of a base). The error display period may be a predetermined time, or a predetermined gaming period, for example, the number of normal payouts, the number of regular outs, or the total number of outs being a predetermined number (errors canceled: for example, 100). It may be a period until it reaches, or a period until a new normal state arrives (a period until a new measurement target section comes). Of course, new measurement may not be started during the error display period, and new measurement may be started after the end of the error display. Further, the condition for eliminating the above-described base value count error notification may be power on again.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the RAM area related to the performance display is checked in the performance display monitor tabulation division process (step S043 in FIG. 6B) and the performance display monitor process (step S102 in FIG. 17). In this case, after initializing the extra-area RAM area (measurement information storage area) storing the measurement data necessary to calculate at least the performance information, the measurement is started from the initial state. Further, the out-of-area RAM area related to the performance display is not the target of the RAM check at the time of power on, that is, the target of the RAM initialization process of step S023 of FIG. 6A and step S031 of FIG. Therefore, even if a problem occurs in the contents of the in-area RAM, the data relating to the performance display is not initialized (cleared) together, and only the data relating to the normal game progress is independently initialized. . Therefore, as long as there is no problem in the memory contents of the RAM area related to the performance display, the backup function operates normally, and as long as the gaming machine operates normally, it is permanent even in days or even years. The data can be stored, and it becomes possible to hold performance information and display performance information over a long period of time.

(Modification of out-of-area RAM check processing: FIG. 26 (B))
The out-of-area RAM check process of FIG. 26B can be configured as follows.

  26B sets the operation confirmation timer of step S844 to 5000 ms in the process of clearing the operation confirmation timer to zero in the data initialization processing of step S843 in the configuration of the out-of-area RAM check processing of FIG. 26A. Processing is added. The other processing contents are the same as those in FIG.

  In the configuration of FIG. 26 (B), as shown in the figure, when it is determined that the determination result in step S841 is NO and the determination result in step S842 is out of range due to a defect such as data, the data initialization process in step S843 is checked. The RAM area (performance display storage area, measurement information storage area, etc.) related to data and performance display is cleared, the display data currently displayed is cleared, and the operation confirmation timer is cleared. Then, 5000 ms is reset to the operation confirmation timer (step S844). If the operation confirmation timer is cleared in the data initialization process, a different timer value (for example, 10000 ms) may be reset in place of the normal 5000 ms in step S844. Therefore, in the present modification, when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the out-of-area RAM, the operation confirmation display is executed again for a predetermined time after the initialization of the RAM. This point is different from the configuration of FIG. 26A in which the operation confirmation display is executed only at the time of power failure recovery. When the operation confirmation timer is not set again in this modification, when the data initialization process is performed, the display is forcibly terminated if the operation confirmation display is being performed. After that, the performance display 99 displays the real-time base value and the history base value as usual.

<27. Operation check process: Fig. 27>
Next, the operation confirmation process (step S833) in FIG. 25 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the details of the operation confirmation process.

  In FIG. 27, the CPU 201 first subtracts one from the operation check timer and adds one to the lighting timer (steps S851 and S852).

  Next, it is determined whether the blink switching timing has arrived (step S853). In the present embodiment, the turn-off period and the turn-on period are repeated, for example, in a predetermined cycle of 300 ms during the operation confirmation display. The blink switching timing is managed by the lighting timer. In the present embodiment, the lighting timer is incremented by one every 4 ms of interruption. If the switching timing has a cycle of 300 ms, it can be determined that the blinking switching timing has arrived depending on whether or not the value of the lighting timer is "75". If the blinking switching timing has not come (step S853: NO), nothing is performed, that is, the current on / off state is maintained, and the operation confirmation processing is exited.

  On the other hand, when the blinking switching timing has come (step S853: YES), the lighting timer is cleared (step S854), and the update period counter is updated (step S855). The update cycle counter is used as a counter for determining whether it is lighting or blinking. For example, if the update cycle counter is an 8-bit counter that cycles through the range of 0 to 255 by incrementing processing, lighting control is performed when the least significant bit of the value of the update cycle counter is '0', In certain cases, it is possible to perform blinking control such as turning off control. In addition, not only this but lighting blink control may utilize a well-known control method.

  Next, with reference to the update cycle counter, it is determined whether the value is "0" or "1" (step S856). In the case of the present embodiment, at the start of the operation confirmation display, the update period counter is controlled to be zero, and the performance indicator 99 is controlled to be fully lit. Therefore, when the process first passes this process, the value of the update cycle counter is updated to "1" in the process of step S856, so the process proceeds to step S857 (step S856: = 1), and the identification display Turn-off data, ie, "0000H" is set in each of the part output buffer and the base display part output buffer (steps S857 and S858). These turn-off data are directly written to each output buffer without referring to a data table or the like. As a result, the lighting period ends and the light-off period occurs.

  On the other hand, when the next blink switching timing arrives (step S853: YES) and the update cycle counter is “0” (step S856: = 0), the process proceeds to step S859, and the output buffer for identification display unit Lighting data, that is, "FFFFH" is set in the base display section output buffer (steps S859 and S860). These lighting data are also directly written to each output buffer without referring to a data table or the like. As a result, the lighting period ends and the light-off period occurs. Thus, the turn-off period ends and the turn-on period occurs. In the present embodiment, when performing operation confirmation display, for example, simply by setting a predetermined data value in each output buffer without referring to the LED data table as shown in FIG. 34 used for display control at the normal time. Since there is, it is possible to realize the operation confirmation display (all blinks) by simple processing.

  By the above operation check processing, all blinking (operation check display) of performance indicator 99 repeating all lighting and all turning off is performed for a predetermined time (for 5000 ms), and operation check of performance indicator 99 is possible visually. . If the performance indicator 99 does not display a normal operation confirmation display, for example, if a part of the 7-segment display remains unlit due to disconnection or the like, appropriate measures such as component replacement may be performed.

  The performance display monitor tabulation division process (S043 in FIG. 6B) is also performed during the operation check process, and at least the count process (such as sphere number addition process) necessary for calculating the base value is performed. As a result, it is possible to accurately reflect on the base value displayed after the operation confirmation display, even for the winning balls and the out balls during the operation confirmation. However, since the base value is not displayed during the operation check display, at least counting processing may be performed in the performance display monitor tabulation division process (step S043) during operation check, but the calculation of the base value is performed for 5000 ms during the operation check display. May be configured to perform. In addition, a judgment process of judging whether or not an abnormality occurs in the performance indicator 99 is provided during the operation confirmation process, and if an abnormality occurs, a dedicated error command (operation confirmation display error command) A process for sending may be provided at 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives the operation confirmation display error command, it is possible to notify that the performance display 99 has an abnormality using the effect means. For example, together with the alarm sound, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays an effect image such as “an error has occurred in the performance display 99”. Thus, for example, there is no risk of missing a defect such as a decimal point DP hard to confirm visually.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the operation check of the performance indicator 99 is executed in the processing after the merging point (step S033), the setting display by the setting indicator 97 is performed during the operation check. Setting display is not performed (see FIG. 6B). That is, during setting confirmation or setting change, the operation confirmation display is not executed, and the base display is not executed. Thereby, the overlapping display period of the performance indicator 99 and the setting indicator 97 does not occur, and it is possible to prevent the confirmation operation from being complicated due to the overlapping display.

<28. Display data update process: Fig. 28>
Next, the display data update process (step S831) in FIG. 25 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing details of the display data update process.

  In FIG. 28, the CPU 201 first determines whether the display period of the base value is a test period, a first measurement period (N = 1), or a subsequent measurement period (N ≧ 2), or a real time basis. According to any of a plurality of display sections, such as whether it is a value display section or a history base value display section, from the "identification display section LED data table" shown in FIG. Are obtained (step S871), and set in the identification display unit output buffer (step S872). In this embodiment, two types of base value output periods of 'first base value output period' for displaying real-time base values and 'second base value output period' for displaying history base values are provided, and these are set every 5000 ms. It is supposed to switch to In the identification display unit LED data table, as shown in FIG. 34A, display pattern data (upper “01111100B” ('b' display) corresponding to the identification display of “bL.” Indicating the real-time base value. Display pattern data (upper "01111100B" ('b) (for 7 segments), lower "10111000B" (for' 7 'segment for' L 'display) and display of identification display section of "b6." Showing history base value The 'display 7 segment' and the lower '11111 101 B' ('6 segment' display 7 segment)) are stored.

  Also, in accordance with the base value at that time (base value during real time measurement), display pattern data for base display unit is acquired from the decimal value LED data table (step S873), and set in the base display unit output buffer. (Step S874). In the decimal value LED data table, as shown in FIG. 34B, display pattern data of 1 byte length corresponding to ten kinds of numerical values of 0 to 9 are stored. For example, if the first base value output period for displaying the real time base value and the first base value at that time is "35", the display value of the decimal digit LED data table is displayed as "10" display data "3 “01001111B” corresponding to “1” is acquired, and “01101101B” corresponding to “5” is acquired as the display data of the first place, and is set in the output buffer for the base display unit.

  The performance display 99 after all flashing (operation check) is finished by the above display update processing is a performance that the real-time base value and the previous history base value are switched and displayed periodically (for example, every 5000 ms) A display mode can be realized.

(Specific example of display mode of performance indicator 99 after power on: FIG. 35)
Figure 35 shows the performance during various time periods during RAM initialization (RAM clear), setting change, RAM abnormality (setting value data abnormality, backup flag abnormality), setting confirmation, backup recovery, etc. It shows a display mode of the display 99. However, FIG. 35 shows one of the four 7-segment displays 99a to 99d of the performance display 99 (for example, the 7-segment display 99a (setting / performance display 7 segments)) as the setting display 97. The display mode when it is configured to function as is illustrated.

  In the present embodiment, except for the RAM error (when the determination results in steps S015 and S016 in FIG. 6A are NO), the “setting change processing route”, the “RAM clear processing route”, and the “setting confirmation processing route” have already been described. After the “backup recovery processing route” is completed, the main control unit side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 17) is activated and the operation confirmation period is started, and the performance indicator 99 blinks for 5 seconds (confirmation display). After that, display of the base value is performed (steps S033 to S036, S043 in FIG. 6B, steps S825, S831, S833, etc. in FIG. 25). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35, during RAM clear notification effects such as “under RAM clear” at the time of RAM clear, during effects such as “setting change in progress” during setting change (during setting change operation period ), “RAM error at the time of RAM abnormality, please turn on the power again and change the setting value”, etc. The effect is on before the start of the operation check period (during the power on wait period). Therefore, the display of the performance indicator 99 is all off or not displayed. However, during the setting confirmation effect (during the setting confirmation period) and during the setting change effect (during the setting change operation period), one of the four 7-segment LEDs of the performance indicator 99 functions as the setting indicator 97. In order to do this, the set value information is displayed (see the column of "set value display" shown). In the case of a RAM error, the game is put in a power-on wait state (steps S017 to S20 in FIG. 6A), and the game operation is stopped until the power is turned on again (interrupt processing does not start, performance display The monitor aggregation division process (step S043) is not executed either, and all of the performance indicators 99 remain unlit (not displayed) (see the column of power supply reactivation display shown).

  In addition, in all cases during the waiting for waiting customer effect (during waiting for customer display) after each processing, in all cases during RAM clearing, setting change, setting confirmation and backup restoration, all of 5 seconds pertaining to the operation confirmation display After the end of the blinking, the display of the base value is started. In addition, at the time of setting change, since all flashing for 5 seconds starts at the end of setting change operation, when setting change completion effects such as "setting has been changed" continue for 5 seconds or more, the setting change While the effect is complete, the entire blinking for 5 seconds is over, and the display of the base value is started. Therefore, in this case, an overlapping display period of the setting change completion effect and the base value display occurs. If other effects such as, for example, “Recovery completed display etc.” (not shown) displaying “Resume from power failure restart your game” at the time of backup recovery is also restored if it lasts for 5 seconds or more While the effect is complete, the entire blinking for 5 seconds is over, and the display of the base value is started.

  However, the RAM error notification related to the time of clearing the RAM is executed with the highest priority over other notification effects, and even if the effect control command is transmitted from the main control unit 20 during the execution of the RAM error notification, the RAM error notification As long as is not finished (after 30 seconds of the RAM clear notification timer), other effects are not executed. If the RAM clear notification timer (see step S 030 in FIG. 6B) has not elapsed, the process is not further progressed, and all of the RAM error notifications remain unlit (not displayed). However, if the RAM clear notification timer is configured to simply count the RAM error notification time and proceed with the subsequent processing, all blinks for 5 seconds from the start of the RAM error notification and then the display of the base value is started. become.

[Second Embodiment: FIG. 37, FIG. 38]
Next, a modified example (second embodiment) of the setting confirmation process (step S027 in FIG. 6B) according to the above-described first embodiment will be described. FIG. 37 shows a flowchart showing details of setting confirmation processing according to the second embodiment. Further, FIG. 38 shows, as a comparative example, the source code of the setting confirmation process according to the first embodiment (Example 1) in addition to the source code of the setting confirmation process according to the second embodiment (modification). Further, in FIG. 38, in order to facilitate understanding of the present embodiment, word lengths (number of bytes) corresponding to mnemonics and step numbers in FIG. 13 are attached.

  In the second embodiment, in short, in the setting confirmation process, a setting confirmation-during command that can specify the current setting value is generated and transmitted. In this point, unlike the first embodiment, the present embodiment is different from the configuration in which the setting confirmation in-progress command not including the current setting value information is transmitted. The second embodiment will be described in detail below. In FIGS. 37 and 38, the description of the same components (the same symbols as in the first embodiment) (the same reference numerals) as the first embodiment is omitted to avoid the redundant description unless it is particularly necessary, and differs from the first embodiment. The explanation will focus on points.

  Referring to FIGS. 37 and 38, CPU 201 first sets the set value data of the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) of the in-area RAM in the W register (Sk1). Thus, the current setting value Nc is obtained (step S932).

  Next, during setting confirmation, data for setting display to be displayed on the setting display unit 97 is created (step S938), the data is output controlled, and the current setting value Nc is displayed on the setting display unit 97 (step S939). . Here, in the present embodiment, as for the performance indicator 99 (7-segment indicator 99a to 99d), drive control is performed by the dynamic lighting method as in the first embodiment, but the setting indicator 97 is by the static lighting method. Drive control is adopted.

  The processes in steps S938 to S939 will be described according to the program shown in FIG. 38B. First, the head address of “setting display data table (D_7SEGDATA)” in FIG. 32B is set in the HL register pair. (Sk2). Next, the content of the address designated by the value (HL + W) obtained by adding the value of the W register to the value of the HL register is set in the A register (Sk3). For example, if the current setting value is 3, the value (offset value) of the W register is '02H', so the address obtained by adding 02H to the start address of the setting display data table designates 01001111B ('3' LED display pattern) '(see FIG. 32B) is set in the A register. The Sk2 to Sk3 correspond to the process of step S938. The method (Sk2 to Sk3) for creating setting display data according to the present embodiment is basically the same as the method (SPm10 to SPm13) for creating setting display data in the first embodiment.

  Then, the value of the A register acquired at Sk3 is output to the LED data port 3 (P_LED3) for the setting display 97 (Sk4, step S939). As a result, the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 97.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 37, after finishing the processing of step S939, a setting confirmation command corresponding to the current setting value is created (step S930A). Here, first, the reference command data "E020H" is set in the DE register pair (Sk5), and 8-bit addition operation of the value (20H) of the E register and the value of the W register (current setting data) is performed. The value is updated to obtain command data according to the current setting value (Sk6). Then, the value of the DE register pair after calculation is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by command transmission processing (_CMDOUT) (Sk7, step S931). Briefly speaking, the command data during setting confirmation corresponding to the current setting value Nc (setting value data) is acquired (steps S930A, Sk5 to Sk6), and the acquired command data is used as the effect control unit 24. Processing content to be transmitted to the (step S931, Sk7).

  As described above, the set value data has values “00H to 05H” defined as data specifying the set values 1 to 6, and the command data “E020H (set 1) is set corresponding to the set value data. ) To E025H (setting 6) 'are defined. Therefore, if the current setting value data is added to the command data serving as the reference, that is, the setting confirming command data “E020H” corresponding to setting 1, “setting corresponding to the current setting value Nc (setting value data)” Command data can be obtained during confirmation. As a result, the setting confirmation-in-progress command according to the present embodiment includes information (setting value information) that can specify the current setting value, and this command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 to obtain the effect control unit 24. Can grasp the current setting value, and can produce an effect during setting confirmation related to the setting value. For example, during the setting confirmation period, the present setting value can be notified by using the rendering means. This point is largely different from the first embodiment in which the setting confirmation in-progress command not including the current setting value information is transmitted.

  Subsequently, “00000010 B” of the A register is output to the external terminal port 2 (P_GAIBU 2) (step S 937, Sk 8). Thus, a signal during setting confirmation is output from the frame external terminal board 21 to the hole computer HC.

  Next, the first power supply abnormality check process (_VDDCHK) of FIG. 8 is called and executed by the CALLV instruction (steps S933 and Sk9).

  Next, it is determined whether the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94) is in the ON state (steps S934 to S936 and Sk10 to Sk11). Specifically, 8-bit data (see FIG. 6A) of input port 1 (P_INPT1) is read into register A (Sk10), the logical product (AND) of mask data "00000001B" is taken, and it corresponds to the setting key switch signal Mask bits other than the 0th bit (Sk11). These Sk10 to Sk11 have the same contents as SPm5 to SPm7 according to the first embodiment already described, and when the setting key switch signal is in the ON state, the value of the A register becomes '00000001B', and the setting key switch When the signal is in the OFF state, the value of the A register is '00000000B'.

  Here, the 'JRS' instruction of the special jump instruction of Sk12 will be described. In this embodiment, a 1-byte long JRS instruction is defined as a type of JR instruction. The 'JRS' instruction has a 5-bit relative jump function in the range of -16 to +15 according to the jump status flag JF. The JRS instruction is a 5-bit relative jumpable jump instruction in the range of -16 to +15, while the JR instruction is an 8-bit relative jumpable jump instruction in the range of -128 to +127. For byte length, JRS instruction is 'Instruction 3 bits, 5-bit relative jump total 1 byte', while JR instruction is instruction '1 byte, 8-bit relative jump total 2 bytes' . Therefore, when the relative address jumps within the range of -16 to +15, the program capacity can be reduced by 1 byte by using the JRS instruction. The jump status flag JF takes a value associated with the carry flag CF and the zero flag ZF. Specifically, in the case of an LD instruction, an IN instruction, an OUT instruction, an AND instruction, an OR instruction, an XOR instruction, etc. Has the same value as the zero flag ZF, and in the case of an ADD instruction, CP instruction, etc., the same value as the carry flag CF.

  In the case of Sk12, the process branches in accordance with the result of the logical operation by the AND instruction, so the operation of the mnemonic "JRS F, Label" (here, Label = SYSTEM_700) is PC when "ZF = JF = 0". ← Defined by "Label".

  Therefore, if the value of A register is '00000001B (setting key switch signal is ON)' according to the operation (logical product) by Sk11, 0 is set to the zero flag ZF and 0 is set to the jump status flag JF (ZF = JF = 0: FAULT), jump to SYSTEM_700 by the JRS instruction of Sk12. That is, if the setting key switch signal is in the ON state (step S936: YES), the process jumps to the first power supply abnormality check process (_VDDCHK) in step S933 and steps S933 to S936 until the setting key switch signal is turned off. Repeat the process of.

  On the other hand, if the value of A register is '00000000B (setting key switch signal is OFF)' according to the operation (logical AND) by Sk11, 1 is set to the zero flag ZF and 1 is set to the jump status flag JF (ZF = JF ≠ 0: TRUE), Do not jump to SYSTEM_700 by the JRS instruction of Sk12, and the following Sk13 is executed to set the value of A register (A = '00000000B') to LED data port 3 (P_LED3) , External terminal port 2 (P_GAIBU2), and clear each of them to zero (Sk13, Sk14). That is, when the setting key switch signal is turned OFF (step S936: NO), the setting confirmation display by the setting indicator 97 is ended (turned off), and the signal during setting confirmation is stopped (step S940, S941).

Next, "27H" is set in the E register (Sk15). As a result, the value of the DE register pair is updated to "E027H" to obtain setting confirmation end command data (step S942; see Sk5 for the value of the D register). In the case of the present embodiment, the setting confirmation end command is not “E022H” but “E027H”, but this is because the setting confirming command takes E020H (setting 1) to E025H (setting 6), for convenience. , "E027H". And this "E027H (setting confirmation end command data)
Is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by command transmission processing (_CMDOUT) (Sk16, step S943). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting confirmation end command, the effect during setting confirmation is ended. This means that a series of setting confirmation periods have ended.

  In the second embodiment described above, in response to settings 1 to 6, commands (E020H (setting 1) to E025H (setting 6)) different in setting confirmation are generated and transmitted. It is useful in that the effect control unit 24 can be notified of the current setting value. Specifically, the effect control unit 24 can be used when producing effects corresponding to the current setting value.

  Further, if the second embodiment is configured to create and transmit a setting confirmation command common to all settings as in the first embodiment, “ADD E, of Sk 6 according to the second embodiment. This can be realized by deleting the “W” instruction and changing the “LDE, 022H” instruction of Sk15 to the “INC E” instruction of SPm 19 according to the first embodiment. In this case, it is possible to reduce the program capacity for three bytes of “two-byte reduction by deletion of Sk6 + one-byte reduction by change from‘ Sk15 (three bytes) to SPm19 (two bytes) ”.

(Modification 1 of the second embodiment)
Although the second embodiment has described the configuration in which the setting confirmation command that can specify the current setting value is transmitted, one or more other commands (a “power restart command” related to a RAM error, Similarly, a configuration may be adopted in which the current setting value is also transmitted as a specifiable command (hereinafter referred to as a “setting information command”), which is also used after the game is started. As a matter of course, it is a matter of course that command data is defined such that command data in which one command data and another command data do not overlap is created except in the case where no problem occurs.

  A case where another command is made to function as a setting information command will be described. Here, in order to avoid repeated description, the setting change in progress command (BA5AH) will be described as an example. Here, in order to simplify the description, it is assumed that reference command data (command data corresponding to setting 1) of the command is "BA5AH", and BA5AH to BA5FH are defined as command data corresponding to settings 1 to 6 explain.

In the case of the command under setting change, the process contents corresponding to the processes of steps S021 to S022 in FIG. 6A may be changed to the processes corresponding to steps S932 and steps S930A to S931. In particular,
(1) Acquire the current setting value (see Sk1, step S932).
(2) Next, reference command data (BA5AH) corresponding to setting 1 is acquired (see Sk5).
(3) The current setting value (one of 00H to 05H) is added to the reference command data (BA5AH), and the setting change-in-progress command data (BA5AH (setting 1) to BA5FH) according to the setting value. Obtain (set 6) (see Sk6).
(4) The command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by command transmission processing (_CMDOUT) (see Sk7). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting change in-progress command including the setting value information, the effect control unit 24 can grasp that the setting is being changed and the setting value before the setting change. It is possible to simultaneously display character information such as “The previous setting value is setting 3” and the like on the liquid crystal display device 36 together with the character information “setting is being changed”.

(Modification 2 of the second embodiment)
Also, during the setting change management process (step S 023 in FIG. 6A), each time a setting change operation is performed, a command (hereinafter referred to as “the setting value after the change operation” (provisional setting value before setting determination)) The “change operation command” can be configured to be transmittable. Such a command can also be said to be an aspect of the setting information command in that it includes setting value information.

  Since such a change operation time command may transmit the change time operation command after the operation of the setting change switch 95, as a preferred embodiment, abnormality check of the setting data is performed after the setting change operation confirmation (step S911: YES). After completion of the process (after the process of step S914 in FIG. 10) to the completion of the setting change operation (before the process of step S916), a change operation command is created and transmitted. The processing content for creating a change operation command is basically the same as the setting confirmation command according to the second embodiment or the processing content of the first modification described above. Specifically, for example, the processing content is as follows. Here, in order to simplify the description, reference command data (command data corresponding to setting 1) of the change operation command is defined as “BC20H”, and BC20H to BC25H are determined as command data corresponding to settings 1 to 6 Explain as.

(1) After finishing the process of step S914, the setting value is acquired (see Sk1). That is, the provisional setting value (setting value before setting determination) after the setting change operation is acquired.
(2) Next, reference command data (BC20H) corresponding to setting 1 is acquired (see Sk5).
(3) The current set value (one of 00H to 05H) is added to the reference command data (BC20H), and command data (BC20H (setting 1) to BC25H (setting 6) according to the set value ) (See Sk6).
(4) The command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by command transmission processing (_CMDOUT) (see Sk7). Thereafter, based on the current setting value, setting display data to be displayed on the setting display unit 97 is created and output (step S915). As a result, the change operation time command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the setting display 97 displays a provisional set value during the setting change.

  In this modification, each time a setting change operation is performed, it is possible to transmit a command (a change operation command) capable of specifying a provisional setting value (a setting value before setting determination) after the change operation. Based on the information included in the change operation command, the effect control unit 24 can grasp a provisional set value (provisional set value management means), and can produce an effect associated with the provisional set value. It will be. For example, while the setting is being changed, the liquid crystal display device 36 is informed that the setting changing period such as "setting changing" is being made, and "temporary setting value is setting 3" Can be displayed redundantly (simultaneously).

(Modification 3 of the second embodiment)
Also for the setting completion command (BA09H), create command data according to the setting value (setting value after confirmation) after the end of change operation (for example, BA30H (setting 1) to BA35H (setting 6)), and set A function as an information command may be provided (Modification 3). In this case, the effect control unit 24 can produce an effect related to the set value after confirmation. For example, after completion of the setting change operation, character information such as “setting value has been set to setting 3” can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

  In addition, although production control part 24 can grasp a temporary setting value whenever it receives a command at the time of change operation, a setting completion command (BA09H without receiving a new command at the time of change operation). ) May be determined to be able to determine that the setting has been confirmed. In this case, it is not necessary to transmit the setting completion command (see the above-described modification 3) including the setting information after determination, and it may be configured to transmit the same setting completion command (BA09H) as in the first embodiment ( See steps S920 to S922 in FIG.

  In the above-described second embodiment (except for the second modification), setting information is included in one or more types of existing commands as commands (setting value commands) used for effects related to setting values, etc. The configuration for transmitting this to the effect control unit 24 has been described. Here, the “existing command” is, in addition to various commands transmitted in the process at the time of power on shown in FIG. 36, a variation pattern specification command, a decoration symbol specification command, and a command transmitted during a hit game (A big hit start command, a big winning opening open command, an interval command between rounds, a big hit end command, a small hit start command, a small hit end command) and the like are included. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an individual setting information command (specifically, the “setting value command” described above corresponds) may be provided and configured to be able to transmit this at an appropriate timing. For example, individual setting information commands can be transmitted before and after the transmission timing of the above-mentioned existing command (for example, steps S021 to S022 in FIG. 6A, steps S921 to S922 in FIG. 10, and steps S930 to S931 in FIG. , Step S942-943 in FIG.

[Third Embodiment: FIG. 39, FIG. 40]
Next, a third embodiment according to the present invention will be described. Referring to FIG. 36, in the above-described first embodiment, in the “setting change processing route”, a setting changing command (BA5AH), a setting completion command (BA09H), a specification designation command (F611H), and a customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted, and in the "RAM clear processing route", a RAM clear command (BA02H), a specification designation command (F611H), and a customer waiting command (BA04H) are sequentially transmitted.

  Here, the setting change processing route is configured to execute the in-area RAM clear processing (step S031) in common with the RAM clear processing route, but the RAM clear command (BA02H) is not transmitted. Therefore, in the setting change processing route, the RAM clear notification effect based on the RAM clear command is not independently produced, and even if it is produced, the form accompanying the setting change completion effect based on the setting completion command, for example Appear in

  Therefore, noting that the setting change processing route executes the in-area RAM clear processing common to the RAM clear processing route, the RAM clear command is also transmitted in the setting change processing route (refer to the dotted line in FIG. 36). By this, it is possible to have a configuration (the third embodiment) in which “a RAM clear command, a specification designation command, and a customer waiting command” are transmitted in common between the setting change processing route and the RAM clear processing route. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40.

  39 and 40 show a flowchart of the main control unit-side main process of the third embodiment according to the present invention and the source code thereof. Indicates 39 shows an example in which the flowchart of the main control unit-side main process according to the first embodiment is modified, and FIG. 40 shows an example in which the source code of the main control unit-side main process according to the first embodiment is modified. Indicates In FIGS. 39 and 40, the description of the same components as in the first embodiment (the same reference numerals as in the first embodiment) is omitted to avoid the redundant description unless otherwise specified, and is different from the first embodiment. The explanation will focus on points. The third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Referring to FIG. 39, the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment (FIGS. 6A to 6B) in that, in the case of following the setting change processing route, after the change management processing of step S 023 is completed, When the RAM is cleared, the transmission address table selection process is executed. Therefore, as the source code is shown in FIG. 40, SPd1 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 31A (acquisition of command transmission address table (D_MKCADR2A at the time of setting change in step S024): word length 3), SPd2 (step S030) In the transmission command table selection process, jump: word length 2) is not necessary, and in the example of the source code shown in FIG. 6A, the total is reduced by about 5 bytes. Further, since the command transmission address table (D_MKCADR2A) at the time of setting change is also unnecessary, it leads to reduction of the memory capacity for the table.

However, in the case of the present embodiment, the RAM clear command is transmitted immediately after the “setting completion command” (see steps S921 to S922 in FIG. 10) is transmitted during the setting change management process of step S023 (step S029). A problem arises as to which of the setting change completion effect based on the setting completion command and the RAM clear notification effect based on the RAM clear command. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the effect control shown in the following (α) to (δ) so as to be executable.
Configuration (α): After receiving the setting completion command, when the RAM clear command is received (for example, when two commands are continuously received), the RAM clear notification effect is executed (RAM clear notification effect control). In this case, a common RAM clear notification effect will appear on the setting change processing route and the RAM clear processing route. Therefore, there is no need to prepare the setting change completion effect itself.
Configuration (β): After receiving the setting completion command, execute the “setting change completion effect” or the “setting change time RAM clear notification effect” described above (when the setting change RAM clear notification is received) Production control). This configuration is useful in that different notification effects can be produced between the setting change processing route and the RAM clear processing route. That is, the RAM clear notification effect side functions as a effect simply notifying that the RAM clear is performed, and the setting change completion effect or the setting change RAM clear notification effect side is changed, and the setting change and the RAM clear are executed. It can be made to function as an effect informing the effect. In the case of the present configuration example, a rendering system having a relationship between “setting change completion rendering” and “RAM clear notification rendering” in the first embodiment is realized with the program capacity reduced compared to the first embodiment. can do.
Configuration (γ): The setting completion command itself is not transmitted, and when the RAM clear command is received, the RAM clear notification effect is executed. In this case, the process (steps S921 to S922 in FIG. 10) related to the setting completion command may be deleted. Further, in the case of this configuration, during the setting change period, the setting changing effect based on the setting changing command appears, and when the RAM clear command is received, the setting changing effect being executed is ended and the RAM clear is performed. The presentation operation may be controlled to execute the notification presentation.
Configuration (δ): A setting change completion effect is executed when a setting completion command is received, and a RAM clear notification effect is not executed even if a RAM clear command is received thereafter (a setting change RAM clear command invalidation control). Although this configuration (δ) has the same contents as the above configuration (β) in terms of effect, the start timing of the setting change completion effect is different. Specifically, in the case of the configuration (β), the reception of the RAM clear command is an execution trigger, and in the case of the configuration (δ), the reception of the setting completion command is an execution execution trigger.

Fourth Embodiment
In the first embodiment, the "game start command (BA77H)" transmitted in step S038 (see FIG. 6B) after the merging point is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 receives this. The configuration for performing the initial operation (initialization operation) on the movable object is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be configured as follows (fourth embodiment).

  In the first embodiment, after the merging point, the “game start command (BA77H)” for the execution command of the initialization operation is transmitted, so “setting change” “RAM clear” “setting confirmation” “backup return” “re-start” After completion of each processing route of “wait for power on (RAM error)”, the initialization operation is performed. However, the initialization operation may be configured to be executable in at least one processing route of each processing route.

  For example, a command transmission address table capable of selecting an execution command (game start command) of the initialization operation may be provided, and the game start command may be transmitted at a predetermined timing. Specifically, a command transmission address table as shown in FIG. 41 is provided.

  FIG. 41 shows an example of a command transmission address table according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 representatively shows a command transmission address table in which a game start command is included in transmission targets in the RAM clear command transmission address table of FIG. 33B. By using the RAM clear command transmission address table shown in FIG. 41, a game start command is transmitted at the time of RAM clear (at the time of in-area RAM clear processing) to execute the initialization operation regarding the movable object. it can.

  The game start command is also included in the transmission target in the setting change command transmission address table of FIG. 33A and the backup return command transmission address table of FIG. 33C in addition to the RAM clear command transmission address table of FIG. 33B. The command transmission address table can be used.

  Although not shown, for example, a 'setting change starting command' and a 'setting change start command transmission address table (D_MKCADR3A)' for transmitting a 'game start command' are provided, and a setting change operation period is provided (steps in FIG. 6A) The game start command may be transmitted in S023 and the like. In this case, the processing contents of steps S021 to S022 are the same as the processing contents of steps S029 to S030, for example, the above "address acquisition processing of command transmission address table (D_MKCADR3A) at the start of setting change" and "transmission command table selection". This can be realized by changing to processing (_MKCADR). Although not shown, for example, a 'setting confirmation command transmission address table (D_MKCADR4A)' for transmitting 'game start command' together with 'setting confirmation command' or 'setting confirmation end command' is provided, and setting confirmation processing is in progress. In (Step S027 in FIG. 6B), a game start command may be transmitted. In this case, this can be realized by changing the processing content of steps S930 to S931 or S942 to S943 into “address acquisition processing of command transmission address table at setting confirmation” and “transmission command table selection processing (_MKCADR)”.

  According to the present embodiment, the initialization operation can be performed in at least one processing route of each processing route. That is, the execution timing of the initialization operation can be set to one or more timings. This point is largely different from the first embodiment in which only the initialization operation can be performed at one timing after the joining point. In this embodiment, particularly, since the initialization operation can be executed during a process requiring a relatively long time, for example, during the setting change operation period (during the setting change processing route), the time until the game can be started can be shortened. it can.

Fifth Embodiment
In at least one effect of setting change effect, setting change completion effect, RAM clear notification effect, setting confirmation effect, setting confirmation end effect, power re-on instruction effect, and recovery completion effect, the movable object (this embodiment) In the case of the above, it is also possible to use a movable body effect by the watch-shaped character 80 and / or the flower-shaped character 90) (however, as in the fourth embodiment, the initialization operation is performed during any of the effects). If you do, excluding its operating period). In addition, in the case where the movable body effect is performed in at least two effects of the setting change effect to the recovery completion effect described above, it is preferable to execute the movable body effect in which the operation patterns of the movable object are different. In particular, in the case of “setting change effect” and / or “setting change completion effect”, it is preferable to execute the movable body effect from the viewpoint of preventing a wrongdoing.

Sixth Embodiment
In the first embodiment, the operation check (all blinks) related to the performance indicator 99 has been described as being performed for a predetermined time (five seconds) when the power is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it can be configured as follows.

Configuration (ε): After the operation check is completed when the power is turned on, the operation check can be performed again by performing a predetermined operation on a specific switch. Although the specific switch is not particularly limited, for example, the RAM clear switch 98 is pressed a predetermined number of times.
Configuration (ζ): Even during operation check related to the performance indicator 99, it is possible to start variable display of symbols (special symbols and / or ordinary symbols: hereinafter the same as in the sixth embodiment) May be In this case, the operation confirmation of the performance indicator 99 can be continued until the first symbol variation display starts. As the end condition of the confirmation display, it is possible to start the variation display of the first symbol or the case where the out monitoring switch 49a detects a ball entry.
Configuration (η): When an error regarding a gaming machine is detected during operation check, the operation check may be ended. However, instead of using all errors as the condition for ending the operation check, if the error type has a high degree of seriousness of the game progress or damage to the gaming machine, the operation check is ended while the error type whose severity is low In this case, the operation confirmation may not be ended. Examples of error types with high severity include RAM errors, cheating related errors (radio wave errors, magnetic errors, vibration errors, incorrect winning errors for winning openings), door opening errors, and random numbers for random numbers used for lottery. The error type is a circuit error (main board error) or the like, and the severity is low, for example, an underdelivery error, a movable object / role error, a voice LSI error, an oversupply error, a clogging error or the like. The door opening error is an error belonging to a high severity error type, but the door open error is excluded because the front frame 2 is opened and the display on the performance indicator 99 is visually recognized for operation check. It is eaten. In this configuration, error priorities based on the severity of the error type are determined, and in descending order of priority, for example, RAM errors (including RAM clear errors), special winning opening incorrect winning errors, magnetic errors, radio wave errors, Vibration error, door open error. It can be defined as a main substrate error, a shortage of payout error, a movable object / role error, an out of supply error, a ball clogging error.

Seventh Embodiment
Moreover, about the control form regarding the operation | movement confirmation which concerns on the performance indicator 99, it can be set as the following structures (structure ((theta))-((nu))).

Configuration (θ): Even during operation check related to the performance indicator 99, counting of the base value can be performed. In this case, even if the base value is updated during the operation check, the operation check (all blinks) is continued until the preset operation check time ends, and the updated contents are not displayed. You can do so. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when there is an update of the base value when the operation check time has not ended, the operation check can be forcibly ended and the display of the base value can be started.
Configuration (ι): During the operation check related to the performance indicator 99, it is possible to execute the initialization operation on the movable object. Specifically, “initialization operation start timing T1 ≦ operation confirmation period Tx” can be set.
Configuration (κ): End the initialization operation at least before the operation confirmation is completed. Specifically, “initialization operation end timing T2 ≦ operation confirmation period Ty” can be set. In this case, the initialization operation may be started at a predetermined timing during the operation confirmation period if the initialization operation is finished before the operation confirmation ends, or the initialization may be performed at a predetermined timing before the operation confirmation period. The operation may be started. In addition, when a plurality of types of movable body members are provided, the initialization operation related to at least one of the plurality of types of movable body members may be ended before the operation check is completed. In recent years, in order to improve the amusement of the game, the movable body character is provided with various character things from small to large ones, and there are various operation patterns such as combined character and the like in which a plurality of members are united. . These movable body parts have different initialization operation times according to their operation mode and movable range. For this reason, it is preferable to use a configuration in which the initialization operation is performed using the operation confirmation period, in that the time until the game startable state is completed can be effectively utilized. Of course, when the operation confirmation related to the performance indicator 99 and the initialization operation related to the movable object are independently executed, the initialization operation is started after the operation confirmation related to the performance indicator 99 is completed. It is also good.
Configuration (λ): While confirming the operation related to the performance indicator 99, the effect means may be used to notify that the operation is being confirmed. There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a presentation means here, One or several types of presentation means can be utilized. For example, the operation is being confirmed using at least one effect of light effect, sound effect, image display effect, movable object effect, and contact pressure effect (effect by vibration device, pressure device, wind pressure device). You may be able to notify that effect. In this configuration, it is possible to confirm that an operation check is being performed from the front side of the gaming machine, such as a person concerned with a hall.
Configuration (μ): Although it has been described that the program and data relating to the performance indicator 99 are provided in the out-of-area RAM, the operation check timer may be provided on the in-area RAM side. As a result, there is no need to access the out-of-area RAM when setting the operation check timer in the process at the time of power on (step S034 in FIG. 6B), so the program capacity at the time of power on can be reduced. . If the operation check timer is provided in the in-area RAM, the timer control process (step S082) in the main control timer interrupt process of FIG. 17 counts the operation check timer (equivalent to step S851 of FIG. 27). In the performance display monitor process (step S102) in the same interrupt process, the count process is not performed by referring to the operation check timer value.
Configuration (ν): A timer for blinking the display of the performance indicator 99 or the like (in the case of this embodiment, a lighting timer (a counter for counting switching timing of lighting time 300 ms and lighting off time 300 ms) With respect to the value of the update cycle counter (refer to the operation check process in FIG. 27) regarding the set cycle: hereinafter collectively referred to as “flashing cycle counter”, an initial value is set at power on as in the operation check timer. It is preferable to configure (for example, the operation confirmation display is performed after clearing the blink cycle counter to zero). As a result, in the operation check at the time of power-on, it is possible to execute the operation check by the common blinking cycle and the lighting blinking state every time. Further, as to the timing of setting the initial value to the blinking cycle counter, it may be executed in the processing when the power is turned on (until the game start possible state is established) as in the operation confirmation timer. Preferably, after the main control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) is started, the performance display monitor process (step S102) is set immediately before the display control of the operation check is executed. For example, it is preferable to set during the operation confirmation timer setting process of step S034 or between the processes of steps S033 to S036. In addition, if the display control of the operation check in the performance display monitor process (step S102) is not executed yet, the setting in the process between the CTC setting process (step S036) to S040 related to the activation of the timer interrupt process is performed. It is also good. As other setting timings, before execution of the operation check process (step S833 in FIG. 27) during the performance display monitor process (after the determination result in step S826 is determined to be '≠ 0') or the operation check process Before the process of step S851 in the middle, on the condition that the operation check timer is the initial value (the initial value of 5000 ms), the initial value may be set to the blinking cycle counter.
Here, if the display segment of the setting value is also used among the 7 segment indicators 99a to 99d of the performance indicator 99, the setting is changed (the setting completion switch 96 or the setting key switch 94 is turned off) ), The setting value display ends, and then the operation check is performed. Therefore, for example, when the operation check is started from the lighted state, the display is performed in the order of “set value display '' operation check (light on) ⇔ operation check (light off) '(setting value Immediately after the lighting state ends, the operation confirmation display is started from the lighting state). For this reason, the display content is not busy, leading to a problem that the visibility is reduced. Therefore, it is preferable to set the blink cycle counter value so that the operation check is started each time from the unlit state. As a result, the display can be performed in the order of "set value display 動作 'operation check (off) 消 灯 operation check (light)'". That is, the turn-off period of one beat can be provided between the display of the setting value and the lighting display of the operation check. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display contents from being busy and to improve the visibility and convenience at the time of operation check. As described above, when performing the operation check at the time of power on, if the predetermined process relating to the performance display is temporarily reset or the appropriate initial setting process is performed, the display of the performance indicator 99 from the time of the power on is displayed. It is possible to make the content the same display content (except for the base value) each time, and to improve the visibility and convenience regarding the operation check.

Eighth Embodiment
In addition, when a setting completion command or a setting confirmation end command is transmitted (step S922 in FIG. 10, command transmission processing in step S943 in FIG. 13), the following configurations (configurations (構成) to (ρ)) may be used. .

Configuration (ξ): A standby time (for example, 10 seconds) may be set after the command transmission process (steps S922 and S943), and the subsequent process may not proceed until this standby time elapses (standby) Time management process). The above standby time is used as an effect time width of the setting confirmation end effect or the setting change completion effect. Thus, for example, when the display such as "setting change completed" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, another command (for example, a customer waiting command, a RAM clear command, or a RAM clear command) is displayed from the main control unit 20. A power failure recovery display command or the like is transmitted, and the effect being executed is not suddenly ended or another effect is not suddenly started, and a sufficient effect time can be secured.
Configuration (ο): The movable body may be initialized during the waiting time.
Configuration (π): Perform setting image display such as “Please close the door” accompanying or changing the setting confirmation end effect or setting change completion effect (play start preparation effect), and prepare for the start of the game You may make it appear an instruction effect to prompt.
Configuration (ρ): An operation check related to the performance indicator 99 may be performed during the above standby time. Although setting value display is ended after completion of setting confirmation (see step S940 in FIG. 13), display at the time of setting confirmation is performed after completion of setting change operation (see step S918 in FIG. 10). Focusing on this point, in the case of a configuration that combines the base display and the setting display, if the operation check related to the performance indicator 99 is immediately executed during the above standby time, the setting confirmed display and the operation confirmation display There is a problem in that In this case, although a configuration in which the setting determination display itself is not executed may be considered, it is preferable to perform the setting determination display as much as possible. Therefore, the first half of the standby time (for example, 10 seconds) (for example, up to 5 seconds from the start of standby time) is set to the display time width of the display when confirmed, and the operation confirmation display for the second half period (from 5 seconds to the end of standby time) Allocate to the display time width of. This makes it possible to solve the problem relating to duplicate display and to end the operation check early. In addition, it is preferable to set standby | waiting time as the time width | variety which can fully exhibit both the function at the time of setting decision display and the operation confirmation display. On the other hand, when the performance indicator 99 is not used (in the case of the first embodiment), since the display operation can be independently performed during the waiting time, there is no problem regarding the overlapping display. However, when the setting confirmation display period and the operation confirmation display period overlap, there may be a problem that display objects to be viewed increase and become complicated, and the confirmation operation becomes troublesome. Therefore, during the standby time, it is possible to execute only the display at the time of setting determination and not to execute the operation confirmation display.

The ninth embodiment
As described above, the game is started in a state in which the RAM is cleared at the time of setting change, and in a state in which the state at the time of power failure is restored at the time of backup restoration. That is, the state of the gaming machine 1 (for example, display modes such as the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the normal symbol display device 39a, the rightward display device 39b, and the composite display device 38c) at the setting change time and the backup restoration time. It is likely to be different. For example, in the case of the first embodiment, at the time of setting change, stop symbol data of a specific loss (for example, loss A) is set to the special stop symbol number (initial data setting process at power on in FIG. 6B (See step S032), the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are in the standby state (waiting for customers) in the state where the special symbol corresponding to the lost A is displayed. Therefore, even if the pachinko parlor is closed with the special symbol display on the special symbol display device 38a being stopped and displayed during the game on the previous day, the special symbol display device will be opened today. If another symbol (for example, a special symbol for lost A) is stopped and displayed on 38a, it is highly likely that the gaming machine is not at least put on hold the day before and has been subjected to setting change operation or RAM clear operation. It can be guessed. By using such an event, if you are an advanced gaming player, you inspect the pachinko parlor just before closing the shop the day before and observe the state of the gaming machines in the parlor right after the pachinko parlor opening, to see if there is a setting change. There is a problem that a technology intervention element is created in which gaming machines having high possibility of setting are selected to play a game based on the inspection result of the previous day, causing inequalities among players. Therefore, it is preferable not to leave the trace as much as possible at the time of setting change (when the RAM is cleared).

  Therefore, when the special symbol is not changing at the time of backup restoration (step S954 in FIG. 14), the stop display mode (special stop symbol) of the special symbol of the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b is the setting change time and / or Or set specific data in the special figure 1 stop symbol number (W_T1STPNO) and the special figure 2 stop symbol number (W_T2STPNO) so that the same stop display mode as in the RAM clear (RMA clear by the RAM clear processing route) will be obtained. It can be configured as follows. Specifically, when the special symbol is not changing (when the determination result in step S954 in FIG. 14 is YES), the same as the initial data set in the power-on initial data setting process (step S032) A process for setting data (initial data setting process at backup recovery) is provided. Note that, as already described, the initial data is, for example, specific lost symbol data, other specific data (dedicated symbol at the time of RAM clear), off data, or the like.

  With such a configuration, the special stop symbol of the special symbol display device becomes the same display mode at the time of backup return and at the time of setting change (at the time of RAM clear), and thereby, at the time of setting change (at the time of RAM clear) Since the traces can be erased, the technical intervention elements as described above can be contained. It should be noted that the condition "if special symbol is not changing" is given because if the special symbol is temporarily changing, the game result will be forcibly rewritten. It is. To explain in detail, even if the special symbol is changing (during the special symbol change display game), if the above-mentioned backup return initial data setting process is executed, the change is a hit change temporarily. In this case, the hit is forced to be rewritten to a lose, and the legitimacy of the game result is destroyed. As described above, the configuration “change (rewrite) the game result regardless of the presence or absence of the RAM clear” is likely to give an unfair disadvantage to the player, and the game is also performed from the viewpoint of legal request It is because it does not meet the standard that can be provided to the market as an aircraft.

  In addition, although the structure which paid its attention to the special symbol was demonstrated above, it is preferable to set the same data similarly at the time of backup reset and the time of setting change similarly about an ordinary symbol. This makes it possible to further erase the trace at the time of setting change. In addition, the normal symbol operation status with the same function as the special symbol operation status is also provided for the normal symbol, and when the normal symbol operation status is determined and the normal symbol is not in the non-changing state, the setting is changed The same data as the initial data to be set may be set as the normal stop symbol number (W_FSTPNO) (the process similar to the above-described backup return initial data setting processing is performed for the normal symbol). The same process is preferably performed for the right-handed display 39 b and the composite display 38 c. However, if the time of power interruption is in the power support state, or if the fluctuation time reduction function is in operation (during the short time) and in the high probability state (during the high probability), the data at the time of backup recovery is unchanged Return and make sure that there is no contradiction with the setting change time.

  The following configuration may be used as a modification of the present embodiment. For example, as in the setting value storage area, a work area (special figure 1 stop symbol number (W_T1STPNO) and special figure 2 stop symbol number (W_T2STPNO) related to the special symbol is determined as the RAM clear exclusion target area. When executing the internal RAM clear process (step S031 in FIG. 6B), the condition of whether or not the work area is to be cleared is determined according to whether or not the special symbol is not changing. If the special symbol is not changing, the work area for the special symbol may not be cleared, and if the special symbol is not changing, the work area for the special symbol may be cleared. Also, when the target symbol is also targeted, the work area related to the regular symbol (normal stop symbol number (W_FSTPNO)) is excluded from the RAM clear exclusion It is defined as a zone, and if the normal symbol is not changing, it does not clear the work area for the normal symbol, and if the normal symbol is not changing, it is configured to clear the work region for the special symbol This makes it difficult to determine the presence or absence of the setting change, because the display can be restored in the same display state as before the power interruption in any of the setting change and / or the RAM clear. it can.

  Although the display device controlled by the main control unit 20 has been described above, the display of the display device (the decoration lamp 45 or the liquid crystal display device 36) controlled by the presentation control unit 24 is similarly set to the backup recovery time. The same display mode can be used at the time of change. Specifically, the display mode is the same as the display mode when the first power is turned on and the display mode when the second power is turned on. Moreover, it is preferable to set it as the same effect display mode at the time of backup reset and the time of a setting change also about the normal decoration symbol shown in FIG. 5, a 4th pattern, and another display thing (sun or mountain background).

  In the above, although the embodiment is described in which the determination of the presence or absence of the setting change can not be made as much as possible, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by dare to leave the guess element of the setting change and easily determine the presence or absence of the setting change. You may configure it. For example, the variation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode) is not cleared by clearing the RAM. In this case, if the game is ended during CZ at the closing day of the previous day, CZ is ended by executing the symbol variation display game a predetermined number of times (up to four times in the present embodiment) at the opening. Fluctuation patterns can change dynamically, ie, dramatic changes can occur. This makes it possible to generate an inference element of the presence or absence of setting change. Also, if the variation pattern assignment specification number (Tcode) is not cleared, if the variation pattern assignment specification number (Tcode) designates CZ, the same CZ effect mode is used at the time of backup recovery and at the time of setting change. It is preferable to set it as the display mode (background image) of. In this case, the presence or absence of the setting change can not be determined only by looking at the liquid crystal screen at the time of opening the store, and it is necessary to execute at least the symbol variation display game. The CZ in this embodiment is a game mode that ends in four rotations, but may be ended in a relatively long game period of several tens of rotations to about 50 rotations. In addition, the same data may be set for the special symbol at the time of backup restoration and setting change, and for the ordinary symbol, different data may be set at the time of backup restoration and setting change (at the time of power failure at backup restoration) Data, and when changing settings, set initial values).

  As described above, as to which work area is to be cleared by the RAM clear process, it is appropriate to take into consideration the playability such as how much the estimation factor of the setting change is given, the security point of view, etc. It can be decided.

Tenth Embodiment
In the first embodiment, the effect means executes setting change effect, setting change completion effect, RAM clear notification effect, setting confirmation effect, setting confirmation end effect, power re-on instruction effect, recovery completion effect, etc. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The various display devices (38a, 38b, 39a, 39a, 39b, 38c, 97, 99, etc. shown in FIG. 3) controlled by the main control unit 20 correspond to the following: hereinafter abbreviated as “main control side display device” The contents related to the above-mentioned setting change effect-to-restoration completion effect using at least any one of the above items, that is, the setting change is in progress, the setting change is completed, and the RAM is cleared, Notifications related to power-on processing such as “Confirmation of setting,” “Confirmation of setting,” “Power on again,” “Recovery completed It can be used for "informing at the time of insertion". In the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process has not been started yet (i.e., the game prohibited state), i.e., the game enable state has not yet been established, and the firing operation is not possible while the setting is being changed or the setting is confirmed. The winning opening to the starting opening is invalid, or the processing relating to the symbol variation display game is not executed. Therefore, in this state, the display during the normal game can not be performed even on various display devices (main control side display devices) controlled by the main control unit 20. Therefore, the notification at the time of power on can be configured to be performed using the period of the game prohibited state. Of the various power-on notifications that the setting has been changed to the completion of restoration, which of the main-control-side display devices should be used for which on-power-on notification is to be performed is appropriately selected. Can. However, when the display on the main control side is used for notification at the time of power-on, the case where the display is used for another notification is excluded. For example, since the setting display 97 is used for setting display during setting change, setting confirmation or setting completion, it can not be used for notification when the power is turned on. In this case, other display devices except the setting display 97 can be used.

  With regard to the above-mentioned notification at the time of power-on, if more main control side display devices are used, visibility can be improved by many LED groups. Also, when notifying using a specific single main control side display device, it becomes impossible to notify when the display device is broken etc. However, when notifying using all the main control side display devices There is nothing to worry about. However, in consideration of the fact that failure is a rare case, any one of a plurality of main control side display devices may be used. In this case, a plurality of main control side display devices are used. There is an advantage that the program capacity for light emission control can be reduced as compared with the case of informing the user.

  The notification mode at the time of power-on is not particularly limited with respect to the notification mode, since it is unlikely that the person in charge of the hall will misunderstand that the notification relates to the normal game regardless of the light emission mode. Notification on power on according to a predetermined light emission mode (light on / off / blink etc. (If a chromatic color light emitting LED is used, the light may be on / blink in a predetermined color)) as appropriate. You can Preferably, the notification is made in a mode other than the light emission mode during the game. In the case of this embodiment, since it is not a so-called "simultaneous variation machine", the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b do not simultaneously perform the variation indication operation. Therefore, it is preferable to execute notification at the time of power on by simultaneously blinking / lighting the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b as a notification mode at the time of power on. When a plurality of power-on notifications are executed (for example, that setting change is in progress and setting confirmation is in progress), all notification modes may be common, but from the viewpoint of identifiability, a plurality of notification modes may be used. It is preferable that all or a part of the power-on notification of (1) be a different notification mode. Further, in order to improve the identifiability of the processing state, it is preferable to notify using both notification at the time of power on and notification (rendering) by the rendering means. In addition, lighting, flickering, and the like as the light emission mode shall mean those visually recognized as such. When the main control side display device is controlled by the dynamic lighting method, although the lighting state is actually a high-speed blinking state, this is the lighting state. The blinking state refers to a case where the lighting state (high speed blinking) and the lighting off state (light off) are visually repeated at predetermined intervals.

  Also, when controlling the main control side display device during the game, the dynamic lighting method is used, and when controlling the main control side display device during power on notification such as setting change or setting confirmation, the static lighting method is used. It is also good. For example, during the game, since generation of timer interruption processing of 4 ms is permitted, using the interruption processing, data regarding lighting on any display device of each main control side display device for each interruption It is possible to switch common data that determines whether to transmit, and it is easy to perform dynamic lighting control that repeatedly performs lighting / lighting off at predetermined intervals for each interrupt, while changing settings or checking settings. Since it is not yet permitted to generate a timer interrupt process of 4 ms in this period before the game is ready to be started, if you try to execute the same process, the program capacity required to realize it is It will increase. In that respect, if control of the main control side display device by notification at the time of power on is set to the static lighting method, it is sufficient to transmit lighting data to any of the main control side display devices, The program capacity can be drastically reduced compared to the case of dynamic lighting control. As described above, the lighting control method of the main control side display device may be different between the notification during the normal game and the notification at the time of power on.

  When a part of the plurality of 7-segment displays 99a to 99d constituting the performance display 99 are used as the setting display 97, the static lighting control (first display control) is used when the setting display 97 is used. When used as a performance indicator 99 after the start of the game, dynamic lighting control (second display control) can also be performed. However, when the 7-segment displays 99a to 99d have specifications in which only dynamic lighting control is assumed, there is a possibility that a problem may occur by performing static lighting control.

  For example, as an absolute maximum rating of 7 segments for performance indicator 99, the maximum value of forward current is 15 mA / seg (static), the maximum value of peak forward current is 60 mA / seg (duty 1/5 pluse width 1 ms) ( In the case where only the base value is indicated, it is necessary to consider only the dynamic lighting control when it is specified in the dynamic), so the maximum value of peak forward current is 60 mA / seg (duty 1/5 pluse width 1 ms) The current value in the range that does not exceed should be set, but when performing static lighting control when used as setting display means 215, the maximum value of the peak forward current is 60 mA / seg (duty 1/5 pluse width 1 ms) And maximum forward current of 15mA / seg does not exceed Do not if you do not set to current values. Here, if it is assumed that the current value does not exceed 15 mA / seg, the luminance at the time of one lighting during dynamic lighting control decreases, and the lighting display at the time of displaying the base value is flickering. There is a risk of

  Therefore, for example, the maximum value of the peak forward current does not exceed 60 mA / seg (duty 1/5 plus width 1 ms), and by setting the current value in the range exceeding 15 mA / seg, which is the maximum value of forward current, It can be configured such that flickering does not easily occur in the lighting display at the time of lighting control. In this case, since the current value is set to a range exceeding 15 mA / seg, which is the maximum value of the forward current, when performing static lighting control for notification at power on (for example, during setting change or setting confirmation) Of course, if the lighting control is performed so as to simply repeat the transmission of lighting data, the maximum value of the forward current is naturally exceeded, but the lighting data and the light-off data are alternately transmitted at predetermined intervals. (The lighting data is continuously sent for a predetermined time, and the turning-off data is continuously sent for a predetermined time.) By setting the current value in the range exceeding 15 mA / seg, which is the maximum value of the forward current, It is possible to perform lighting control so as not to exceed the maximum value despite the above. As described above, pseudo dynamic lighting control using static lighting control may be realized. That is, at the time of dynamic lighting control at the time of displaying a base value, switching on common data for designating seven segments to be lit causes lighting control to repeat lighting / extinguishing while displaying setting values. Similarly, since switching of common data increases the control program, control is performed to alternately transmit lighting data and lighting data at predetermined intervals without switching common data. In this case, since it is only necessary to switch the data to be transmitted at predetermined intervals, it is possible to realize the lighting control with a program much smaller than switching the common data. As described above, by devising the control method, it is possible to realize both static lighting control and dynamic lighting control so as not to exceed the 7-segment absolute maximum rating.

  Also, instead of performing such lighting control, the maximum value of forward current is 60 mA / seg (static), and the maximum value of peak forward current is 60 mA / seg (duty 1/5 pluse width 1 ms) (dynamic) It is also conceivable to use high quality 7 segments as defined. In this case, since the absolute maximum rating value is better than the above-mentioned 7 segments, the cost per part is naturally increased. In the case where high quality 7 segments are used for all of the plurality of 7 segment displays 99a to 99d for base value display, it costs money. Therefore, among the 7-segment displays 99a to 99d for displaying a plurality of base values, the 7-segment (for example, the 7-segment display 99a) displaying the set value uses 7 segments having an excellent absolute maximum rating value. For the other 7-segment displays 99b to 99d for displaying the base value, 7-segments having lower absolute maximum ratings may be used. As a result, it is possible to reduce the program capacity because it is possible to suppress the cost to the minimum necessary, and it is not necessary to perform pseudo dynamic lighting control using static lighting control during setting change or setting confirmation. it can.

  In addition, for 7 segments displaying the set value, 7 segments with excellent absolute maximum rating are used, but the maximum value of peak forward current and the maximum value of forward current are the same or more / It is sufficient to use 7 segments which is an approximate value smaller than that. Also, among those specified as the absolute maximum ratings of the other 7 segments for base value display, the maximum value of the forward current of 7 segments for setting value display is at least compared with the maximum value of the forward current. It is also possible to use one that is set to large. Furthermore, among the ones defined as absolute maximum ratings of 7 segments for base value display other than set value display combined, peak forward direction of 7 segments for set value display at least compared with the maximum value of peak forward current It is preferable to use one in which the maximum value of the current is set to the same value or an approximation value of more or less. As described above, in addition to the fact that the 7-segment for setting value display is superior to the 7-segment for base value display in terms of the absolute maximum rating of forward current, the absolute maximum rating of peak forward current is the same value. By using the one set to the approximate value of more or less or less, static lighting control during notification at power on and dynamic lighting control in base value display during game use a common 7 segment Even if it must be done, it can be easily realized. Of course, high spec 7 segments may be used for all of the plurality of 7 segments for base value display (including 7 segments for setting display).

Eleventh Embodiment
The security signals output from the frame external terminal substrate 21 can have the following configurations (σ) to (ψ).

  Configuration (σ): In the first embodiment, the security signal is output during setting change management (step S023 in FIG. 6A) (see step S906 in FIG. 10), but after the setting change operation is completed, the timer In the external terminal output process (step S099 in FIG. 17) of the interrupt process, the output process and the stop process of the security signal may be performed. The output time of the security signal can be determined appropriately.

  Configuration (τ): In the first embodiment, the output / stop process of the security signal is performed during the setting change management process (see steps S906 and S920), but the security signal is stopped during the setting change management process. Instead, the security signal may be stopped in the external terminal output process (step S099) of the timer interrupt process. In this case, unlike in the first embodiment in which the security signal is stopped immediately after the setting change operation is completed, the output can be continued for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the setting change operation is completed. The same configuration can be applied not only to the setting change management but also to the security signal related to the setting confirmation process (step S027).

  Configuration (υ): The security signal may be stopped after the power-on initial data setting process (step S 032) is finished without stopping the security signal during the setting change management process. This configuration (υ) has the following advantages. In the first embodiment, in the power-on initial data setting process (step S 032), an output process for outputting a new security signal for 30000 ms (30000 ms is set in the error notification timer described above, and the security signal is The process of turning ON) is performed, and the security is intermittently output between the setting change management process and the power-on initial data setting process (steps S023 to S032). On the other hand, in the case of this configuration (υ), since the security signal output during the setting change management is continuously output until the end of the power-on initial data setting process, the security after the power-on initial data setting process is completed Only processing for stopping the signal (security signal OFF) may be provided, and output processing of a new security signal as in the first embodiment is unnecessary. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity and the control burden. The stop (OFF) timing of the security signal does not have to be immediately after the power-on initial data setting process, but may be stopped at an appropriate timing after the end of the power-on initial data setting process. For example, when the setting change operation is completed (when the setting change completion switch is OFF), an appropriate output time (for example, 31000 ms) may be set, and the output of the security signal may be stopped after the output time elapses. Note that this output time is monitored by the timer interrupt of FIG. 17 activated thereafter, and the external terminal output process (step S099) of the timer interrupt process is performed in the same manner as the configuration (τ) described above. Signal stop processing can be performed.

  Configuration (φ): Further, without stopping the security signal during the setting change management process, the security signal may be stopped immediately after the subsequent in-area RAM clear process (step S031). In this case, the security signal can be maintained until the in-area RAM clear processing is completed. That is, it is possible to secure the output of the security signal until at least the execution of “setting change management processing + in-area RAM clearing processing” is completed. In addition, when the setting change management process ends, the output of the security signal is temporarily stopped, and thereafter, when the in-area RAM clear process is performed, the security signal is output again for a predetermined time (for example, 50 ms). You may In this case, the security signal output in the setting change management process and the security signal output in the in-area RAM clear process may be the same security signal or different types of security signals. .

Configuration (χ): In addition, when it is determined in the RAM error determination processing in steps S 015 to S 0 16 in FIG. 6A that an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM, control is performed to a stop state to stop the progress of the processing. (Refer to FIG. 6A steps S017 to S020), and at this time, a security signal indicating a RAM error may be output. Note that the security signal output at this time may be the same security signal as the security signal transmitted during setting change or setting confirmation, or may be a different security signal.
Configuration (ψ): In addition, when a RAM error occurs, you may be able to execute a RAM error display indicating the occurrence of a RAM error with the setting display 97 (a setting / performance display may also be 7 segments). . About this RAM error display mode, in order to prevent confusion with a setting display or a base display, it is preferable that it is display modes (it may be any of lighting and blink) other than the display mode used by a setting display or a base display. . Further, although the error display can be performed by at least one of the main control side display devices, it is preferable to perform the error display by the setting display unit 97 because there is a possibility of a setting error. In addition, when the setting / performance display 7 segments (for example, 7 segment indicator 99a) is provided, it can be performed by "setting display 97" and / or "setting / performance display 7 segments".

Twelfth Embodiment
Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, history information related to a game can be displayed by the liquid crystal display device 36. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 43. 42 to 43 show an example of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 according to history information display, and FIG. 42 shows a display example of a list (list) of history information, and FIG. 43 shows a history of It shows an example of display of information.

  In the present embodiment, in the specific period of the power-on process (FIGS. 6A to 6B), execution control of “gaming history mode” in which history information related to a game is displayed is configured to be executable. Specifically, the effect control unit 24 is in the process of changing the setting (period of receiving the setting change command to receiving of the setting completion command), or in the process of confirming the setting (period of receiving the setting confirmation command to the setting confirmation end command). ) Monitor the presence or absence of 'menu display request operation (for example, long press operation of effect button 13)' from a user (for example, a person in the hall), and when there is a menu display request operation, The display is changed from the display during setting change or setting confirmation to the “history list selection screen 100” shown in FIG. The history list selection screen 100 is a menu screen that displays a plurality of options (selection items).

  Referring to FIG. 42, as illustrated, menu item images 102a to 102h corresponding to eight types of history information as options (the details of the history information will be described later) are displayed on history list selection screen 100. It is displayed in the form of a letter, and below it, character information (selection, decision) for explaining the operation method on the menu screen, a button image 106 imitating the cross key image 104 imitating the cross key 75 and the effect button 13 And are displayed side by side. Further, in the menu item images 102a to 102h, the names of the history information are described so that the contents of the menu items such as "setting history list" and "error history list" can be easily understood.

  During display of the history list selection screen 100, eight menu items of the selection item images 102a to 102h are controlled by the cross key 75 (75a to 75d) which is controlled during menu item selection and can be operated in four directions, up, down, left, and right. One item can be selected. In the menu item selection state, the menu item to be selected is switched according to the operation of the cross key 75, the background color of the currently selected item image is changed, and any menu item is being selected. Is notified to the user. In the example of FIG. 42, an example in which the selection item image 102a (setting history list) is currently being selected is shown. Immediately after the history list selection screen 100 is switched and displayed, the selection item image 102 a is displayed as being selected as an initial selection item. Then, when the effect button 13 is pressed, the selected menu item is determined as a display target, and the history information corresponding to the menu item is displayed in a list.

  The history information is displayed, for example, in a mode as shown in FIG. In the drawing, a list display of each history information when the setting history list 102a, the error history information 102b, and the big hit history information 102c are determined as menu items is representatively shown. The display screen of the history information according to the present embodiment will be described in detail below, taking the three history information shown in FIG. 43 as a representative example, in order to avoid redundant description.

  First, the case where the menu item “setting history list 102 a” is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 43 (A).

  When the menu item "setting history list 102a" is determined on the history list selection screen 100, the history list selection screen 100 is switched to the setting history confirmation screen 110 and displayed, as shown in the figure, with or without setting change and setting confirmation. The history information (hereinafter referred to as “setting change confirmation history information”) regarding the presence or absence is displayed as a list (list 112). A list of up to 10 pieces of history information can be displayed chronologically on one history display screen, and a history number is displayed in the list 112, and from the event that occurred most recently The history information is displayed in order (latest as the history number is smaller). Further, in the display area at the bottom of the history display screen, the cross key image 114 imitating the cross key 75 and the effect button 13 are imitated together with character information (page switching, back) for explaining the operation method in the menu screen. A button image 116 is displayed side by side, and at the center thereof, an item number image 118 indicating the current page number of the history display screen is displayed (in this example, one item out of 5 items is shown). ). In the case of the present embodiment, five history display screens (for 1 to 5 pages) are prepared, and a maximum of 50 history information can be displayed. Switching of the history display screens 1 to 5 can be switched by an operation of the cross key 75 in the left-right direction. In addition, when the effect button 13 is pressed while the history display screen is displayed, it is possible to return to the history list selection screen 100. Further, if there is no history information, for example, "---" is displayed (see the columns of numbers 9 and 10 in FIG. 44 described later). The configuration of the history display screen described above is the same as that of the other history information. Although not shown, the effect control unit 24 includes a reset unit that clears (resets) the history information. The reset means may have at least one of three functions: clear history information by menu item, clear by number in the list, and clear all history information collectively.

  In the above “setting change confirmation history information”, as the history information regarding the presence or absence of the setting change operation, “information indicating that the setting change operation has been performed, the setting value information determined at that time, and the determined date and time information "Setting change history information)" as the history information of the presence / absence of setting confirmation "Information indicating that setting confirmation has been made, setting value information confirmed at that time, and information of the confirmation date / time information (setting confirmation history information) And ". As shown in the figure, these history information are in the form of “setting change setting ○ time information (year / month / day / hour)” and “setting check setting ○ time information (year / month / day / hour)” Is displayed. For example, if "setting confirmation setting 4 2017/10/4 00:45" of No. 1 is displayed, it means "I confirmed that it is setting 4 at 0:45 am on October 4, 2017". The setting change history information is displayed in a highlighted display mode because the setting change history information has a higher degree of importance than the setting confirmation history information. In this example, the setting confirmation history information is displayed in a normal format, and the setting change history information is displayed in bold. In the case of a Sunday or a holiday, the background color is highlighted in a color different from the usual color (refer to the numbers 3 and 4). It is possible to easily confirm whether or not the setting change and the setting confirmation operation have been performed, or the presence or absence of the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation by the Goto action.

  As to whether or not there has been a setting change operation or a setting confirmation operation, “setting changing command”, “setting complete command”, “setting confirmation command”, “setting confirmation end command” sent from the main control unit 20 side (These commands are handled as commands including setting value information as described in the second embodiment), the effect control unit 24 recognizes the event and manages it as history information. That is, with regard to the setting change history information, the setting completion command is used if it is a history of "setting confirmed", and the setting changing command may be used if it is a history of "at the time of starting setting changing operation". With regard to the information, if the history of “at the start of setting confirmation” is used, the command under setting confirmation may be used, and if the history of “at the end of setting confirmation”, the setting confirmation end command may be used.

  When the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) according to the present embodiment receives the setting completion command, the effect is recorded based on the information included in the setting completion command and the date and time information managed by the RTC function unit. When the command is created and stored in a predetermined area (history information storage area) of the RAM 243 and the setting confirmation end command is received, setting is performed based on the information included in the setting confirmation end command and the date and time information managed by the RTC function unit. Confirmation history information is created and stored in a predetermined area (history information storage area) of the RAM 243. Then, when the selection item image 102 a is selected by the user on the history list selection screen 100 by the history display request operation, the CPU 241 reads out from the RAM 243 history information (setting change confirmation history information) corresponding to the item. The display control of the display device 36 is performed to display the setting history confirmation screen 110. Thus, a list display of history information is realized. The same display control is performed when one of the selection item images 102b to 102h is selected and determined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43 (B), the case where the menu item “error history list 102b” is determined will be described. In the description of FIG. 43B, substantially the same contents as the contents described in FIG. 43A will be omitted to avoid redundant description.

  When the menu item "error history list 102b" is determined on the history list selection screen 100, the history list selection screen 100 is switched to the error history confirmation screen 120 and displayed, as shown in the figure, regarding an error that occurred in the gaming machine 1 History information (hereinafter referred to as “error history information”) is displayed in a list (list 122). The error history information includes “information in which error type information is associated with occurrence date and time information”, and in the present embodiment, occurrence history information of “main error” monitored by the main control unit 20 side and effect control unit It includes the “sub-error” occurrence history information monitored by S.24. The above error history information is displayed in the form of “error type occurrence time information (year / month / day / hour)” as illustrated.

  In the error history confirmation screen 120, the history display with a white background in the list 122 indicates an error type where the severity of the game progress or damage to the gaming machine is low, and the history display with the background highlighted in black History display), indicating an error type with high severity. This makes it easy to understand the occurrence of high severity errors. For example, as described in the sixth embodiment, RAM errors (including RAM clear errors), large winning opening incorrect winning errors, and magnetic errors, for example, as described in the sixth embodiment. , Radio wave error, vibration error, door open error. An error type that includes a main board error and the like and the severity is low includes an underdelivery error, a movable object / role error, an oversupply error, a ball clogging error and the like. In addition, since the installation of the performance indicator 99 has a strong meaning of legal requirements, the “performance display error” related to the performance indicator 99 is considered to belong to the type of error with high severity.

  The effect control unit 24 recognizes the occurrence of the main error by the “error command” sent from the main control unit 20 side, and the occurrence of the sub error is recognized by the error monitoring means possessed by the effect control unit 24 itself. Manage as history information. When receiving the error command, the effect control unit 24 creates error history information based on the information (error type information) included in the error command and the date and time information managed by the RTC function unit, and stores the history information storage area. And the error history confirmation screen 120 is displayed based on the history display request operation by the user. As the error history information, only occurrence of an error type having a high degree of severity may be used as history information.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43C, the case where the menu item "big hit history list 102c" is determined will be described. In the description of FIG. 43C, substantially the same contents as the contents described in FIGS. 43A and 43B will be omitted to avoid redundant description.

  When the menu item "big hit history list 102c" is determined on the history list selection screen 100, the history list selection screen 100 is switched to the big hit history confirmation screen 130 and displayed, as shown in the figure, history information on the occurrence of hit games ( Hereinafter, "big hit history information" will be displayed in a list (list 132). The big hit history information includes “big hit type information, the number of rotations from power-on, and information associated with occurrence date and time information”, and in the present embodiment, history information regarding not only a big hit but also a small hit is included. Be The above-mentioned jackpot history information is displayed in the form of "per type, rotation number information and occurrence time information (year / month / day / hour)" as illustrated.

  In the big hit history confirmation screen 130, the history display with a white background in the list 132 indicates a hit type with a relatively low profit status (for example, a time-long hit, a small hit, etc.), and the background is highlighted in black. The history display indicates a hit type with relatively high profit status (for example, probability variation big hit, low probability big hit, etc.).

  The effect control unit 24 grasps the occurrence of the hit game and the hit type by the “big hit start command” or the “small hit start command”, and manages it as the big hit history information. The number of revolutions from the time of power-on is grasped by counting the number of revolutions based on the fluctuation pattern designation command and the fluctuation stop command. When the hit game occurs, the effect control unit 24 creates jackpot history information and stores it in the history information storage area, and displays the jackpot history confirmation screen 130 by a history display request operation by the user. Note that as the big hit history information, one or more specific hit types (for example, two types of probability variation big hit, probability variation big hit and latent probability big hit) may be used as history information.

  As described above, representative history information has been described, but as the other history information, it is possible to configure to be able to display difference ball history information, rotation number history information, base history information, operation rate information, and the like.

  “Difference ball history information” is difference ball information within the business hours of the day (when power is turned on to when the power is shut off), and specifically, from the total out ball (out ball) to the total winning ball number (safe It is the ball number information obtained by subtracting the sphere). For the out ball, detection information by the OUT monitoring switch 49a, and for the safe ball, the winning ball number information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 calculates the difference ball and stores it as history information at power failure. When the "score ball history list 102d" is selected, the ball storage history information may be displayed as a list. Note that the counting period of the ball is not limited to when the power is turned on, but may be started and ended on a regular basis using the RTC (the rotation speed history information, the base history, and the operation rate information described later). The same applies to the counting period).

  The "rotational speed history information" is the total rotational speed information during the business hours of the day (when the power is turned on, when the power is turned off). For the count of the number of rotations, the number of times the effect control unit 24 receives the fluctuation stop command is counted, the number of counts is stored as history information, and when the “number of rotations history list 102e” is selected, the number of rotations The history information may be configured to be displayed as a list.

  The “base history information” is information on the previous base value (history base value) displayed on the performance indicator 99. Since the history base value is managed by the main control unit 20, whenever the history base value is updated, the history base value at that time is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 The new history base value may be stored as history information, and the base history information may be displayed as a list when the “base history list 102 f” is selected. Note that the base value in this embodiment means the pop-out rate in the normal state, but B% (B-percent) information (the suction rate in the normal state) obtained by subtracting the base value from 100 (in the normal state) It is possible to display information on the ball-drawing rate (total award number of balls with power support / total number of balls with power support) × 100) information in the definite change state and the short time state as history information.

  The "operation rate history information" is information on how much the gaming machine has been operating during business hours, and more specifically, within the business hours of '1 day (power on-power off) The actual out ball number '÷' theoretical maximum out ball number '× 100' (the display value is an appropriate value such as a value obtained by rounding off the first decimal place). The operation rate may be stored as history information, and the operation rate history information may be displayed as a list when the “operation rate history list 102 g” is selected. The theoretical maximum out ball number is generally 78,000 shots as the theoretical maximum out ball number when the operating time is 13 hours and the performance of the launcher 32 (100 shots per minute) is used. Be

  The history information described above is game information obtained from the game operation state of the gaming machine 1 and various processing states, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, the user may be configured to be able to input any information (for example, repair history (repair history or replacement history of game components, etc.) using the operation means (direction key 75 and effect button 13), The input information may be stored as “user comment history (special history)”, and the history information may be configured to be displayed as a list. It is possible to adopt a widely known input processing method such as displaying a Chinese numeral list screen with a function and letting the operation means select and determine an arbitrary character from the character group. The list 102 h is an example in which the history information input by the user is displayed as selectable menu items.

  Note that it is not necessary to add date and time information to all of the various types of history information described above, and it is possible to appropriately determine which history information to add date and time information to. Also, the maximum number of accumulated history information may be 50. It may be 20 or 100, and the number can be determined appropriately. Moreover, not only the type of history information described above, but also specific reach occurrence history information (for example, strong SP reach occurrence history), history information on what kind of effect the jackpot occurred (reach type at the time of winning, jackpot type at that time History) etc. The type of history information may be at least one type, and the number of types is not particularly limited.

Thirteenth Embodiment
In the twelfth embodiment, an example has been described in which history information in which a predetermined event is associated with date and time information is displayed. However, not only date and time information, but other time information may be associated and displayed. For example, the elapsed time from the occurrence of a predetermined event may be listed and displayed as history information.

  FIG. 44 shows an example in which information associated with “the power-on elapsed time since the previous time” is listed and displayed as history information instead of the date and time information of FIG. 43 (A) described above. The “power-on elapsed time from the previous time” described in this embodiment refers to the power-on time (power-off time until the next setting change operation is performed, with the point of time when the current setting change operation is performed as a base point (zero)). If you do not count it means. In addition, the maximum value which can be counted as energization elapsed time is 999 hours 59 minutes (999: 59).

A display example of FIG. 44 will be described. Here, “when the setting change operation is performed” is treated as “when the setting completion command is received”. Further, as in the case of the twelfth embodiment, the “setting confirmation” is treated as storing the point in time when the setting confirmation end command is received as history information. In the case of this example, since numbers 9 and 10 indicate that history information is not stored, the oldest history information has contents corresponding to the column of number 8.
Since the number 8 is a display of “setting change setting 1 999: 59”, 'the power ON time since the last setting change is confirmed (changed) to setting 1 after at least 999 hours 59 minutes'
Means
Since the number 7 is a display of “setting confirmation setting 1: 00: 02”, it was confirmed that it was setting 1 two minutes after the power ON time from the previous setting change (here, setting 1 confirmation when setting 8). It means'.
Since the number 6 is a display of “setting change setting 17:12”, the setting is confirmed (changed) in the setting 6 after the power ON time 17 hours 12 minutes from the time of the previous setting change (here, the setting 1 confirmation of the number 8). ) Means 'do' and also
Since the number 5 is a display of “setting confirmation setting 6 00:03”, it was confirmed that the setting 6 was made 3 minutes after the power ON time from the previous setting change (here, the setting 6 setting 6 confirmation). It means'. The same applies to the numbers 1 to 4 and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, by displaying information as a list of setting change confirmation history information in association with the power passage elapsed time from the previous time, how long the setting change operation has not been performed, or the setting change or setting confirmation operation by Goto action The presence or absence of can be easily confirmed.

  A configuration combining one or more of all the embodiments described above (including the configuration described in each embodiment and all of the modifications) may be combined, and the contents described in each embodiment are limited to only the individual embodiments. It is not limited.

  Although the pachinko gaming machine using the gaming ball as the gaming medium has been described in each of the embodiments described above, it is not particularly limited as long as the gaming machine can achieve the object of the present invention. For example, a game machine using game medals as a game medium, a game machine using game media using electromagnetic recording (a game machine such as a so-called "enclosed game machine (managed game machine)"), a rotating drum It may be an expression game machine or the like.

  The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 gaming machine,
2 front frame (door),
3 game boards,
3a playing area,
6 glass doors,
9 saucer,
15 firing operation handle,
19 game ball payout device,
20 main control unit (main control board),
24 Effect control unit (effect control board, liquid crystal control board)
28 launch control board,
29 Payout control board,
32 launchers,
34, 34a upper starting opening, upper starting opening sensor 35, 35a lower starting opening, lower starting opening sensor,
36 Liquid Crystal Display,
37, 37a Normal symbol opening, Normal symbol opening,
38a, 38b special symbol display device,
39a Normal symbol display device,
50, 52a big prize mouth, big prize mouth sensor 41, 41c normal fluctuation winning a prize device, normally electric role item solenoid,
52, 52c special variation winning device, big winning opening solenoid,
43, 43a General winning opening, General winning opening sensor,
45 decorative lamps,
46 speakers,
47 Movable Wings,
49 out,
60 full detection sensor,
61 door opening sensor,
94 Setting Key Switch,
95 setting change switch,
96 setting change complete switch,
97 setting indicator,
98 RAM clear switch,
99 performance indicator,
201 main control CPU,
202 main control ROM,
203 main control RAM,
241 production control CPU,
242 production control ROM,
243 Effect control RAM.

Claims (3)

A control unit configured to be able to execute a power on process at the time of power on, and centrally controlling the game operation;
Door opening detection means capable of detecting the open state of the front door disposed openably and closably on the gaming machine body;
Setting switch,
And a RAM clear switch,
It is a gaming machine configured to be able to set to any one of a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player,
The power on process is
Setting change control processing for controlling the set value to a changeable setting change state;
RAM clear processing for clearing the RAM of the control means;
Setting confirmation control processing for controlling the current setting value to a setting confirmation state that can be confirmed;
Acquire a setting switch signal that indicates the on / off state of the setting switch, a door open signal that indicates the door open / close state of the door open detection means, and a RAM clear switch signal that indicates the on / off state of the RAM clear switch. Possible signal acquisition processing,
Determining the state of the signal acquired by the signal acquisition process;
The determination process is
A setting change transition determination process of determining whether to shift to the setting change control process based on the state of the setting switch signal, the state of the door open signal, and the state of the RAM clear switch signal;
RAM clear transition determination processing that determines whether to shift to the RAM clear processing based on at least the state of the RAM clear switch signal;
A setting confirmation shift determination process of determining whether to shift to the setting confirmation control process based on the state of the setting switch signal, the state of the door open signal, and the state of the RAM clear switch signal;
A game machine characterized by The setting change migration determination process is
When at least the state of the door open signal is a door closed state, it is determined that the setting change control process is not to be performed,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that. The setting confirmation shift determination process is
When at least the state of the door open signal is the door closed state, it is determined that the setting confirmation control process is not to be performed,
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that.